JP2021178228A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of diversifying a display performance while suppressing an increase in a data amount.SOLUTION: A VDP 135 executes a geometry calculation including arrangement processing of image data onto a world coordinate system and executes rendering including projection processing onto a projection plane so as to create drawing data as two-dimensional data. When executing a distortion performance, the VDP arranges a refraction object to superpose on a distortion area which is a part of a background image, displaces respective vertex coordinates constituting the refraction object in a Z direction so as to deform the refraction object. The distorted image is thus displayed on the distortion area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set on the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-208830

Here, it is considered that it is possible to diversify the display effect by performing a display effect that changes a part of the image displayed on the display unit. However, if, for example, the image data of the entire display unit is provided in order to perform the display effect, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying display effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of data. Is.

The present invention
A display means having a display unit and
A display control means for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data generated by the data generation means and updating the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means includes a changing means for changing the specific individual image by changing the change target portion which is a part of the specific individual image displayed on the display unit by using the specific image data. It is characterized by.

According to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the increase in the amount of data.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process executed by the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which is another form of the processing composition of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which is another form of the processing composition of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how drawing data is created with execution of drawing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a mask executed by a display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of the 1st mask display. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of the 2nd mask display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a mask executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation occurrence command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a symbol executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the background executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for the background executed by VDP. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a concatenated object. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the concatenated object effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(c) connected object effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a particle dispersion object, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a particle dispersion texture, and (c) to (e) are for explaining key data. It is explanatory drawing of. (A) is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a concatenated object executed by a display CPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a blending table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the particle dispersion effect executed by VDP. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion effect, and (b-1) and (b-2) are for simply explaining what kind of trajectory each particle single image is displaced. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the setting process for the particle dispersion effect executed by VDP. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sea surface object, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal map data. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of applying a pair of normal map data to the object for the sea surface. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to apply the change data to each surface data (a) to (c). (A) is a flowchart showing a calculation process for sea level display executed by the display CPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining sea level animation data. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for sea level display executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a normal parameter executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of setting the color information in each surface data (a)-(c). (A) is a flowchart showing the color information setting process for sea level display executed by VDP, and (b) is a flowchart showing the adjustment process for sea level executed by VDP. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea level display, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining the setting mode of the color information of the region where the sea level display is performed. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the color information setting process for sea level display executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for effect in the opening / closing execution mode which is executed by the display CPU. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of VRAM used for adjusting the focus in VDP, and (b) is a flowchart showing a drawing data synthesis process executed in VDP. (A) is a flowchart showing an adjustment process for focusing effect executed by VDP, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a focus range and each blurring range. (A) is a flowchart showing a blur generation process executed by VDP, and (b-1) and (b-2) are explanatory views for explaining an extraction mode of a unit area in the blur generation process. .. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which focus display is not performed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which focus display is performed. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a special object, (b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a first partial texture, and (c-1) to (c). -4) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second partial texture. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a special character executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the texture mapping process for a special character executed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the pattern change display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of a round moving image data. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by a round moving image data, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the display content by the inserted image data. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the round effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process by a moving image decoder. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the round effect executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the mapping process for round effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of (a)-(d) round production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the round moving image data in another form. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the 1st round moving image data, (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the 2nd round moving image data, and (c) each round moving image. It is a graph for demonstrating the bit rate of image data. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the round effect in another form. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round effect in another form, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the mapping process for a round effect in another form. It is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of a round effect. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each object used for displaying a sandy beach background image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each texture used for displaying a sandy beach background image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a perspective by changing a viewpoint. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting mode of each object at the time of creating a background image for effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a sandy beach background. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the background of the sandy beach sprinting effect, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the relationship between the distance from the viewpoint of each object, and the relative speed with respect to the viewpoint. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the production of a sandy beach sprinting effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface which displayed the sandy beach background image, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the state of the sandy beach sprinting effect. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a refraction object, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a first modified form, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second modified form. (D) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating α data for refraction. It is a flowchart which shows the distortion effect calculation processing. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st coordinate mapping data, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the 2nd coordinate mapping data. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for distortion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the texture mapping process for distortion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the fusion process for distortion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of a distortion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) base object and partial object, (b) explanatory diagram for demonstrating base texture, and (c) explanatory diagram for demonstrating each partial texture. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for blinking effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of blinking production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right sides as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and it is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. At the same time, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, a character display unit 34, and the like. ing.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, and the lower operating opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area through the out opening 27. Further, in the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 27, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 22, the upper operation port 23, the lower operation port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operating ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 23 faces upward. The lower operating port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric accessory 24a is opened (supported state or guided state), so that the lower operating port 24 It is possible to win a prize in 24.

The variable winning device 22 is provided with a large winning opening 22a leading to the back side of the game board 20, and is also provided with an opening / closing door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The opening / closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which the game ball is easy to win when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become like. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an aspect to be done.

The main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display unit 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the winning of the lower operating port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 33, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is obtained on the main display unit 33. After being displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a plurality of patterns are displayed. It is conceivable that the seed colors are switched and displayed.

In the accessory display unit 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 25, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a variable manner. After the is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operating port 24 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variablely displays a symbol, which is a type of symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 26, a center frame 32 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display surface is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the upper actuating port 23 or the lower actuating port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times in which the game result is a big hit result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31.

As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a pattern that is a kind of pattern consists of nine main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is set with three symbol rows SA1, SA2, and SA3 as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol sequence SA1 to SA3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol sequence SA1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row SA3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row SA1 and the lower symbol row SA3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string SA2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row SA2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row SA1 → the lower symbol row SA3 → the middle symbol row SA2, and all the symbol rows SA1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ SA3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. NS.

Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is completed in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then the variation display is completed. An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 23 and 24, the variation display is started on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game.

A first reserved light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 32. The number of winning balls in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first reserved light emitting unit 35.

A second reserved light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the accessory display unit 34 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 32. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second reserved light emitting unit 36. It should be noted that the functions of the reserved light emitting units 35 and 36 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 31.

A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and the guide rail is configured by the rail portion 37, and is fired from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the game ball launch mechanism, the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 42 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 47 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

In the region of the upper bulging portion 46 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 including an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect content on the display surface G or the like of the symbol display device 31 a predetermined effect content.

On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. Further, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply, and a launch control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main control of the game. In the main control device 50, the board box accommodating the main control board 51 and the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening is provided. You may do it. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or the adhesive layer is peeled off and adhered to the adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that allows random access when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and a launch control device 57 are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and the launch control device 57 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control boards 51 is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 130 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply and the launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes a process for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, a detection sensor provided on a one-to-one basis for a winning-compatible winning portion such as a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, and a through gate 25 is provided. It is included, and the winning determination (entry determination) for each entry portion is performed in the MPU 52. Further, in the MPU 52, a big hit generation lottery and a big hit result type lottery are executed based on the winnings in the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating opening 24, and a reach generation lottery for each game and a lottery for determining the display continuation period are executed.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 33, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting the display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot generation lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a symbol. Reach generation when the display device 31 deviates and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuations in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31. A variable type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as acquired information when a prize is awarded to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored in any of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 as reserved information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 can be reserved and stored. Further, the hold area RE is provided with a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA is used to specify the number of the winning history stored in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. Information is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 33, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE. A hit / fail determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table in the hit / miss table storage area as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 53. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of big hit results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the lower after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

As an aspect of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning a prize in the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high-frequency time). ) Has elapsed, or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (low-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low-frequency time). Is continued until the elapse of the game or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 41 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, and the opening time limit for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 22 does not substantially win a prize. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number may be set longer than the opening limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 22.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24, the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time is relatively high and low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening is further performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 24a is won in the open state and the electric accessory 24a is opened multiple times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 24 will be won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 23 is higher than that of the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is more likely than the upper operating port 23. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric motor open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time (time to be executed) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 34), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the winning probability, one of the conditions or any combination of conditions is applied. This may increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the mode of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. In the support mode, which is the low frequency winning mode, the high frequency support mode is used, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

As a kind of probability change jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An unspecified 2R probability change jackpot result (a result of an unspecified high probability corresponding game result or a latent probability change state) may be included. In this case, the probabilistic jackpot results will be further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the winning / failing result in the winning / failing lottery, a special losing result that shifts to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode and does not cause the transition to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the transition may be included. .. In the configuration where both the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result are set as described above, the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, for example, when either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special deviation result occurs in the normal game state, it is the same. It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 31 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a game in which the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result. In the display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be the variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31 is started. say.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the special display result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode is performed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. Includes a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may hold is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbol, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbol, a high frequency winning mode is generated on a preset effective line in the display surface of the symbol display device 31. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols that may establish the corresponding jackpot symbol combination, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol is displayed by the final stop symbol row. Is to do.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 3 will be described in detail. Either is valid when the variable display of the symbol is first terminated in the upper symbol row SA1 and then the variable display of the symbol is terminated in the lower symbol row SA3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol column SA2 in the middle row. It becomes a reach display by being struck. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row SA2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 31, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, or a part of the symbol rows. In a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is included. Further, the background image has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game rounds that shift to the open / close execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and the reach random numbers are executed in the game rounds that shift to the open / close execution mode that shifts to the low-frequency winning mode. It is not executed regardless of the value of the counter C3. Further, in the game rounds that do not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Will be executed if there is. On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 50, but by the voice emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 33 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 33 and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 31. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply and a launch control device 57 are also connected. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on the winning determination result to the winning ball corresponding to the prize. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 57 based on the fact that the launch handle 41 is operated. The power supply and the launch control device 57 drive the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Further, a main display unit 33 and a character display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game round, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a is clearly shown, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

Further, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52. .. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 24a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

Further, a voice emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effect are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

<Process executed by MPU 52 of main control device 50>
Next, the process executed by the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress process, a normal process that is repeatedly executed in the first cycle and a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle are started and executed by interrupting the normal process. Timer interrupt processing is set.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is periodically started by the MPU 52 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S101, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, the state of various prize detection sensors is read, the state of these various prize detection sensors is determined, and the process of storing the prize detection information is executed. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, a prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 55 to pay out the prize ball is set.

In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 25. In the winning process for thru, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is used as the electric utility on condition that the number of accessory holding storages stored in the electric accessory holding area 54c is less than 4. Store in the hold area 54c.

After that, in step S105, a winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the starting hold storage number stored in the holding ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, ". 4 ”), Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b, provided that it is less than the above. .. In this case, it is stored in the first hold area of the free hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE, that is, the hold area corresponding to the current number of start hold storages. After executing the process of step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S209 are executed as processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S210 and S211 are executed in the remaining time.

In step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55. If a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

In the following step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 31, and display control of the main display unit 33 are performed.

After that, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the big hit winning is completed, the transition process to the open / close execution mode is executed, and the open / close process of the variable winning device 22 is started. When starting the open / close execution mode, during the open / close execution mode, ending the open / close execution mode, etc., various commands for the open / close execution mode are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. In addition, when the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode is changed according to the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

In the following step S205, a demo display process is executed. In the demo display process, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting a demo elapses without starting a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. Executes the determination process of whether or not it has been done. Further, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round. Executes the determination process of whether or not it has been done. Then, if it is determined that the elapse has passed, a command for displaying a demo is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

The demo display refers to a start waiting effect displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the image is not limited to this, and for example, the symbol performs a predetermined operation. After or instead of displaying the image, a moving image with a maker name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display will be diversified.

In the following step S206, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower actuating port 24 is executed. In this electric service support process, the information stored in the electric service holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a, to open / close the electric accessory 24a, and to use the electric accessory 24a. The display control of the display unit 34 and the like are performed.

After that, in step S207, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 58 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 57. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S208, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the RAM 54. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S209, that is, the previous process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S210, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Further, in step S211th, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the power failure flag is stored, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S212 is executed. That is, in step S212, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S213, access to the RAM 54 is prohibited in step S214, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

Next, the game times control process in step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the game round control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S302. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating openings 23 and 24 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in the variable display. If the main display unit 33 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S303 to S305.

In the game round start process, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start reserved ball number N is “0”. When the starting reserved ball number N is "0", it means that the reserved ball storage area 54b does not store the reserved information. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

If the number of start reserved balls N is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S304. Specifically, the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. After that, after executing the fluctuation start processing in step S305, the main game times control processing is terminated.

The fluctuation start processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the pending information shifted to the execution area AE, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 and the winning / failing table corresponding to the current winning / losing lottery mode are referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is won. do.

In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, the type determination process is executed in step S403. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the reserved information shifted to the execution area AE.

In the following step S404, the stop result setting process corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of this fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 53. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result, and is specified in step S403 in step S404. Information on the mode of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot is not won, in step S405, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed. Specifically, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the time of disconnection stored in advance in the ROM 53. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S404 or step S405, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S406.

In such a process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 31 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the big hit results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, even if it is not a big hit result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the ROM 53, and the variation thereof. The display time information is set in the variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach storage stored in the ROM 53. Then, the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter. Incidentally, the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach generation.

The fluctuation display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of start-holding balls increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The variation display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the number of start-holding balls and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of off-reach and the case of non-reach.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S406, the variation command and the type command are set in step S407. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. Here, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variation display time acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach generation, so that it varies. Even if the command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the voice emission control device 60, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes any one of the normal jackpot result information, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, the 15R probability variation jackpot result information, and the deviation result information as the game result information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S407 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). After the process of step S407 is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S408. After that, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 8), when the main display unit 33 is in the variable display, the processes of steps S306 to S309 are executed. In this process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game times has elapsed.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S308. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S404 or step S405 is specified, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Display control.

In the following step S309, a variable end command is set. The variable end command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). The voice emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variable end command. Further, a command corresponding to the command is transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

<Another form of the processing configuration in the MPU 52 of the main control device 50>
The processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 is not limited to the above, and may be the following processing configuration. 10 and 11 are flowcharts for explaining another form of the process in the MPU 52, FIG. 10 shows the main process executed when the supply of operating power is started, and FIG. 11 shows the main process. On the other hand, the timer interrupt processing that is started by interrupting periodically is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the main process, first, in step S501, the start-up process accompanying the power-on is executed. In the following step S502, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. After that, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the emission control device 57 is turned on, and in the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the RAM 54. Further, in step S505, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S506, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined.

If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power cut flag is stored, and the RAM determination value is normal, the power cut flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S507, and the RAM is cleared in step S508. Erase the judgment value. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S510, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S511. Then, after executing the processes of steps S509 to S511, the process returns to step S509 and the processes of steps S509 to S511 are repeated.

It should be noted that the interrupt may be disabled immediately after the interrupt enable is set in step S509. In this case, the timer interrupt processing described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt permission is set when the start timing is reached in the situation where the interrupt disable is set. ..

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S512 to S513. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the RAM determination value, the process proceeds to the process of steps S512 to S513 in the same manner.

In step S512, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to "0", and in step S513, the initial setting of the RAM 54 is executed. After that, the process proceeds from step S509 to step S511.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the other embodiment.

In the timer interrupt processing, the same processing as in steps S101 to S105 is executed in steps S601 to S605.

After that, in step S606, the variation type counter CS update process is executed, in step S607, the game times control process is executed, in step S608, the game state transition process is executed, and in step S609, the demo display process is executed. Is executed, the electric service support process is executed in step S610, the game ball launch control process is executed in step S611, and the external output process is executed in step S612. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The detailed contents of each of these processes are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9 above.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the voice emission control device 60 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the voice emission control device 60 includes a voice emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that allows random access when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. An effect operation device 48 and a main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, a speaker unit 45, and a display control device 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. There is.

The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start the effect for the game round by receiving the variable command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes the game round effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and the game round effect end process is executed. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect process is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the demo display needs to be started, and the demo display process is executed.

Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

In the game rounding effect start processing, based on both the variable command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time of the corresponding game round and the reach display grasping process for grasping the presence / absence of reach display are performed. And, the process of grasping the occurrence of the jackpot result for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the process of grasping the jackpot type for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasping results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the symbol that determines the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 in this game round. Execute the type grasping process. Then, based on the result of each of the above grasping processes, the display control device issues a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Send to 130.

Further, in the game rounding effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for whether or not to display a notice is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, if the notice display is won, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 130.

Further, in the game turn effect start process, the display light emitting table for the game turn and the voice table for the game turn are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of each of the above processes. The display light emitting table for the game round defines the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the progress process of the corresponding game round. Further, the audio table for the game round defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the game round.

In the game round production end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game rounding effect end processing, an end command including information for ending the game rounding effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

In the jackpot production process, based on the various commands for jackpot production received, the production mode such as opening, each round, between each round, and ending is grasped, and the jackpot production corresponding to the grasped result is grasped. Command is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emitting table for the jackpot effect and the audio table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. Is specified.

In the demo display process, the demo display effect mode is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emitting table for the demo display and the audio table for the demo display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demo display. Is specified.

In addition to the above processing, the processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first reserved light emitting unit 35 and the second reserved light emitting unit 36. included.

Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operation device 48 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operation device 48 based on the operation of the operation unit of the effect operation device 48. And execute the operation correspondence process. In addition, even when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation correspondence process is executed.

Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, the effect in which the display mode is changed is executed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the type of the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed are set to a predetermined type, and there are a plurality of types. Display mode is set. The detailed contents of the display mode and the processing configuration related to the switching of the display mode based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 will be described in detail later.

<Display control device 130>
The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to the input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Will be done. It should be noted that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Is done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus, and various data stored in the memory module 133 are transferred to the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 31 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. conduct. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

The memory module 133 is a storage means that stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 include image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for textures attached to the object, and one frame. In the image of, the image data for the back surface constituting the rearmost image is included.

Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Further, the polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the image data for an object, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates set in advance for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, the direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object, and when the texture is pasted on the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including a pattern, a character, or the like is generated. The way the image data for the texture is held is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back surface is arbitrary, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

The work RAM 132 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 134 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage retention, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 includes a decompression buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the decompression buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data (generated data) is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144, and a mode buffer 145, and details of these will be described later.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 31a in a symbol display device 31. Since the VDP135 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped so as to correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface G.

The rendering unit 152 determines the appearance of the object by adjusting the light source and pasting the texture to each clipped object based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the rendering unit 152 creates two-dimensional data by projecting each object on a predetermined two-dimensional plane, makes various adjustments based on the depth information, and stores drawing data for one frame, which is the two-dimensional data, as a frame buffer. Create in 142. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary for displaying the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

In addition, all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are provided. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute the processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display surface G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Corresponding to this, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output based on the gradation data. A synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 155.

Further, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying the image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined processing will be described later.

<Basic processing in the display CPU 131>
Next, the basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main process to be started when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process.

In the main process, first, the initial setting process is executed in step S701.

In the initial setting process, the initial adjustment process of the scaler of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As a result, a command for initial resolution adjustment is sent to VDP135. This initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a command for initial resolution adjustment.

When the resolution initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP135, the numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler in the register 153 of the VDP135. As a result, when the image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

Further, in the initial setting process, the initial adjustment process of the ground color is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135 so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each frame area 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical information. This initial numerical information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a command for initial ground color adjustment.

When the VDP135 is transmitted with the ground color initial adjustment command, the initial numerical information is stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 153 of the VDP135. As a result, when the drawing data is created, the ground color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas that have not been updated from the initial numerical information. Although black is set as the initial ground color in the pachinko machine 10, it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

After executing the initial setting process in step S701, various interrupts are permitted in step S702. This allows the display CPU 131 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. After that, in the main process, the process of step S702 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

The command interrupt process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the voice emission control device 60, regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received on the input port 137 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that the command is newly received is set in the corresponding area. After that, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the process before the command interrupt process was started.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP 135 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 135 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner portion of the display surface G and is on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the dots lined up, and the image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 131 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, the command analysis process is executed in step S801. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 are analyzed. In the following step S802, it is determined whether or not a new command is received based on the analysis result of step S801. If a new command has been received, the command correspondence process is executed in step S803.

In the command correspondence process, the data table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 133. The data table defines the processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. It is a group of information.

Here, as the commands received by the display CPU 131 from the voice emission control device 60, there are fluctuation pattern commands, symbol designation commands, and advance notice commands as described above. When these commands are received, the data table necessary for executing the game rotation effect corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 31 is read out. In addition, there is an end command as the command to be received, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for finally stopping the currently executed game rotation effect is read out. Further, as the command to be received, there are various commands for the jackpot effect, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the jackpot effect is read out. Further, as the command to be received, there is a command for displaying a demo, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demo display is read out. Furthermore, based on the read data table, other program data necessary for executing the process is also read.

After executing the command correspondence process in step S803, the pointer update process is executed in step S804. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the display CPU 131 to grasp the processing necessary for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

In the following step S805, the task process is executed. In the task processing, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 135 are calculated. The details of the task processing will be described later.

In the following step S806, the drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 135 will be described in detail later. After that, this V interrupt process is terminated.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the task process, first, in step S901, the setting process for starting control is executed. In the setting process for starting control, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for which control (calculation) is newly started in this process. The individual image is a one-two-dimensional image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, or one three-dimensional image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is an image.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled started in this process. If it exists, the work RAM 132 searches for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and has a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Allocate free buffer area so that. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the parameters for starting control according to the individual images are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

In the following step S902, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing.

In the following step S903, the background arithmetic processing is executed. In the background calculation process, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and shade, and projection in the world coordinate system are performed for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character. It executes a process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation.

In the following step S904, the effect calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect is executed.

In the following step S905, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for the image of the symbol that is the target of the variable display in each game round.

Incidentally, in each process of step S903 to step S905, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S901 is executed. Further, in each process of steps S903 to S905, animation data set to change various parameters of individual images according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached are used. This animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 133, and is determined according to the type of the individual image.

After that, in step S906, after executing the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system, this task process is terminated. In the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images targeted for control update by each process of steps S903 to S905. To execute. The grasp is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S906. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 may be the same as the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135. In this case, the process of step S906 is executed. No need.

In the setting process for starting control in step S901, the control start timing of each individual image may be distributed and set in order to distribute the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 15 (a) to 15 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information on the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created for the image for one frame related to the drawing list, is set. There is. In addition, various designated information is set in the header information. The contents of various designated information will be described later. When the moving image data is included as the image data handled by the VDP 135, the header information includes the presence / absence of the decoding designation and the address information in which the moving image data to be decoded is stored in the memory module 133. It may be set.

In addition to the above header information, multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time are set in the drawing list, and information on the drawing order of each image data and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the parameter information is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 15A, the image data for the back surface is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second object, the background object B is set as the third object, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the effect is set in the order after the image data for the background, for example, the object A for the effect is set as the mth, the object B for the effect is set as the m + 1th, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the symbol is set in the order after the image data for the effect, for example, the symbol object A is set as the nth, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1th, and so on. There is.

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the reverse of the above. The image data for the effect or the image data for the background may be set after the data, and the image data for the design is set in the order between the image data for the predetermined effect and the image data for the other effect. It may have been done.

Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... Has multiple types of parameters set. Regarding the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back surface, specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the information of the address of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 133 and the information for the back surface. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data of, and the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back surface. Information on the rotation angle that indicates the rotation angle inside, information on the scale that indicates the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back, and the image for the back. Information with a uniform α value indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when setting data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the image data for the object. Further, the information of these coordinates is set for the image data for the object, but is not set for the image data for the texture. In the image data for the texture, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the image data for the object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. This UV coordinate value is referred to by VDP135 when texture mapping.

The parameter (P1) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera when projecting image data for the back surface on a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and when rendering image data for the back surface. Information on the light, including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the image, is set.

In the parameter (P1), information specified by the Z test indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of method for erasing the hidden surface, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is a pixel (or voxel, pixel, polygon) lined up on the Z-axis when a large number of objects or 2D images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When applying the Z-buffer method, the Z-buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for erasing the hidden surface. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When applying the Z sort method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of the numerical information and the arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

In the parameter (P1), information on α data specification indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, information on fog specification indicating whether or not fog is applied and an application target, and a background created to display a background image are displayed. Information for specifying separate storage indicating whether or not to save separately for the drawing data for the image is set.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and image data for texture, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the image data for the same texture. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

By setting the uniform α value and α data as described above, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data and the image data for texture is not finely controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but is uniform for all pixels. In situations where control is sufficient with, the required data capacity can be reduced by being able to handle with a uniform α value, and by applying α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, a position in the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained. In this case, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. This makes it possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

Separate storage means that the drawing data for the background image once created is written and saved in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b so that the drawing data for the background image can be used as it is in the subsequent frames. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode area 145a and a second mode area 145b so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. The specific contents of this separate storage will be described in detail later.

In other parameters such as the parameter P (2), as shown in FIG. 15 (c), among the various information in FIG. 15 (b), the object information and the texture are replaced with the image data information for the back surface. Information and is set. As these information, information on the address of the area where the object or texture is stored is set in the memory module 133.

The drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, a state in which drawing data is created with the execution of the drawing process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, the background setting process is executed in step S1002.

In the background setting process, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data or the object for the character is already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, the free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if the free buffer area is secured, the initialization process of that area is executed. After that, the memory module 133 grasps and reads out the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, coordinates values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to have the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list. Is executed in the world conversion process for converting to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and is set in the buffer area secured above.

If it is placed, the update processing of various parameters set in the buffer area already secured is executed. Further, in the background setting process, the control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In the following step S1003, the setting process for the effect is executed. In the setting process for the effect, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object for displaying the effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already placed in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the above background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the effect, the control end process for erasing the image data for the effect that is not specified in the drawing list of this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In the following step S1004, the setting process for the symbol is executed. In the setting process for the symbol, the object for displaying the symbol is grasped from the image data specified in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already placed in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the above background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the symbol, the control end process for erasing the image data for the symbol that is not specified in the drawing list of this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

By executing the processes of steps S1002 to S1004, as shown in FIG. 17, the object is designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale also specified by the drawing list is completed.

Note that FIG. 17 simply shows how the rearmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, the rearmost image PC1 does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction set to the back side with respect to all of the various objects PC2 to PC10. For example, the rearmost image PC1 is in a bent or tilted state. By arranging in, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction may be closer to the front side than some objects. However, the area of the rearmost image PC1 in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as this part of the object is all because the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are on the back side of the object. The object is not covered by the rearmost image PC1.

In the following step S1005, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the viewpoint PC 11 shown in the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC 11 is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (rearmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10), and the camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 17 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In the following step S1006, the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the field of view coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems is converted into the field of view coordinate system corresponding to the field of view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

In the following step S1007, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S1006 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in that state, extraction is performed in step S1006 with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display surface G of the symbol display device 31). Clip each individual image that has been created.

In the following step S1008, the lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. ..

In the following step S1009, the color information setting process is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units for each object extracted by the clipping process. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting a texture corresponding to each object extracted by the clipping process is executed. In addition, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping is executed.

After that, in step S1010 and step S1011, each individual image extracted in step S1007 and further completed in the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). And parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, in step S1010, the drawing data creation process for the background is executed. In the background drawing data creation process, background drawing data is created by projecting the rearmost image and the object set as the background image onto the screen area PC 12 while erasing the hidden surface.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 4, and the screen buffer 144 includes a background buffer in which drawing data for the background is written, and drawing data and patterns for effect. An effect in which drawing data for the purpose is written together and a buffer for the design are set. Further, in the buffer for the background and the buffer for the effect and the design, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC 12 is set. The background drawing data created in step S1010 is written in the background buffer. If the background image data is not specified in the drawing list, the background drawing data is not created.

In the following step S1011, the drawing data creation process for the effect and the design is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the effect and the pattern, the object set as the effect image and the object set as the pattern are projected onto the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is erased, so that the screen buffer is used. Drawing data for the effect and the design is created in the buffer for the effect and the design in 144. If the image data for the effect and the design is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the effect and the design is not created.

Then, in step S1012, after executing the drawing data synthesizing process, the main drawing process is terminated. In the drawing data compositing process of step S1012, the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect and the pattern, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of step S1010 and step S1011, are combined and the drawing data thereof is combined. The composition result is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn as drawing data for one frame.

In this case, the writing order is defined so as to line up from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for the background → drawing data for the effect and the design. Therefore, the drawing data for the background is first written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for the effect and the design is written. At this time, if the completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be drawn, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if the semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is used. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. Then, the calculation for fusion is executed.

Here, to explain the calculation for fusion in more detail, each numerical information of RGB of each dot in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn is set to the pixel to be drawn in the drawing data for the effect and the design. Based on the α value
R: "R value of the back image" x ("1"-"α value") + "R value of the front image" x "α value"
G: "G value of the back image" x ("1"-"α value") + "G value of the front image" x "α value"
B: "B value of the back image" x ("1"-"α value") + "B value of the front image" x "α value"
Will be.

Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for the blank portion where projection is not performed in the drawing data for the effect and the design.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for the relevant frame one frame later. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the drawing data is switched by the switching by the selector circuit. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

It should be noted that steps S1002 to S1007 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S1008 to S1012 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, the mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

As described above, the Z-buffer 143 is used when the hidden surface is erased by the Z-buffer method. Here, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is started in each drawing data creation process of step S1010 and step S1011 in the drawing process (FIG. 16) when the Z test is specified in the drawing list. Further, when the Z test is specified, the display CPU 131 sets the Z axis of the screen area PC12, which is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer, so as to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. The pixel to be displayed is determined among the pixels arranged in the direction parallel to the Z-axis direction.

In the drawing data creation process for the background in step S1010, the image for the back surface and the object for the background are targeted for the hidden surface processing, and in the effect of step S1011 and the drawing data creation process for the pattern, the object for the effect and the object for the pattern are used. Object is subject to hidden surface processing. Further, in the hidden surface processing in the effect and the drawing data creation process for the design, the α value of complete transparency is set for the blank portion in which neither the object for the effect nor the object for the design is set.

Only one Z-buffer 143 is set, and it has an area with the same number of dots as the background buffer in the screen buffer 144, and also has an area with the same number of dots as the effect and design buffers. doing.

First, in step S1101, the individual image included on the Z-axis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) is used as the target pixel of the individual image to be tested this time. Grasp the set Z value. In the following step S1102, the Z value set in the dot area corresponding to the drawing target dot on a one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In the following step S1103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the front side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S1102. If it corresponds to the front side, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the Z value grasped in step S1101 is overwritten in the dot area referred to in step S1102 in the Z buffer 143. In the following step S1105, the numerical information for drawing such as the color information set for the pixel referred to in step S1101 is overwritten in the area of the projection target dot this time in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144. After that, the process proceeds to step S1106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that it does not correspond to the front side, the process proceeds to step S1106 without executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1105. That is, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or is on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. At the same time, the numerical information for drawing that has already been set is retained as it is. On the other hand, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the front side in the Z-axis direction from the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. , Numerical information for drawing is also updated.

In step S1106, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all the target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If it is not completed, the process returns to step S1101 and a Z test is performed on the new target pixel.

If it is completed, in step S1107, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC12. If it is not completed, in step S1108, after updating the projection target dot, the process returns to step S1101 and a Z test is performed on the new projection target dot. If it is completed, this hidden surface processing is terminated.

By executing the hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual images on the side closer to the viewpoint are displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the mask (that is, partial display) of the character for the background is executed by utilizing the hidden surface processing. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object for the mask in the display CPU 131.

Hereinafter, the arithmetic processing for the mask executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the arithmetic processing for the mask is used for the background arithmetic processing in step S903 in the task processing (FIG. 14) when it is indicated that the arithmetic processing for the mask should be executed in the area referred to in the data table. Is executed.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display based on the currently set data table. Here, as the mask display, the first mask display and the second mask display are set. The first mask display is a display mode in which the state in which a part of the character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a display mode in which the pixels to be masked from the state in which the entire character is displayed are displayed in a plurality of frames. It is a display mode that gradually increases and finally disappears.

When the first mask display is supported, in step S1202, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1203, the pixels to be masked in the object grasped in step S1202 are grasped based on the currently set data table.

Then, after executing the Z value setting process in step S1204, the present calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, for the pixels targeted for masking in the above object, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and for the pixels not targeted for masking, the Z value is set. The Z value is set so as to be on the front side of the rearmost image and correspond to the position to be originally displayed.

As described above, the arithmetic processing for the mask is executed, and the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set is transmitted to the VDP135, so that the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface processing in the VDP135. The hidden surface process (FIG. 18) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 20 shows a three-dimensional image as a two-dimensional image.

FIG. 20A shows a case where the character CH1 is displayed as usual without the first mask display being performed. Further, FIG. 20 (a-1) is an image diagram of a Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20 (a-2) is an image diagram of the Z value on the display surface G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (a-1), since the Z value is set for each pixel so as to be on the front side of the rearmost image, as shown in FIG. 20 (a-2). The entire character CH1 is displayed.

FIG. 20B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. Further, FIG. 20 (b-1) is an image diagram of a Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20 (b-2) is an image diagram of the Z value on the display surface G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (b-1), a Z value is set for a part of each pixel so as to be on the front side of the backmost image, but for the remaining pixels, the backmost side is set. The Z value is set so as to be on the back side of the image of. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20 (b-2), the character CH1 displays only the portion corresponding to the pixel whose Z value is set so as to be on the front side.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH1 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of types of the first mask display mode for the same character CH1.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the mask (FIG. 19), if it is determined in step S1201 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask. Since it means that the display is supported, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the second mask display based on the currently set data table.

When it is the start timing, in step S1206, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1207, a dedicated mask table is read out based on the currently set data table. The dedicated table for this mask is stored and retained until the second mask display is completed. In the following step S1208, the pixels set as the initial erasure target in the dedicated table for the mask are grasped.

Then, after executing the Z value setting process in step S1209, the present calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, for the pixel grasped as the initial erasure target in step S1208 in the above object, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel is set as the initial erasure target. For pixels that are not, the Z value is set so that it is on the front side of the rearmost image and corresponds to the position where it should be displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1205 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the erasure target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S1211, in the currently read dedicated table for mask, the data corresponding to the value of the erase target counter updated in step S1210 is confirmed, and the pixel to be erased is grasped.

After that, after executing the Z value setting process in step S1212, this calculation process ends. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, the Z value of the pixel grasped as the erase target in step S1211 is set to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and is the erase target. For pixels that do not exist, the Z value is set so that it is on the front side of the rearmost image and corresponds to the position where it should be displayed.

As described above, the arithmetic processing for the mask is executed, and the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set is transmitted to the VDP135, so that the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface processing in the VDP135. The hidden surface process (FIG. 18) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. 21. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a three-dimensional image as a two-dimensional image.

FIG. 21A shows an image diagram of information set in the dedicated mask table, and FIG. 21B shows a case where the character CH2 is displayed as usual without the second mask display being performed. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the object PC 14 corresponding to the character CH2 has a plurality of pixels, and in the dedicated table for mask, the plurality of pixels are grouped by each group and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group indicated as "a1" is set as the initial deletion target, and thereafter, the group indicated as "a2" → the group indicated as “a3” → the group indicated as “a4” → indicated as “a5”. It will be erased in the order of the group.

In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as "a1" is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the pixel portion corresponding to the group "a1" is missing. The character CH2 is displayed. Further, in the subsequent frame, when the group shown as "a2" is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 21D, the pixels corresponding to the group of "a2" in addition to the group of "a1". The character CH2 is displayed with the portion missing. Then, in the frame in which the group finally indicated as "a5" is the target of erasure, the character CH2 is not displayed.

As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask the object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the mask calculation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without significantly increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131. Further, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exert the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Further, a Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set in the hidden portion. Since the rearmost image is an image that always constitutes the back surface in any frame, it serves as an absolute reference as a position in the Z axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the part to be hidden based on this, it is possible to make the setting mode of the Z value when it is hidden uniform, and the process related to the setting of the Z value. The processing load is reduced.

In addition, only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, the pixel may be erased for each pixel instead of being erased for each of a plurality of pixels, and the pixel to be erased may be set as the display target again. May be.

Further, by reversing the setting of the Z value, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that the characters appear sequentially over the display period for a plurality of frames. It may be configured to be.

<Another form of mask processing using Z-buffer 143>
Another form of the mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another form of the arithmetic processing for the mask executed by the display CPU 131.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing based on the currently set data table. When it is the start timing, the object to be masked is grasped based on the data table currently set in step S1302, and the initial stage is performed based on the data table currently set in step S1303. Read the mask table.

In the following step S1304, the mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S1303. ..

The lottery counter is configured to be updated every time the process of step S702 is executed in, for example, the main process (FIG. 12), and further, when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be. Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased is all pixels constituting the object to be masked. Of these, a plurality of pixels are regarded as one group, and there is a one-to-one correspondence with each group.

In the following step S1305, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S1304. Then, after executing the Z value setting process in step S1306, the present calculation process is terminated. In this Z value setting process, in the above object, the Z value of the pixel grasped as the erase target in step S1305 is set to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and is the erase target. For pixels that do not exist, the Z value is set so that it is on the front side of the rearmost image and corresponds to the position where it should be displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the mask table is rewritten so that the information of the erasure target already set as the erasure target is excluded from the initial mask table that has already been read. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the target to be erased is rewritten so as to be duplicated with the information to be erased. This allocation may be performed randomly, or may be configured to be allocated to the information to be erased corresponding to the counter value immediately below on the table.

After that, using the mask table rewritten in step S1307, the processes of steps S1304 to S1306 are executed, and then this calculation process is terminated.

As described above, according to the present alternative mode, the pixels to be erased are randomly selected, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

The mask display using the Z-buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or symbol. For example, when it is applied to a character for effect, the hidden surface process is executed collectively for the image data for background and the image data for effect, so that the rearmost surface is the same as the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the image. Further, when applied to a symbol, the hidden surface processing is collectively executed for the image data for the background, the image data for the effect, and the image data for the symbol, so that the same as the above configuration is performed. , The Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the pattern, it is defined that the pixel in which the Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set in VDP135 is not drawn. If so, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image in the same manner as in the above configuration.

Further, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target is not distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but the Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target, for example. , The Z value on the back side of the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

Further, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint faces.

<Configuration related to switching display mode>
Next, the configuration related to the switching of the display mode will be described.

As described above, the display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the type of the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed are set to a predetermined type. And multiple types of display modes are set. Specifically, the first display mode and the second display mode are set.

In the first display mode and the second display mode, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different from each other. Specifically, when comparing the symbols with the same number, the outer shape and shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and patterns are different. Regarding the background image, the type of the rearmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and types of characters displayed in front of the rearmost image are different. The number of characters to be displayed is set to be larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Specifically, the display mode can be sequentially switched by operating the effect operation device 48 in a situation where the game times or the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, the switching is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game round is being executed.

A specific processing configuration related to switching of the display mode will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an operation occurrence command correspondence process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation occurrence command correspondence process is executed in the command correspondence process of step S803 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 13).

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the voice emission control device 60. If it has not been received, the process corresponding to this operation command is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether or not it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1402, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. In the case of the first switchable period, in step S1403, the first switchable execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process proceeds to step S1404 to determine whether or not it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing during the execution in the situation where the game round is being executed. Specifically, when the game rotation effect is executed by the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is started → the high-speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → the low-speed variation. It includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each symbol sequence SA1 to SA3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 to the end of the high-speed variable display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3.

As for the mode of the variation display of the symbols, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is started → the acceleration period of all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 → the high-speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 (high speed is constant). Speed) → The display flow may be such that each symbol sequence SA1 to SA3 is sequentially stopped via a low-speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the high-speed fluctuation display is executed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3.

Further, a medium-speed fluctuation display may be included between the high-speed fluctuation display and the low-speed fluctuation display. That is, the specific number of stages is arbitrary as long as the mode of variable display of the symbol is switched in a plurality of stages such as two stages, three stages, or four or more stages. In this case, the second switchable period may be set as the period of the low discriminating stage in which the discriminating of the symbol by the player is low among the stages.

Further, the specific variation mode is arbitrary as long as the flow of the variation display of the symbol includes the state of the variation display in the relatively low discrimination mode → the variation display in the high discrimination mode, and for example, any mode. However, the fluctuation speed is the same, but in the fluctuation display in the low discrimination mode, the design is displayed in a transparent, translucent, hollow or partially excluded state, and in the fluctuation display in the high discrimination mode, the entire design is displayed. It may be the configuration to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which the variable display in the low discrimination mode is performed.

Information for specifying whether or not it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1404, it is determined whether or not it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the operation corresponding to the operation generation command is terminated as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 is set in step S1405. The second switching execution flag is set for.

After executing any of the processes of step S1403 and step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, the counter for the display mode is updated.

The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode on the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. The counter value for the display mode is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as described above, the counter value is a numerical value of "0" corresponding to the first display mode and the second display. A numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the counter for the display mode is set as "0", when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the first value is obtained. 1 Display mode is set.

In step S1406, the counter for the display mode is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order each time the effect operation device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S1406 is executed in the situation where the counter for the display mode is "0" and is set to the first display mode, the counter for the display mode is set to "1" and the second is When switching to the display mode and executing the process of step S1406 in the situation where the counter for the display mode is "1" and the second display mode is set, the counter for the display mode is set to "1". 1 Switch to the display mode. After executing the process of step S1406, the process corresponding to this operation occurrence command is terminated.

Next, the arithmetic processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. The calculation process for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation process in step S903 in the task process (FIG. 14). Since the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed when the jackpot effect is executed, the calculation process for the display mode background is not executed, and the standby image is displayed or the effect for the game is executed. The arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed.

First, in step S1501, the counter for the display mode provided in the work RAM 132 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the work RAM 132 is the first display mode. In the first display mode, in step S1502, the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1503, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated and the control information is updated. In the following step S1504, the object corresponding to the first display mode and the object to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1505, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

On the other hand, in the second display mode, in step S1506, the second rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1507, various parameters of the grasped second rearmost image are calculated and the control information is updated. In the following step S1508, based on the currently set data table, the object corresponding to the second display mode and the object to be updated for the background is grasped. In the following step S1509, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

At the execution timing of the process in step S1502, the setting process for starting control (step S901) for the background object corresponding to the first rearmost image and the first display mode is completed. Further, at the execution timing of the process of step S1506, the setting process for starting control (step S901) for the background object corresponding to the second rearmost image and the second display mode is completed.

After executing the process of step S1505 or step S1509, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not either the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the processing load is large.

The situation where the processing load is heavy is that when both the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the drawing list are executed by the VDP135, the processing load of the VDP135 is large or the processing is large enough to cause processing omission. It refers to the situation where the processing load of VDP135 is relatively large even if no drop occurs. Information on whether or not the processing load is large is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1511 is performed based on the information.

When the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S1512 whether or not the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been saved separately. Here, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. For separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

In the mode buffer 145, the area 145a for the first mode in which the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and the background image corresponding to the second display mode are displayed. A second mode area 145b, in which drawing data for the background of the above is written, is provided. Further, the VDP 135 has a function of writing background drawing data to either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and the written background drawing data is read out into the screen buffer 144. It has a display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

If it has not been saved separately, the execution designation information for another save is stored in step S1513, and then the present calculation process is terminated. If the separate save has been made, the present calculation process is terminated as it is.

When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of the instruction to use the image data of is set. Further, when the process of step S1513 is being executed, the execution designation information for separate storage is set. The execution designation information of the separate storage includes information indicating that the separate storage should be executed, and also includes information of the address of the separate storage destination.

On the other hand, when the processing load is large (step S1511: YES), it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been separately saved. If it has not been saved separately, this calculation process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it has been saved separately, the calculation process ends after storing the usage designation information of the separately saved data in step S1515.

When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of the instruction to use the image data of is set. Further, when the process of step S1515 is executed, the usage designation information of the separately stored data is set. The usage designation information of the separately stored data includes information indicating that the separately stored data should be used, and also includes information of the address where the separately stored data is stored.

Next, the symbol arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S905 of the task process (FIG. 14).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the control update process for the symbol based on the currently set data table. The case where it is not necessary to execute includes the case where the jackpot effect is executed, and the case where it needs to be executed includes the case where the effect for game rounds is executed and the case where the standby image is displayed. If it is not necessary to execute it, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated as it is, and if it is necessary to execute it, is the game time being executed based on the currently set data table in step S1602? Judge whether or not.

If the game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. When the first switching execution flag is set, in step S1604, the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, the information of the symbol to be controlled (for example, the information of the stored address) while retaining the information for the parameter of each free buffer area secured for controlling the symbol in the work RAM 132 as it is. Rewrite only to the information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The processing of step S1603 and step S1604 may be executed in the setting processing (step S901) for starting control in the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 or the process of step S1604 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S1606, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process contains image data for the symbol corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of the instruction to use is set.

When the game round is being executed (step S1602: YES), it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 based on the data table currently set. judge. When the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

When the second switching execution flag is set, in step S1609, it is determined whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 16) corresponding to the current drawing list is executed by VDP135, if the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination, a process omission occurs. Based on whether or not there is a processing omission, it is possible to change it if no processing omission occurs, and it is determined that it is impossible to change it if a processing omission occurs.

For example, if the image data for the background corresponding to the switching of the display mode is newly set in the drawing list this time, it is necessary to newly set the image data setting in the world coordinate system in VDP135. The processing load of VDP135 increases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that it is impossible to change the design. On the other hand, when separately saved data is set as the background image data in the current drawing list, or when the background image data corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set. Since it is not necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in VDP135, the processing load of VDP135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the design can be changed.

Information on whether or not it is possible to change is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1609 is performed based on the information. Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

If it is determined in step S1609 that the change is possible, in step S1610, the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this process is the same as in step S1604. After executing the process of step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1613.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the change is not possible, the change standby flag is set for the predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1611, and then the process proceeds to step S1613. .. The change waiting flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change waiting flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1608 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S1612 is executed, so that the process of step S1609 is performed. Will be executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change waiting flag are not set, the process proceeds to step S1613 as it is. Further, the change waiting flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S1612.

In step S1613, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S1614, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is instructed to use the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. Information is set. In this case, if it is determined in step S1609 that the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the information of the instruction to use the image data of the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching source remains as it is. Set in the drawing list. Then, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display surface G, but the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is during high-speed fluctuation display, so that the player can display the above state. Unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

If the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the change waiting flag is set and the change is made in the subsequent processing times. As a result, it is possible to switch the display mode satisfactorily while preventing the processing omission from occurring in the VDP 135. The processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

If the high-speed fluctuation display is not in progress (step S1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S1616, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated. When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is instructed to use the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. Information is set.

Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background setting process is executed in step S1002 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the use designation of the separately saved data is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S1702, information for setting another saved data corresponding to the designation as drawing data for the background is stored in the register 153.

If it is not set (step S1701: NO) or after executing the process of step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, the rearmost image designated in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S1704, various parameters designated for the rearmost image are grasped. After that, in step S1705, the setting process for the rearmost image is executed in the world coordinate system. The contents related to this setting are as described above.

In the following step S1706, the object for the background specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S1707, various parameters specified for the object are grasped. After that, in step S1708, the setting process for the background is terminated after the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object.

By executing the setting process for the background as described above, drawing is performed not only in the situation where the usage specification of the separately saved data is not set, but also in the situation where the usage specification of the separately saved data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Along with this, for example, when the drawing list this time is related to the switching of the display mode, it is possible to set the control start of the image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the background executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The drawing data creation process for the background is executed in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the information of the usage setting of the separately stored data is set in the register 153. If it is not set, the hidden surface process is executed in step S1802 to create drawing data for the background in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface treatment is as described above.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the execution designation of another save is set in the drawing list this time. If it is not set, the drawing data creation process is terminated as it is. If it is set, in step S1804, the target mode area of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 is used for the background created in step S1802. Write the drawing data of. As a result, the drawing data for the background is saved separately. After that, the drawing data creation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the information of the usage setting of the separately stored data is set in the register 153 in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, out of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, the separately stored data is read from the mode area designated this time, and the read different saved data is used as the current time. It is written in the screen buffer 144 as drawing data for the background. After that, the drawing data creation process is terminated.

By executing the background drawing data creation process as described above, the background drawing data through geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to the separately stored data is stored in the screen buffer 144. .. Further, in the frame in which the image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the drawing data creation process (step S1011) for the effect and the pattern is executed thereafter, and the drawing data for the effect and the pattern is created and the drawing data is created. The drawing data composition process (step S1012) is executed, and drawing data for one frame is created.

Here, the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 28.

FIG. 28A shows the drawing data PD1 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 28B shows the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. Further, FIG. 28 (a) shows the ON / OFF state of the power of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 28 (b) shows the presence / absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 28 (c) shows the presence / absence of the second display mode. 28 (d) shows the presence / absence of separately stored data for the first display mode, and FIG. 28 (e) shows the presence / absence of separately stored data for the second display mode.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, the power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the processing is started by the display CPU 131. Further, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display the image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing after the timing of t1. Further, based on the drawing list, the VDP135 starts creating drawing data corresponding to the first display mode.

After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the drawing data PD1 for the background corresponding to the first display mode is completed, and the drawing data is used as separate storage data for the first display mode in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. It is stored in the area 145a. In the background image by the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to this first display mode, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the three-dimensional characters indicated by "A" to "F" in front of the rearmost image. The image is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, at the timing of t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started.

After that, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 at the timing of t3. Then, the drawing data for the second display mode is created, and the display of the image corresponding to the second display mode is started. Further, since the creation of the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at the relevant timing, the drawing data is used as separate storage data for the second display mode as the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Is remembered in. In the background image by the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to this second display mode, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the three-dimensional characters indicated by "G" to "J" in front of the rearmost image. The image is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

Here, the drawing data PD1 for the background corresponding to the first display mode has a larger number of objects to be set than the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the VDP 135. On the other hand, of the data saved separately for both, the processing load is large by creating the separately saved data for the first display mode using the time when the initial setting at the time of power startup is performed. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode in the situation, it is possible to avoid the processing omission by using the separately stored data.

On the other hand, the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode is switched to the second display mode even when the processing load of the VDP135 is small and the processing load of the VDP135 is large. It is set so that processing omissions do not occur. However, when the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is also saved separately and the processing load is relatively large even if the processing omission does not occur, the switching to the second display mode is performed. The separately stored data is used for.

By creating the separately saved data as described above, as shown at the timing of t4 to t9, when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time, the separately saved data is stored in each display mode. By using it to display an image for the background, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions.

In addition, the target of separate storage is the background image, and does not include individual images such as patterns that are noticeable for fluctuations. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, even if the image is displayed using the separately saved data, the movement of the individual image whose fluctuation is noticed is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, the display mode can be switched satisfactorily by separately storing the drawing data for the background corresponding to each display mode.

Further, regardless of the switching timing of the display mode, the configuration may be such that the switching of the symbol type is performed without waiting. Further, the design may be configured so as not to differ between the display modes.

Further, the character for effect may also be configured to be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the character for effect may be configured not to be stored separately, or may be configured to be stored separately.

<Structure for displaying a 3D image using a concatenated object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image using a connected object will be described.

A concatenated object is a unit of objects in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with a joint as a joint, and in order to give movement to a character in a three-dimensional image by relatively displacing each part object. It is set. By using the connected object, the character of the three-dimensional image can be operated smoothly. In addition, considering that the connected object has a skeleton portion and a joint portion, it can also be referred to as a bone model.

The concatenated object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), a first concatenated object PC 15 and a second concatenated object PC 16 are set in order to display a common character. The first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 each have a plurality of connected portions CT1 and CT2, but the connected portions CT1 and CT2 are set at different locations from each other.

Specifically, the first connecting object PC15 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 29 (a-1) and 29 (a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connecting object PC16 is not provided with a connecting portion at the elbow portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 29 (b-1) and 29 (b-2). The operation can be displayed. By setting the connecting portion in different places as described above, it is possible to make the character perform different actions depending on whether the first connected object PC 15 is used or the second connected object PC 16 is used. It becomes.

Although both connected objects PC15 and PC16 have connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location, they may not have connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location. Further, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, the texture may be set individually for each. If it is possible to make the character perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16, the positions of the connected portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of the character are arbitrary.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the state in which the character is operating using the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a concatenated object executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed in the effect arithmetic processing in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the effect using the concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 is executed is set.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (the character is being displayed) based on the currently set data table. If the effect is not being executed, step S1902 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1903.

In step S1903, the start designation information of the concatenated object effect is stored, and in the following step S1904, the first concatenated object PC 15 and the second concatenated object PC 16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table. do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S1904, the process for starting control is completed for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S901). Further, the information for controlling both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is completed.

In the following step S1905, various parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are calculated to update the control information related to the first concatenated object PC15. Further, in step S1906, various parameters of the second connected object PC 16 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC 16.

In the following step S1907, the designated information of the first production period is stored. Here, in the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of types of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, in the first effect period and the third effect period, the character is displayed by using the first connected object PC15, and in the second effect period, the character is displayed by using the second connected object PC16. After that, in step S1908, the parameters of the first connected object PC15 out of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set so as to be specified in the drawing list this time.

In the following step S1909, another object for the first effect period and the object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S1909, the process for starting control is completed for the object to be updated this time in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S901). After that, in step S1910, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and they are set. The parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the start designation information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 should be started and the designated information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (step S1901: YES), is it during the first effect period based on the data table currently set in step S1911? Judge whether or not. If it is during the first effect period, the calculation process is terminated after the processes of steps S1904 to S1910 are executed. By the way, since this time is during the first effect period, the first connected object PC 15 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 29 (a)) as the first effect period progresses. In addition, the parameter calculation is performed in step S1905.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and they are set. The parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the designated information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S1911 that it is not in the first effect period, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not it is in the second effect period based on the data table currently set. When the second effect period is in progress, in step S1913, the first concatenated object PC15 and the second concatenated object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S1914, various parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are calculated to update the control information related to the first concatenated object PC15. Further, in step S1915, various parameters of the second connected object PC 16 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC 16. By the way, since the second effect period is in progress this time, the second connected object PC 16 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 29 (b)) as the second effect period progresses. In addition, the parameter calculation is performed in step S1915.

In the following step S1916, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S1917, the parameters of the second connected object PC16 out of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are specified in the drawing list this time. Set.

In the following step S1918, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the second effect period, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, the second effect period is a state in which the effect is more developed than the first effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The setting process for starting control (step S901) for the object increased by the amount increased when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process in step S1918. After that, in step S1919, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and they are set. The parameters of the second concatenated object PC16 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the designated information of the second effect period indicating that it is the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S1912 that it is not in the second effect period, it means that it is in the third effect period, so the process proceeds to step S1920. In step S1920, the first concatenated object PC15 and the second concatenated object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S1921, various parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are calculated to update the control information related to the first concatenated object PC15. By the way, since this time is during the third effect period, the first connected object PC 15 performs the predetermined first operation (see FIG. 29 (a)) as the third effect period progresses. In addition, the parameter calculation is performed in step S1921. Further, in step S1922, various parameters of the second connected object PC 16 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC 16.

In the following step S1923, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S1924, the parameters of the first connected object PC15 out of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are specified in the drawing list this time. Set.

In the following step S1925, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the third effect period, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, the third effect period is a state in which the effect is more developed than the second effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period increases. The setting process for starting control (step S901) for the object increased by the amount increased when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process in step S1925. After that, in step S1926, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and they are set. The parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the designated information of the third effect period indicating that it is the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the connected object effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the effect of the connected object is executed in the setting process for the effect of step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the setting process for the concatenated object effect is activated when any of the start designation of the concatenated object effect and the designation of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the concatenated object effect is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S2002, based on the current drawing list, the address where the first concatenated object PC15 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the first concatenated object PC15 is set. read out. Further, in step S2003, based on the current drawing list, the address where the second concatenated object PC 16 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the second concatenated object PC 16 is read out.

In the following step S2004, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first concatenated object PC 15 is set to "1" which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second concatenated object PC 16 is set to "0" which is completely transparent information. do. As a result, the color information preset for all the pixels of the first connected object PC15 (including the information of the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is, whereas the first is applied. The α value of "0" is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the connected object PC16 of 2.

In the following step S2005, the parameters specified for the first concatenated object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2006, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Since this time is the processing time related to the start designation of the concatenated object effect, both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Further, although the shapes of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are almost the same, the connected portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first concatenated object PC15 are applied to the second concatenated object PC16 as they are, some pixels whose coordinate specifications do not match are generated, but for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is made on the VDP135 side. ..

In the following step S2007, another object for the first effect period specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and various parameters specified for the object are grasped in step S2008. After that, in step S2009, after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system, the setting process for the present concatenated object effect is terminated.

By executing the setting process for producing the connected object as described above, the arrangement of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is started at the same time with respect to the world coordinate system. Further, since the same parameters are applied to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged so as to overlap with each other at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the process of step S2004 is executed, the second concatenated object PC16 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering, so that the first concatenated object of the two concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 is displayed on the display surface G. Only PC15 is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the start designation of the concatenated object effect is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not the designation of the first effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it is set, the process of steps S2004 to S2009 is executed, and then the present setting process is terminated. In this case, in step S2006, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from the information of the parameters set corresponding to the first connected object PC15 in the drawing list. Update.

By executing the setting process for producing the connected object as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but since the process of step S2004 is executed, both connected objects are connected to the display surface G. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first concatenated object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2005 corresponds to the first connection object PC15, the first connection is performed so that the display surface G performs the first operation as the first effect period progresses. The object PC 15 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2010 that the designation of the first effect period is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it is set, in step S2012, a uniform α value setting process for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first concatenated object PC 15 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second concatenated object PC 16 is set to “1” which is opaque information. do. As a result, the color information preset for all the pixels of the second connected object PC16 (including the information of the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is, whereas the second is applied. The α value of "0" is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the concatenated object PC15 of 1.

In the following step S2013, the parameters specified for the second concatenated object PC16 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2014, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the second production period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the second connected object PC16 in the drawing list. It is updated by grasping from the information of the parameter. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are almost the same, but the connected portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the second concatenated object PC 16 are applied to the first concatenated object PC 15 as they are, some pixels whose coordinate specifications do not match are generated, but the VDP 135 side makes a predetermined adjustment for such pixels. ..

In the following step S2015, another object for the second effect period specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and various parameters specified for the object are grasped in step S2016. After that, in step S2017, after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system, the setting process for the present concatenated object effect is terminated. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of displayed objects increases, and therefore, in step S2017, the corresponding process is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for producing the connected object as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but since the process of step S2012 is executed, both connected objects are connected to the display surface G. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the second concatenated object PC16 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2013 corresponds to the second connected object PC16, the second connection is performed so that the display surface G performs the second operation as the second effect period progresses. The object PC 16 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2011 that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. The process proceeds to step S2018.

In step S2018, a uniform α value setting process for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first concatenated object PC 15 is set to "1" which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second concatenated object PC 16 is set to "0" which is completely transparent information. do. As a result, the color information preset for all the pixels of the first connected object PC15 (including the information of the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is, whereas the first is applied. The α value of "0" is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the connected object PC16 of 2.

In the following step S2019, the parameters specified for the first concatenated object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both concatenated objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2020, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for both the connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the first connected object PC15 in the drawing list. It is updated by grasping from the information of the parameter.

In the following step S2021, another object for the third effect period specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and various parameters specified for the object are grasped in step S2022. After that, in step S2023, after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system, the setting process for the present concatenated object effect is terminated. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of displayed objects increases, and therefore, in step S2023, the corresponding process is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for producing the connected object as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but since the process of step S2018 is executed, both connected objects are connected to the display surface G. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first concatenated object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2019 corresponds to the first connection object PC15, the first connection is performed so that the display surface G performs the first operation as the third effect period progresses. The object PC 15 is displayed.

Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connected object effect. Further, FIG. 32 (a) shows a first effect period, FIG. 32 (b) shows a second effect period, and FIG. 32 (c) shows a third effect period. Note that FIGS. 32 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 32 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are images. The display surface G is shown. Further, although the background image and the design are omitted in FIGS. 32 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image is actually displayed behind the image for each effect. At the same time, the design is displayed on the front side.

In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC16 is subjected to transparency processing. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC 15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first operation is performed as the first effect period progresses. .. Further, as images corresponding to other objects, the characters CH4 to CH6 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed.

In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (b-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC15 is subjected to transparency processing. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (b-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the second connected object PC 16 is displayed on the display surface G, and the second operation is performed as the second effect period progresses. ..

Here, when comparing FIGS. 32 (a-2) and 32 (b-2), both characters CH3 are shown as having different shapes, but in reality, both connected objects PC15, The same texture is mapped to PC16, and the connecting part (joint part) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same, or similar images are displayed on the display surface G with respect to the character CH3, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the switch. .. However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Further, in the second effect period, the characters CH4 to CH8 shown in "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of the characters CH4 to CH8 is larger than that in the case of the first effect period.

In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (c-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC16 is subjected to transparency processing. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (c-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC 15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first operation is performed as the third effect period progresses. .. Further, in the third effect period, the characters CH4 to CH10 shown in "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of the characters CH4 to CH10 is larger than that in the case of the second effect period.

As described above, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 for a common character, it is possible to switch the connected objects PC15 and PC16 to be displayed according to the type of operation using the joint portion. .. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed on a single concatenated object, it becomes necessary to set the concatenated part and the part object for that single concatenated object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity that can be stored as a single image data in the memory module 133 will be exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time will be longer. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, there are many opportunities to modify the effect at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and if the overall movement of the connected object is reviewed each time the motion of the character is modified, the time required for the design will be long. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to modify the effect, the already created connected object PC15 , It is not necessary to modify all of PC16. Therefore, it is possible to make the character perform a plurality of types of operations while making it possible to design the pachinko machine 10 satisfactorily.

Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object is controlled by the display CPU 131 before the timing when the connected object is switched to display the character, and is arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. Be targeted. As a result, when the switching timing is reached, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start processing for the switching destination object, but execute the control update processing having a smaller processing load than the control start processing. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

In particular, at the switching timing, the effect is developed and the number of displayed objects is increased, so that the processing load is relatively large for the display CPU 131 and VDP 135. In this case, assuming a configuration in which control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 or VDP 135. However, as described above, control update processing is performed on the switching destination object. Since it may be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing omission.

Further, since both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between completely transparent information and opaque information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value for switching between the two. Switching designation may be performed, and in VDP135, the uniform α value to be applied may be switched according to the designation. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing the complexity of the processing configurations of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

Further, the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 are provided with only the parameter information for the concatenated object to be displayed among the concatenated objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. As a result, the amount of data set in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, in VDP135, since the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 may be updated in the same manner, the processing load of VDP135 can be reduced.

In addition, in the switching between the first effect period and the third effect period, in place of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the operation of the character for effect different from the character in which the above-mentioned plurality of connected objects are prepared is performed. The configuration may be newly added, or may be a configuration in which the display of the character for effect having a large processing load is started separately from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

Further, the control start timing in the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 16 and the control start timing in the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC 15. For example, the timing may be earlier than the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period, but may be later than the control start timing of the first connected object PC 15.

Further, although the processing load at the switching timing of the effect period increases from the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 16 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC 15 and the second connected object PC 16 are not arranged at the same time in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to uniformly adjust the α value to control the display target.

Further, for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display target may be switched not by uniformly adjusting the α value but by switching the rendering target. In this case, the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, so that the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

Further, the configuration may be such that the third effect period is not provided, or the effect period equal to or longer than the fourth effect period may be set. Further, a configuration in which three or more connected objects are prepared for one character may be used.

<Structure for performing particle dispersion production>
Next, the configuration for performing the particle dispersion effect will be described.

The particle dispersion effect is an effect in which a large number of single particle images are displayed as if they are dispersed over a plurality of consecutive frames (multiple image update timings). At the time of this dispersion, at least a part of the images of a large number of single particles are displayed so as to be displaced in different orbits. In the particle dispersion effect, a particle dispersion object having a large number of vertex data set in a one-to-one correspondence with a large number of particle single images and a particle dispersion object set in correspondence with the particle dispersion object are set, and each vertex is set. A particle dispersion texture having a large number of single image data for displaying a single particle image corresponding to each position corresponding to the data is used.

These particle dispersion objects and particle dispersion textures will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b). FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion object PC17, and FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion texture PC18.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the particle dispersion object PC 17 includes vertex data, coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data, and other data other than these. A large number of vertex data are set as vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3), ..., vertices (99), and vertices (100). Each vertex in PC 17 is identified. The coordinate data has a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data, and a large number of coordinates (1), coordinates (2), coordinates (3), ..., Coordinates (99), and coordinates (100) are set. In the VDP135, the positions of each vertex in the particle dispersion object PC17 in the world coordinate system are recognized by these coordinate data.

Other data includes, for example, initial scale data of the particle dispersion object PC17, initial α value data uniformly applied to all vertex data, initial rotation angle data of the particle dispersion object PC17, and the like. include.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the particle dispersion texture PC 18 includes single data, correlation data corresponding to the single data, single image data corresponding to the single data, and other data other than these. Includes. The single image data has a one-to-one correspondence with each single data, and is single image data (1), single image data (2), single image data (3), ..., Single image data (99), single unit. A large number of image data (100) are set. Each single image data includes, for example, a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Each single image data is data for displaying the same type of single particle image. Specifically, it is data for displaying "spherical bubbles", and the shape, size, and color of the "spherical bubbles" are different in a part or all of each single image data. In this case, even if all the single image data is set on the scale in the initial state in order to increase the number of single particle images to be displayed at the same time while reducing the processing load in VDP135 in executing the particle dispersion effect. The display surface G is configured so that a single image of all particles can be displayed at the same time.

The type of particles may be different for at least a part or all of each single image data. Further, the particles may be of the same type and have the same shape, scale, and color in the initial state.

A large number of single data of the particle dispersion texture PC18 is set as a single unit (1), a single unit (2), a single unit (3), ..., a single unit (99), and a single unit (100). A large number of single image data set in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 are individually recognized by the data. Correlation data has a one-to-one correspondence with each unit data, and a large number of vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3), ..., vertices (99), and vertices (100) are set. In the VDP135, it is recognized from these correlation data which of the vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC17 corresponds to each single image data in the particle dispersion texture PC18.

The other data includes α value data individually applied to each single image data, α value data uniformly applied to each single image data, and the like.

Here, initial data is set for each coordinate data in the particle dispersion object PC 17, and these initial data have different coordinates. Each coordinate data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritable, and when the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, each of the above coordinate data is rewritten to data having coordinates different from the initial data. It is set in the set state. A plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set as rewriting reference data used for performing such rewriting.

At least two types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) to 33 (e), the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data are set. Three types of KD3 are set. Each of these key data KD1 to KD3 includes correlation data and coordinate data corresponding to the correlation data, respectively.

Specifically, the correlation data of the first key data KD1, the correlation data of the second key data KD2, and the correlation data of the third key data KD3 are all the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 to be applied. It is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and a large number of vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3), ..., vertices (99), and vertices (100) are set.

On the other hand, a large number of coordinate data of the first key data KD1, coordinate data of the second key data KD2, and coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each correlation data. It is different when compared between the same correlation data.

Specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 is coordinate (1-1), coordinate (2-1), coordinate (3-1), ..., Coordinate (99-1), coordinate (100). -1) is set in large numbers, and the coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is coordinate (1-2), coordinate (2-2), coordinate (3-2), ..., Coordinate (99-2). ), Coordinates (100-2), and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 is coordinate (1-3), coordinate (2-3), coordinate (3-3), ..., A large number of coordinates (99-3) and coordinates (100-3) are set. Further, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (1) is the coordinate (1-1) in the first key data KD1, the coordinate (1-2) in the second key data KD2, and the coordinate (1-2) in the third key data KD3. The coordinate data corresponding to the vertices (100) in 1-3) are the coordinates (100-1) in the first key data KD1, the coordinates (100-2) in the second key data KD2, and the third key. In the data KD3, different coordinate data are set for each vertex data so as to be the coordinates (100-3).

Incidentally, each key data KD1 to KD3 is set to have a smaller data capacity than the particle dispersion object PC 17 in relation to the fact that the α value data and the rotation angle data are not set.

As described above, the key data KD1 to KD3 are set to determine the displacement trajectory of each particle single image, and the order applied to the particle dispersion object PC 17 is predetermined. Specifically, the second key data KD2 is used when setting the coordinate data on the displacement direction destination side of each particle single image with respect to the first key data KD1, and the third key data KD3 is the second key data. It is used when setting the coordinate data on the displacement direction destination side of each particle single image rather than KD2. When the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, the coordinate data of the key data KD1 to KD3 are applied to each vertex data, so that each particle single image corresponding to each vertex data can be obtained. Displace in the orbit of.

In this case, it is applied to each vertex data in a state where the coordinate data of the plurality of key data KD1 to KD3, more specifically, the coordinate data of the two key data KD1 to KD3 are fused for at least a predetermined number of frames. .. Specifically, the first key data KD1 that determines the coordinate data of each vertex data in the first frame of the particle dispersion effect (that is, the image update timing) is the number of first frames which are a plurality of frames after the first frame. It is used over the first frame period corresponding to (for example, 99 frames) minutes. The second key data KD2 corresponds to the first frame period, the first switching target frame corresponding to the next frame with respect to the first frame period, and the number of second frames which are a plurality of frames thereafter. Used over a two-frame period. The third key data KD3 is used over the second frame period. In this case, the number of the first frames and the number of the second frames are the same.

The fourth key data may be set after the third key data KD3. In this case, the third key data KD3 is set to the next frame with respect to the second frame period and the second frame period. It is used over the third frame period corresponding to the second switching target frame corresponding to, and the third frame number (the same number of frames as the first frame number and the second frame number) which is a plurality of frames thereafter. The fourth key data is used over the third frame period.

With such a configuration, the number of the key data KD1 to KD3 is smaller than the number of continuous frames when the particle dispersion effect is executed, and more specifically, in the particle dispersion effect, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is used. Even if the number of coordinate data of each particle data is set to be smaller than the number of times the coordinate data is changed, it is possible to smoothly display how each particle single image is displaced.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the particle dispersion effect using the particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and the key data KD1 to KD3 will be described. The particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and the key data KD1 to KD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing a calculation process for particle dispersion effect executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is executed in the effect arithmetic process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the particle dispersion effect is executed is set.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the particle dispersion effect is being executed based on the currently set data table. If the effect is not being executed, step S2102 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the particle dispersion effect. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2103.

In step S2103, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2103, the process for starting control of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is completed in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S901). Further, the information for controlling the particle dispersion object PC17 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the particle dispersion effect is completed.

In the following step S2104, the initial read processing for reading the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 from the memory module 133 is executed, and in step S2105, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17. , Update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17. After that, after storing the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect in step S2106, the present calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC 17 is included in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process of the particle dispersion texture PC 18. The first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 read out in step S2104 and the parameters calculated in step S2105 are set together with the information of the usage instruction. Further, the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be started is set in the drawing list.

When it is determined in step S2101 that the particle dispersion effect is being produced, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not it is the key data update timing based on the currently set data table. Such an update timing corresponds to the above-mentioned first switching target frame.

If it is not the key data update timing (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S2109, a process of determining the blend ratio of the key data is executed. In the process of determining the blend ratio, the two key data KD1 to KD3 currently set are referred to the blending table BT as shown in FIG. 34 (b) stored in advance in the memory module 133. The data of the blend ratio at the time of blending each coordinate data of is read, and each coordinate data is blended by the read data.

Regarding the blending table BT, in detail, the data of the number of frames is set in the table BT for blending, and the data of each number of frames is associated with each other on a one-to-one basis and set as the key data on the front side. The ratio to be applied to each coordinate data and the ratio to be applied to each coordinate data set in the key data on the rear side are set. In this case, the blending table BT is set so that the blending ratio changes at a constant ratio each time the number of frames increases by 1, that is, each time the coordinates of each particle single image are updated. Specifically, for the front key data, the ratio when blending by 1% decreases at each update timing, and for the rear key data, 1% at each update timing. The blending table BT is set so that the ratio when blending is increased one by one, and the sum of the ratio of the front key data and the ratio of the rear key data is 100% at each update timing.

The blending table BT is not limited to a configuration in which the ratio is set to change by 1% at each update timing, such as 2% or 3%. It may be set to change in increments of% or more, or it may be set to change at different ratios instead of a constant ratio.

In step S2109, the blending table BT is referred to based on the currently set data table. Further, in step S2109, the number of frames to be referred to in the blending table BT is grasped based on the current pointer information set in the data table, and the key data on the front side set in the number of frames is obtained. Read the ratio and the ratio of the key data on the rear side. In this case, if the currently set data tables are the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the first key data KD1 corresponds to the front key data and the second key data KD2 is the rear key. Corresponds to data.

After that, in step S2110, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17 to update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2111, the particle dispersion effect is produced. After storing the update designation information, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC 17 is included in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process of the particle dispersion texture PC 18. The data of the blend ratio determined in step S2109 and the parameters calculated in step S2110 are set together with the information of the usage instruction. Further, the update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2107 that it is time to update the key data, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S2113, a process of reading new key data is executed. In such processing, the key data KD1 to KD3 in the following order with respect to the key data on the rear side of the two key data currently set are read from the memory module 133. Specifically, since the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 are currently set, the key data on the rear side of these is the second key data KD2, whereas the key data in the next order is It becomes the third key data KD3.

After that, in step S2114, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17 to update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2115, the particle dispersion effect is produced. After storing the update designation information, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC 17 is included in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process of the particle dispersion texture PC 18. The third key data KD3, which is set together with the usage instruction information and is read out in step S2112, and the parameters calculated in step S2113 are set. Further, the update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

Incidentally, from the next processing round in which the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2107 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect is reached, and the processing of steps S2108 to S2111 is executed. In this case, in step S2109, the blend ratio is sequentially determined by using the second key data KD2 as the front key data and the second key data KD2 as the rear key data.

Next, the setting process for the particle dispersion effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. The setting process for the particle dispersion effect is executed in the setting process for the effect in step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the setting process for the particle dispersion effect is started when either the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect or the update designation information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the drawing list this time.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S2202, based on the drawing list this time, the address where the particle dispersion object PC 17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the particle dispersion object PC 17 is used in the VRAM 134. Read to the expansion buffer 141. After that, in step S2203, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the drawing list this time are stored in the register 153.

In the following step S2204, the initial application process is executed. In the initial application process, the start coordinates of each vertex data are set by rewriting each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. Further, in step S2205, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

After that, in step S2206, the setting process for the particle dispersion object PC 17 is executed in the world coordinate system, and then the setting process is terminated. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set with the coordinates corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the particle single image data corresponding to each vertex data is generated for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above. Set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the start designation of the particle dispersion effect is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not new key data is specified in the current drawing list.

If it is not specified, the coordinate blending process is executed in step S2008. In the blending process, the two key data currently set, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the case of the first frame period are set in the drawing list this time. Blend according to the blend ratio data.

In this case, first, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the first key data KD1 is read, and the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the second key data KD2 is read. Then, the former coordinate data is (x1, y1, z1), the latter coordinate data is (x2, y2, z2), and the ratio of the front key data read from the blend table BT is rt1 and the blend table BT. When the ratio of the key data on the back side read out is rt2, the coordinate data (x, y, z) after blending is
x: x1 x rt1 + x2 x rt2
y: y1 x rt1 + y2 x rt2
z: z1 x rt1 + z2 x rt2
Blend so that Further, such a blend is executed on the coordinate data corresponding to the all vertex data.

In the following step S2209, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17. After that, in step S2210, each coordinate data which is the blend result in the step S2208 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in the step S2209 are set for the particle. After setting for the distribution object PC 17, this setting process ends.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data which is the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data which is the blend result in step S2208. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set with the coordinates corresponding to the blending result of step S2208. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the particle single image data corresponding to each vertex data is generated for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above. Set.

If it is determined in step S2207 that new key data is specified in the drawing list this time, the key data update process is executed in step S2211. In the update process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the front key data, specifically the first key data KD1, is set as new key data set in the drawing list this time. Specifically, it is rewritten to the third key data KD3.

In the following step S2212, the application process at the time of update is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. Further, in step S2213, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

After that, in step S2214, each coordinate data grasped in step S2212 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in step S2214 are set for the particle dispersion. After setting for the object PC 17, this setting process ends.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data grasped in step S2212, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in step S2212. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the particle single image data corresponding to each vertex data is generated for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above. Set.

Incidentally, from the next processing round in which the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2207 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect is reached, and the processing of steps S2208 to S2210 is executed. In this case, in step S2208, the blend of coordinates is executed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3.

Next, the content of the particle dispersion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion effect, and FIGS. 36 (b-1) and (b-2) simply show what kind of trajectory each particle single image is displaced. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the particle dispersion effect is executed as an effect for game rounds, and specifically, when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line when the game rounds are completed. In addition, the particle dispersion effect is executed. In the particle dispersion effect, a large number of single particle image PTs, which are "spherical bubbles", are displayed on the display surface G, and the large number of single particle image PTs are displaced in a predetermined orbit over a plurality of continuous frames. Is displayed in.

The predetermined orbit will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 36 (b-1) and (b-2). In the state where each coordinate data of the first key data KD1 is set, the particle single image PT1. Each of the particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 is displayed at a position corresponding to the start coordinate shown by the solid line in FIG. 36 (b-1). In this case, the single particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

In the subsequent first frame period, the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 36 (b-1), the particle single image PT1 The single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 are displayed as if they are displaced in different orbits. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear.

When the first frame period has elapsed, each coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is set, so that each of the particle single image PT1, the particle single image PT2, and the particle single image PT3 is shown in FIG. 36 (b-). It is displayed at the position corresponding to the switching target coordinates shown by the solid line in 2). In this case, the single particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

In the subsequent second frame period, the blending process of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3 is executed, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 36 (b-2), the particle single image PT1 The single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 are displayed as if they are displaced in different orbits. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear. Further, the orbits of the elemental image PT1 to PT3 of each particle in the second frame period are different from the orbits in the case of the first frame period.

As described above, in the particle dispersion effect, the coordinate data of each vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set while using a blend of a plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3, thereby reducing the data capacity and reducing the data capacity. While striking a balance between reducing the processing load, it is possible to produce a display effect as if a large number of single particle images are dispersed.

That is, it is conceivable that the coordinate data of the single image data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the animation data set over the total number of frames, but in this case, the data capacity is required accordingly. Become. On the other hand, by using a blend of multiple types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the required data capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all animation data are set as described above. It will be possible.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to calculate the coordinate data of all the single image data only by the processing based on the program, but in this case, if the individual particle images are displaced and displayed in different orbits, it is complicated. A huge number of programs are required. On the other hand, by using a blend of a plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the information for calculating the coordinate data is appropriately distributed between the program side and the data side, and the processing is performed. The load can be reduced.

Further, by setting the single image data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 instead of setting it as an individual object, the data capacity of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP135 is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, also in VDP135, when reading an object for setting single image data, it is possible to read as an object PC 17 for particle dispersion instead of reading each individual object corresponding to each single image data. The processing load required for the reading can be reduced.

Further, since the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed not by the display CPU 131 but by the VDP 135, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Another form of setting processing for particle dispersion production>
FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the setting process for the particle dispersion effect executed by the VDP 135.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S2302, the address where the particle dispersion object PC 17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the current drawing list, and the particle dispersion object PC 17 is read out. After that, in step S2303, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the drawing list this time are stored in the register 153.

In the following step S2304, the addresses where the first texture and the second texture are stored in the memory module 133 are grasped based on the current drawing list.

Here, in the present different form, a plurality of types of textures are set so as to correspond one-to-one with each key data KD1 to KD3. Specifically, the first texture, the second texture, and the third texture are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data KD3. In the configuration where four or more types of key data are set, it is sufficient that four or more types of textures are set correspondingly.

Similar to the particle dispersion texture PC18 shown in FIG. 33, single image data is set for each texture in a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data. By setting multiple types of textures for a single particle dispersion object PC17 in this way, the types of single image data set for one vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 are multiple frames. It is changed with the passage of (that is, the passage of a plurality of update timings), and the change is made to a large number of vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17, more particularly to all vertex data.

For example, in the first texture, the single image data for the first vertex data is the first single image data for displaying the first single image (for example, “◯” shown in FIG. 36), whereas the first single image data is the first. In the two textures, the single image data for the first vertex data is the second single image data for displaying the second single image (for example, “□” shown in FIG. 36). Similarly, in the first texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is the third single image data for displaying the third single image (for example, “Δ” shown in FIG. 36). In the second texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is the single image data for displaying a single image (for example, “◯” shown in FIG. 36) different from the third single image.

After executing the process of step S2304, the initial application process is executed in step S2305 in the same manner as in step S2204. As a result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is set to the start coordinate corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1.

After that, in step S2306, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2307. After executing the setting process in the world coordinate system for the particle dispersion object PC 17, this setting process is terminated. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the first texture of the first texture and the second texture is used for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the first texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the first key data KD1.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the start designation of the particle dispersion effect is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether or not new key data is specified in the current drawing list.

If not specified, in step S2309, the numerical information of the blending counter provided in the register 153 is updated so as to be incremented by 1. Here, the blending counter specifies the blending ratio by VDP135 when blending coordinate data using a plurality of key data and when blending single image data using a plurality of textures. It is a counter to do.

The blend counter is set to "0" as an initial value, and when the counter value is "1", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 99% and the rear side. The ratio of the key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 1%, the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 99%, and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 1. %. When the counter value is "2", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 98%, and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is set to 2. %, Further, the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 98%, and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 2%. When the counter value is "99", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 1%, and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 99. %, Further, the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 1%, and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 99%. In other words, as the number of frames advances, the application ratio of the key data on the front side decreases, while the application ratio of the key data on the rear side increases, and similarly, the application ratio of the texture on the front side decreases, while the rear side. The application ratio of the side texture is increased.

The blend ratio information corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter as described above is stored in the memory module 133 as table information in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical information of the blending counter is not limited to this. The information of the blend ratio corresponding to the above may be calculated by the calculation formula determined by the program.

In the following step S2310, the coordinate blending process is executed. In the blending process, the two key data currently set, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the case of the first frame period, are updated in step S2309. Blend according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the blend counter later. The specific calculation method of this blend is the same as in the case of step S2208.

In the following step S2311, the texture blending process is executed. In the blending process, the two textures currently known, specifically, the single image data of the first texture and the second texture in the first frame period, are used for blending after the update process of step S2309. Blend according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the counter.

For example, first, the single image data corresponding to the vertex data of the first texture is read, and the single image data corresponding to the vertex data of the second texture is read. Then, each color information of RGB in the former single image data (here, 1 pixel is used for convenience of explanation) is (r1, g1, b1), and the latter single image data (here, 1 pixel is used for convenience of explanation). (R2, g2, b2), the ratio of the front texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt3, and the ratio of the rear texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt4 (rt3 + rt4 = 1). In this case, the single image data (r, g, b) after blending is
r: r1 x rt3 + r2 x rt4
g: g1 x rt3 + g2 x rt4
b: b1 x rt3 + b2 x rt4
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed for the single image data corresponding to all vertex data.

After that, in step S2312, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2313. After executing the setting process in the world coordinate system for the particle dispersion object PC 17, this setting process is terminated.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data which is the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data which is the blend result in step S2310. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, each single image data which is the blending result in step S2311 is generated for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Applies. As a result, the single image corresponding to the blending result of step S2311 is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the blending result of step S2310.

Here, since the configuration is such that the blend ratio is derived using the blend counter on the VDP135 side as described above, the process for deriving the blend ratio is not executed in the display CPU 131. As a result, the processing load of the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the display CPU 131 uses these keys when a predetermined key data combination such as a combination of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 or a combination of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3 is used. The number of times the data blend ratio is changed may be instructed to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 may independently determine the blend ratio at each change time for the predetermined key data combination according to the instruction. In this case, when there are multiple types of periods in which the same combination of predetermined key data is used, and the processing load of VDP135 is larger in the specific period than in the other periods, the specific period By reducing the number of changes instructed by the display CPU 131, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 135. Further, in the above configuration, the VDP 135 may be set so that the blend ratio is changed at a constant rate at each change time, and in this case, each is uniquely set according to the instructed number of changes. Data may be set so that the blend ratio of each change time can be derived, or the blend ratio of each change time may be derived by calculation.

If it is determined in step S2308 that new key data is specified in the current drawing list, the blend counter is initialized in step S2314. As a result, the calculation of the blend ratio will be started from the beginning from the next processing round.

In the following step S2315, the key data update process is executed. In the update process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the front key data, specifically the first key data KD1, is set as new key data set in the drawing list this time. Specifically, it is rewritten to the third key data KD3. Further, in step S2316, a new texture is grasped. In this process, of the two textures currently stored in the register 153, the front texture, specifically the first texture, is the new texture set in the drawing list this time, specifically, the first texture. 3 Rewrite to texture. At the time of this rewriting, the third texture is read from the memory module 133.

In the following step S2317, the application process at the time of update is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. Further, in step S2318, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

After that, in step S2319, each coordinate data grasped in step S2317 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in step S2318 are set for the particle dispersion. After setting for the object PC 17, this setting process ends.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in step S2317. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the second texture of the second texture and the third texture is used for each vertex data set at the coordinates as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the second texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2.

By the way, from the next processing round in which the third key data KD3 and the third texture are newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2308 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect is reached, and the processing of steps S2309 to S2313 is performed. To execute. In this case, in step S2310, the blending of the coordinates is executed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3, and in step S2311, the blending of the single image data is executed using the second texture and the third texture. NS.

In another form for executing the particle dispersion effect as described above, the display mode of the particle dispersion effect is changed by different textures applied to the same object as the effect progresses. Is possible, and the monotonicization of the display effect is suppressed. In this case, a different texture is not used for each frame whose display mode is changed, but a texture corresponding to the first update timing and a second update timing after a plurality of update timings are supported. By blending with the textures, the image data used between the first update timing and the second update timing is created, so it is possible to reduce the number of textures stored in advance. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

Further, each texture is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each key data, and the switching of each texture is performed according to the switching of each key data. Therefore, the processing load of the processing related to the switching in the VDP 135 can be reduced.

<Other forms of particle dispersion production>
-In the particle dispersion effect (in the case of FIG. 35 and in the case of FIG. 37), the number of key data KD1 to KD3 is set to be larger, and the number of frames until the key data KD1 to KD3 to be used are switched is set to be smaller. By doing so (for example, every 10 frames), the unit image may be displaced and displayed so as to draw a curved trajectory instead of a linear image while blending the coordinate data.

-The target to be blended using the key data KD1 to KD3 may be added to or replaced with the coordinate data as an α value for setting the transparency, and the color information of the vertex data and the color information of the vertex data may be obtained without executing the texture mapping. It may be a vertex color that makes it possible to determine the color information of a polygon composed of a plurality of vertex data. Further, in a configuration in which UV scrolling is performed in which the UV value for determining the relative pasting position of the texture with respect to the object is changed and the display mode is changed even when the same texture is pasted, the UV is used. The value may be changed by using a blend of key data.

The first frame period and the second frame period are not limited to the same number of frames, and the number of frames included in these frame periods may be different. In this case, it is necessary to perform the blending process according to each frame period.

-The type of single image data for displaying a single image may be the same. In this case, since it is not necessary to set the single image data corresponding to each single data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18, the data capacity of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 can be reduced.

-Instead of the configuration in which blending is performed using two types of key data, a configuration in which blending is performed using three or more types of key data may be used. In this case, by appropriately changing the blending ratio of these three types of key data, it is possible to make the trajectory when the single image is displaced curved rather than linear. When blending using three or more types of key data, for example, a virtual arc or sphere is assumed by calculation from the three or more types of key data, and is displaced along the assumed virtual arc or sphere. It may be configured so that a single image is displayed so as to go through.

-The VDP 135 may be configured to have a dedicated circuit for calculating vertex data using key data. Further, the VDP 135 may have a configuration having a dedicated circuit for calculating vertex data when the key data is not used. By having these circuits individually, it is possible to specialize in the calculation of each vertex data, and it is possible to suitably calculate the vertex data.

-The configuration for deriving parameter data using key data as described above may be applied to a configuration for displaying an image using image data of two-dimensional information such as sprite data. For example, in deriving the coordinate parameters when the sprite data is set in the frame buffer 142, a configuration in which a plurality of key data are blended may be performed.

<Structure for displaying the sea level>
Next, a configuration for displaying the sea level will be described.

The sea level display is an effect for displaying the sea level in the background, and is an effect for displaying the sea surface in a wavy manner over a plurality of continuous frames (multiple image update timings). The sea level display is a display effect executed in the first display mode among the first display mode and the second display mode described above. When displaying the sea surface, the sea surface object and the normal map data for finely changing the movement of the sea surface object are used.

These sea level objects and normal map data will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). FIG. 38 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface object PC 19, and FIG. 38 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal map data ND1 and ND2.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the sea surface object PC 19 has a large number of surface data (polygons) SD defined by a plurality of vertex data so as to have a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns. In this case, each surface data SD has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38 (a), the surface data SD in the lower left corner portion has the information in the first column and the first row as order information, and in FIG. 38 (a), the surface data SD in the upper right corner portion is in the 25th column. It has 25 lines of information as order information.

Each surface data SD is defined as a quadrangle consisting of four vertex data, but is not limited to this, and may be defined as a triangle consisting of three vertex data, and is defined by five or more vertex data. It may be defined as another polygon. Further, any one surface data SD is adjacent to the other surface data SD, and the vertex data of the one surface data SD also serves as the vertex data of the other surface data SD. That is, each surface data SD has a common side between adjacent surface data SDs. Therefore, basically, when the coordinate data of one vertex data is changed, a plurality of surface data SDs are deformed, and the coordinate data of one side consisting of two adjacent vertex data is changed. In that case, the orientation of the plurality of surface data SDs will be changed.

The sea surface object PC 19 is set with the initial coordinate data of each vertex data in order to determine the coordinates and the direction of the surface in the initial state of each surface data SD. In addition to this, the initial scale data of the sea surface object PC19, the initial α value data uniformly applied to all vertex data (or surface data SD), and the initial rotation angle of the sea surface object PC19. Data etc. are included.

Here, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is divided into a plurality of groups by grouping a plurality of adjacent surface data SDs, and specifically, the first surface data group, ..., The k surface. It has a data group (k is an integer of 2 or more, and k = 25 in this embodiment). The number of surface data SDs included in each surface data group is the same for a plurality of predetermined number (specifically, 25), but the surface data SD included in at least a part of the surface data groups The numbers may be different. In FIG. 38 (a), each unit surrounded by a thick line corresponds to a surface data group.

The coordinates and the orientation of each surface of each of the surface data groups are individually determined based on the control of the display CPU 131. Specifically, the entire surface data SD included in the first surface data group constitutes the same surface facing a predetermined direction, and in that state, the coordinates of the surface data SD that is the reference in the first surface data group are the predetermined coordinates. The coordinates of each surface data SD included in the first surface data group and the orientation of the surface are determined so as to be. That is, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are first roughly determined in units of the sea level data group. Hereinafter, the coordinates and orientation determined in the unit of each surface data group are also referred to as the first stage form.

The reference surface data SD is a single surface data SD in each surface data group, but may be a plurality of surface data SDs. Further, instead of setting the coordinates based on the surface data SD, the coordinates may be set as the reference for the vertex data constituting the corner portion of the surface data group. In this case, the corner portion may be set. The reference coordinates may be set for all, or the reference coordinates may be set only for one corner portion. Further, in order to make the sea surface object PC19 a series, the coordinates and the orientation of the surface are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary portion between the two are the same in the adjacent surface data group.

The normal map data ND1 and ND2 are data for making the orientation of each surface data SD included in each surface data group different from each other after the form of the first stage is determined in the unit of each surface data group. There, a plurality of types, specifically two types of normal map data ND1 and ND2, are stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Each normal map data ND1 and ND2 each has a large number of unit normal data UNDs for changing the orientation of each surface data SD from the form of the first stage. In the following description, one of the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is also referred to as a first normal map data ND1 and the other is also referred to as a second normal map data ND2.

FIG. 38B is an image diagram of normal map data ND1 and ND2 having a large number of unit normal data UNDs, and each square portion arranged so as to have a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns is a unit method. The line data UND is shown. In this case, in each normal map data ND1 and ND2, each unit normal data UND has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38 (b), the unit normal data UND in the lower left corner portion has the information in the first column and the first row as order information, and in FIG. 38 (b), the unit normal data UND in the upper right corner portion is It has the information in the 35th column and the 35th row as order information.

Each unit normal data UND has data on the direction when the direction of each surface data SD is changed from the form of the first stage and data on the amount of change when the direction is changed (hereinafter, also referred to as change data). doing. In this case, in one normal map data ND1 and ND2, the data in the changing direction and the data in the amount of change in the changing direction are the same among some unit normal data UNDs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may differ among all unit normal data UNDs.

The same change data determined by each unit normal data UND is included between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, but the arrangements of the change data do not match. In this case, the change data determined by each unit normal data UND may be different in all the order information between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, and each unit method may be different in at least a part of the order information. The change data determined by the line data UND may be different. In each normal map data ND1 and ND2, the number of unit normal data UNDs is the same, but may be different.

The number of unit normal data UNDs in each normal map data ND1 and ND2 is set to be larger than the number of surface data SD constituting the sea level object PC19. In such a configuration, when the unit normal data UND of each normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied to the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19, the entire data SD is included in the normal map data ND1 and ND2. The unit normal data UND to be applied to the reference surface data SD is selected, and by using the relationship as a reference and using the order information on the surface data SD side and the order information on the unit normal data UND side, the above The unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD other than the reference surface data SD is selected.

More specifically, in a configuration having the surface data SD for the nth row in the mth column (m and n are integers of 1 or more), the reference surface data SD is the first row in the first column. When the corresponding unit normal data UND is in the t-th row of the s column (s and t are integers of 1 or more), the unit normal data UND used this time is in the s-th column to the (s + m-1) column. Therefore, it is the tth column to the (t + n-1) row. Therefore, the unit normal data UND is read from the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Then, in each of the read unit normal data UNDs, the order information is converted by the operation in which the order information of the t-th row of the s column becomes the first row of the first column, and the order information after the conversion is performed. It is associated with the surface data SD of the same order information as.

A method of applying the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 to the sea surface object PC 19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), when the direction of the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 is changed by using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are the sea surface objects. It is applied to PC19 at the same time. In this case, at the start of the sea level display, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of one normal map data ND1 coincides with the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC 19, and the sea surface object PC 19 Data is set so that all surface data SDs correspond to different unit normal data UNDs. Similarly, for the other normal map data ND2, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of the normal map data ND2 coincides with the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC19, and the sea surface object. The data is set so that all the surface data SDs of the PC 19 correspond to the different unit normal data UNDs.

In this case, the unit normal data UND of one normal map data ND1 and the unit normal data UND of the other normal map data ND2 correspond to the same surface data SD at the same time. When the change data of these unit normal data UNDs is applied to the surface data SD, the orientation of the surface data SD due to the change data corresponding to one normal map data ND1 and the orientation of the surface data SD corresponding to the other normal map data ND2 are supported. Blending of each modified data is performed so that the orientation is intermediate with the orientation of the surface data SD due to the modified data, and the modified data as a result of the blending is applied to the surface data SD.

In FIG. 39A, the positions of the reference corners at the start are different between the normal map data ND1 and the normal map data ND2, but they are the same. May be good. Even in this case, since the arrangement of the change data is different between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the content of the change data applied to the surface data SD is the same for both normal map data ND1 and ND2. This event does not occur for all surface data SDs.

After that, as the number of frames in the sea level display progresses, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD as the reference of the sea level object PC 19 is generated. Both normal map data are changed in each of ND1 and ND2. However, at the time of this change, the change is made so that all the surface data SDs of the sea surface object PC19 correspond to the different unit normal data UNDs.

By changing the unit normal data UND corresponding to the reference surface data SD in this way, it is possible to gradually change the mode in which the orientation of each surface data SD is changed, and the sea level display is rich in change. It becomes possible to make it. Further, since the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are blended, even if the variation of the changed data is suppressed to some extent at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is substantially applied to the surface data SD. It is possible to increase the variation of change data.

Next, how to apply the changed data to each surface data SD will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

As described above, the unit normal data UND is individually associated with each surface data SD, but the change data by the unit normal data UND is not applied to all the surface data SDs. In each surface data group, the change data by the unit normal data UND is applied only to a part of the surface data SD1. In detail, the surface data SD1 to be applied is predetermined so that the changed data is not applied to the surface data SDs sharing the same vertex data at the same time.

In detail, the surface data SD1 to which the changed data is applied in each surface data group is limited to a part as shown in FIG. 40 (a), and other surface data SD1 to be applied thereof are separated from each other. Due to the existence of the surface data SD2, the vertex data is not shared between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Further, since the surface data SD1 to be applied does not constitute the corner portion in the surface data group, the vertex data is shared between the surface data SD1s to be applied even when viewed between the surface data groups. Not. With such a configuration, even if the orientation of the surface data SD is randomly changed by using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the surface data SD1 is sandwiched between the surface data SD1 to be applied. The surface data SD2 for buffering to absorb the difference in the orientation of the sea surface is present, and it is possible to ensure the continuity of the sea surface object PC19 as a surface.

FIGS. 40 (b-1) and (b-2) show how the orientation of each surface data SD is changed from the first stage form by applying the change data to the surface data SD1 to be applied. show. As shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), in the form of the first stage, the surface data SD1 and SD2 included in the predetermined surface data group face the same direction and form the same surface. There is.

Of these surface data SD1 and SD2, the second and fourth are the surface data SD1 to be applied, and the blend result of both normal map data ND1 and ND2 with respect to these second and fourth surface data SD1. Certain change data is applied. At this time, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the second and fourth surface data SD1 are changed in the orientation based on the corresponding change data, respectively. Further, the first, third, and fifth surface data SD2, which are the surface data SD2 for buffering instead of the surface data SD1 to be applied, are objects for the sea surface in the embodiment in which the amount of change from the first stage form is the smallest. The orientation is changed so as to ensure the continuity as a surface of the PC 19.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for setting the orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 will be described.

FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing a calculation process for sea level display executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for sea level display is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S903 of the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for sea level display is executed in the situation of the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the processing of steps S1502 to S1505 in FIG. 24.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the sea level display is being executed based on the currently set data table. If the sea level display is not being executed, step S2402 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the sea level display. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2403.

In step S2403, the sea level object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2403, the process for starting control of the sea level object PC 19 is completed in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S901). Further, the information for control of the sea level object PC19 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the sea level display is completed.

In the following step S2404, information for instructing the VDP 135 to control the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is stored. However, the display CPU 131 does not execute the arithmetic processing necessary for actually applying the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 to the sea level object PC19. That is, although the display CPU 131 instructs the VDP135 to use these data ND1 and ND2 for the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2, the data ND1 and ND2 are actually used. Do not execute arithmetic processing to control. As a result, the processing load of the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

In the following step S2405, the sea level animation data is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the animation data AD for the sea surface. The sea level animation data AD is data for controlling the sea level object PC19 in units of surface data groups, and the sea level animation data AD determines the reference coordinates and orientation of each surface data group to determine the sea level. The form of the first stage is determined for the object PC19.

More specifically, in the animation data AD for the sea surface, a plurality of pointer information is set so as to be serial numbers, and each of the pointer information has reference coordinate data and orientation for each surface data group. The data is set. For example, for the first surface data group, reference coordinate data (A1-1) and orientation data (B1-1) are set corresponding to the first pointer information, and the second pointer. Reference coordinate data (A1-2) and orientation data (B1-2) are set corresponding to the information, and the fth pointer information (f is an integer of 3 or more, for example, "50"). The reference coordinate data (A1-f) and the orientation data (B1-f) are set in correspondence with the above. Further, the reference coordinate data and the orientation data are set corresponding to the pointer information also for the second surface data group, ..., The k surface data group.

The pointer information is updated when it advances by one frame in the situation where the sea level is displayed (every time the image update timing is reached), and the combination of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data is next as the pointer information is updated. It will be changed to the one in the order of. In this case, the continuous reference coordinate data and the orientation data are set so that the form of the first stage has continuity of movement in each surface data group.

Further, although the arrangement mode of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data is different between the surface data groups as the pointer information progresses, the morphological continuity is not impaired between the adjacent surface data groups. The reference coordinate data and the orientation data are set. That is, the surface data group in which a plurality of sides are in contact with the other surface data group is released from the state of being in contact with the other surface data group once the reference coordinates and orientations of the other surface data groups are determined. Unless otherwise, there will be restrictions on the reference coordinates and orientation, and in some cases it will be uniquely determined. In such a situation, the reference coordinates and the orientation of each surface data group are predetermined so as not to release the state of being in contact with the other surface data group. Specifically, as described above, in the adjacent surface data group, the reference coordinate data and the orientation data are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary portion between the two are the same.

Returning to the description of FIG. 41 (a), after reading the sea level animation data AD in step S2405, the initial setting data is grasped from the sea level animation data AD in step S2406. Specifically, as the start data, the combination of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data set corresponding to the first pointer information is read out for the entire surface data group. After that, after storing the start designation information of the sea level display in step S2407, the present calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the sea surface is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the instruction to use the sea surface object PC19 and the first method. Information on instructions for using the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Furthermore, the initial setting data for the form of the first stage grasped in step S2406 is set, and the sea level display start designation information indicating that the sea level display should be started is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2401 that the sea level display is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, the sea level object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Further, in step S2409, the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S2410, the pointer information of the animation data AD for the sea surface that has already been read into the work RAM 132 is updated so as to be incremented by 1, and in step S2411, the updated data corresponding to the updated pointer information is grasped. .. Specifically, regarding this grasping process, as data for updating, a combination of reference coordinate data and orientation data set corresponding to the updated pointer information is read out for the entire surface data group. After that, in step S2412, after storing the update designation information of the sea level display, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the sea surface is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the instruction to use the sea surface object PC19 and the first method. Information on instructions for using the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Further, the update data for the form of the first stage grasped in step S2411 is set in the drawing list. Furthermore, the sea level display update designation information indicating that the sea level display should be updated is set in the drawing list.

The pointer information of the animation data AD for the sea surface may correspond to the total number of frames in which the sea surface display is executed, but in the pachinko machine 10, the pointer information is larger than the total number of frames in which the sea surface display is executed. The number is set small. In this case, the pointer information is in the last order during the execution of the sea level display, but the pointer information is returned to the first pointer information in the next frame in the last order. Further, in view of the fact that the pointer information loops in this way, the form of the first stage in which the pointer information is in the last order and the form of the first stage in which the pointer information is in the first order are the movements of the sea surface object PC19. It is preferable to have continuity.

Next, the setting process for sea level display executed by VDP135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The sea level display setting process is executed in the situation of the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the processes of steps S1703 to S1708 in FIG. 26. Further, the sea level display setting process is started when either the sea level display start designation information or the sea level display update designation information is set in the drawing list this time.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sea level display start designation information is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2502.

In step S2502, based on the current drawing list, the address where the sea level object PC 19 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the sea level object PC 19 is read out to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. Further, in step S2503, based on the current drawing list, the addresses in which the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are stored in the memory module 133 are grasped, and these first normal maps are captured. The data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are read into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

In the following step S2504, the initial setting data (data extracted from the animation data AD for the sea surface) set in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S2505, the sea surface is applied with the grasped initial setting data. Set the object PC19 in the world coordinate system. As a result, the sea level object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system in the state of being in the form of the first stage.

In the following step S2506, the initial setting process of the first normal map data ND1 to the world coordinate system is executed, and in step S2507, the initial setting process of the second normal map data ND2 to the world coordinate system is executed. As a result, as described in the state described with reference to FIG. 39 (a), the unit normal data UND and the second normal of the first normal map data ND1 for each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19. The unit normal data UND of the map data ND2 is associated with it.

Then, in step S2508, after executing the normal parameter setting process, the present setting process ends. The normal parameter setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. The normal parameter is a parameter that determines the orientation of the surface data SD, and specifically determines the coordinates of the vertex data constituting the surface data SD.

In the normal parameter setting process, first, in step S2601, the initialization process of the application counter provided in the register 153 is executed. In this process, the application counter is used to specify the surface data SD1 to which the change data set in the unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is applied by VDP135. In the state where the application counter is initialized, numerical information corresponding to the number of surface data SD1 to be applied is set in the application counter.

In the following step S2602, the change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the first normal map data ND1. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter is grasped, and then the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 in the first normal map data ND1 is grasped. do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read out.

In the following step S2603, the change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the second normal map data ND2. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter is grasped, and then the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 is grasped in the second normal map data ND2. do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read out.

In the following step S2604, the blending process of the change data read from the first normal map data ND1 in step S2602 and the change data read from the second normal map data ND2 in step S2603 is executed. In this blending process, as described above, the orientation of the surface data SD1 due to the change data corresponding to the first normal map data ND1 and the orientation of the surface data SD1 due to the change data corresponding to the second normal map data ND2. The blending of each change data is performed so that the orientation is in the middle of.

It should be noted that the blend is not limited to the configuration performed so as to be in the middle of each direction of the surface data SD1 when each change data is applied, and relates to the first normal map data ND1 at a predetermined ratio. The configuration may be closer to the change data or closer to the change data related to the second normal map data ND2.

In the following step S2605, the change data of the result of blending in the above step S2604 is applied to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter. As a result, the surface data SD1 is changed from the orientation in the form of the first stage to the orientation corresponding to the change data after the blending. However, as already explained, since the change data is given as a relative amount of change from the form of the first stage as a reference, the change data is not applied as it is, but in the form of the first stage. Based on the orientation, the direction corresponding to the change data after blending is changed by the corresponding amount of change.

In the following step S2606, the surface data SD2 adjacent to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter, that is, the surface data SD2 sharing the vertex data with the surface data SD1 to be applied (for buffering already described). A process of changing the direction of the surface data (corresponding to SD2) according to the change of the coordinates of the shared vertex data is executed. In this case, for the vertex data that is not shared with the surface data SD1 to be applied this time, the orientation of the adjacent surface data SD2 is changed without changing the coordinates from the form of the first stage.

In the following step S2607, the numerical information of the application counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter so that the target for which the normal parameter is set shifts to the surface data SD1 of the next application target.

After that, in step S2608, whether or not the numerical information of the applied counter after the update is information indicating that the setting for all the surface data SD1 to be applied is completed, that is, the numerical information of the applied counter is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process returns to step S2602, the processing of steps S2602 to S2607 is executed for the surface data SD1 to be newly applied, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2608. , Ends this setting process.

Returning to the explanation of the sea level display setting process (FIG. 42), if a negative determination is made in step S2501, the update data (from the sea level animation data AD) set in the drawing list this time in step S2509. The extracted data) is grasped, and in step S2510, the grasped update data is set in the sea level object PC19 already set in the world coordinate system. In this case, the updated data is overwritten with the coordinates and orientation data of each surface data group of the sea level object PC19. As a result, the sea level object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system again in the state of being in the form of the first stage.

In the following step S2511, the update process of the first normal map data ND1 is executed, and in the step S2512, the update process of the second normal map data ND2 is executed. As a result, the unit normal data UND and the second method of the first normal map data ND1 associated with each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 so as to be in the state described with reference to FIG. 39 (b). The unit normal data UND of the line map data ND2 is changed.

Then, after executing the normal parameter setting process of step S2508, the present setting process is terminated. The normal parameter setting process is as described above.

As described above, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD constituting the sea surface object PC 19 in the world coordinate system are determined. Then, the color information is set for the surface data SD in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). In this case, the color information is set for the surface data SD by a method different from the texture mapping process. Such a method will be described.

44 (a) to 44 (c) are explanatory views for explaining a method of setting color information in each surface data SD.

In the color information setting process (step S1009), as shown in FIG. 16, the setting process of each object in the world coordinate system is completed, and further, the setting process in the visual field coordinate system of step S1006 and the clipping process of step S1007. Is executed after is executed. Therefore, at the timing when the color information setting process is executed, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are already set in a state of being converted into the visual field coordinate system.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the viewpoint VD as a reference of the visual field coordinate system is set, and the sea level object PC 19 is set so as to be located above the viewpoint VD. There is. That is, the sea level display in the pachinko machine 10 is a display with the sea in the background, and the sea level is displayed in a state of looking up from the sea.

When setting the color information for each surface data SD, when a light source is temporarily applied above the sea surface object PC19, the transmitted light from the light source is the position of the viewpoint VD in relation to the coordinates and orientation of the surface data SD. Assuming whether or not it can be visually recognized by, the surface data SD corresponding to the transmission of the light from the light source and the light from the light source are all on the upper side of the sea surface object PC19. It is distributed to the surface data SD corresponding to the reflection and non-transmission.

In this distribution, the light source is not set in the lighting process (step S1008) of the drawing process (FIG. 16), but depending on whether the angle of the surface data SD with respect to the viewpoint VD is less than a predetermined angle. The surface data SD is classified into one of a classification having a large amount of transmitted light and a classification having a small amount of transmitted light.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b-1) and (b-2), when the surface data SD is first viewed from the viewpoint VD by using the coordinates and orientation data of the surface data SD. The refraction angle β, which is an angle, is calculated. In this calculation, a table in which the refraction angle data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the coordinate and orientation data is read from the memory module 133 and used, but a calculation formula program is prepared in advance. , The refraction angle may be calculated by the calculation formula.

Here, since the setting of the color information for the surface data SD is premised on the incident of light from the atmosphere to the sea surface, the larger the refraction angle β, the larger the incident angle α, and the larger the incident angle α, the more the amount of light. Will be less. On the premise of this, in VDP135, after calculating the refraction angle β, it is determined whether or not the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle. When the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44 (b-1)), the surface data SD that causes the refraction angle β is classified as having a large amount of transmitted light, and the refraction angle β is classified. When is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44 (b-2)), the surface data SD that causes the refraction angle β is classified as having less transmitted light. By the way, all the surface data SDs that do not have the component facing the viewpoint VD side, such as the case where the component is facing the opposite side to the viewpoint VD side, are classified as having less transmitted light. Will be done.

After performing the above classification, the color information of each surface data SD is determined using the color table CT as shown in FIG. 44 (c). The color table CT is stored in the memory module 133 in advance, and a plurality of color NOs. Data and these color numbers. The color information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data of. Further, in the color table CT, correlation data referred to when deciding which color information is applied to the surface data SD is set.

In this case, the color NO. "7" is applied to the surface data SD classified as having less transmitted light. On the other hand, color NO. "1" to "6" are applied to the surface data SD classified as having a large amount of transmitted light, and a plurality of types of color information are set for the surface data SD of the classification. .. Which color information is set for the surface data SD of the classification is not determined by the orientation of the surface data SD, but is determined by the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD.

Specifically, the vertex data of one corner portion (for example, the lower left corner portion when viewed in the state of FIG. 38 (a)) of the surface data SD is used as the reference threshold data, and the Z coordinate data of the reference vertex data is obtained. When it is equal to or less than "Z1" which is the threshold value of the first stage (that is, when the Z coordinate is closer to the viewpoint VD than "Z1"), "CL1" is selected as the color information, and the threshold value of the first stage is "Z1". When it is larger than "Z1" and equal to or less than "Z2" which is the threshold value of the second stage, "CL2" is selected as the color information, which is larger than "Z2" which is the threshold value of the second stage and is the third stage. When it is equal to or less than the threshold value "Z3", "CL3" is selected as the color information. Then, in the same manner below, "CL4" and "CL5" are selected corresponding to the range of each threshold value, and the Z coordinate data of the reference vertex data is larger than the threshold value "Z5" of the fifth stage. In that case, "CL6" is selected as the color information.

These color information "CL1" to "CL6" are set so as to be darker toward the rear side. Specifically, the color information "CL1" is set as white and the color information "CL6" is dark blue. The color information "CL2" to "CL5" are set as intermediate colors thereof. Further, the color information "CL7" is set as a darker color than the color information "CL6", and specifically, it is set as a blue color close to black.

A specific processing configuration for setting color information in each surface data SD will be described below.

FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing a color information setting process for sea level display executed by VDP135. The color information setting process for sea level display is executed in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the color information setting process for sea level display is started when either the sea level display start designation information or the sea level display update designation information is set in the drawing list this time.

First, in step S2701, the initialization process of the application counter is executed. In this process, the application counter has a role of specifying the surface data SD of the target for which the color information is set by the VDP 135, and is included in the sea surface object PC 19 in the state where the application counter is initialized. Numerical information corresponding to the number of surface data SDs is set in the application counter.

In the following step S2702, the orientation data is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the sea surface object PC 19, and the refraction angle is calculated from the grasped orientation data in step S2703. Then, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not the calculated refraction angle is equal to or greater than the reference angle.

If the angle is equal to or larger than the reference angle, in step S2705, the color No. in the color table CT is changed. The color information (“CL7”) of 7 is set for the surface data SD targeted this time. On the other hand, if it is less than the reference angle, the corresponding color NO is obtained by reading out the Z coordinate data of the surface data SD targeted this time in step S2706 and collating it with the color table CT in step S2707. .. Color information (any of "CL1" to "CL6") is set for the surface data SD targeted this time.

After executing the process of step S2705 or step S2707, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter in step S2708, the application counter so that the target for which the color information is set shifts to the next surface data SD. Update the numerical information of. After that, in step S2709, whether or not the numerical information of the applied counter after the update is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD is completed, that is, the numerical information of the applied counter is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2709, the process returns to step S2702, and the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 are executed for the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the main color information setting process is terminated.

FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing a sea level adjustment process executed by VDP135. The adjustment process for the sea surface is executed in the drawing data creation process for the background in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). More specifically, although it is omitted in FIG. 27 and the description is also omitted, it is executed between step S1802 and step S1803. That is, after the three-dimensional image data for the background is converted into the two-dimensional image data, the adjustment process for the sea surface is executed.

First, in step S2711, it is determined whether or not any of the sea level display start designation information and the sea level display update designation information is set in the current drawing list. If none of these are set, this adjustment process ends as it is. If any of them is set, the adjustment process is terminated after the sea surface blurring process is executed in step S2712.

In the sea surface blurring process, the blurring process using the Gaussian filter is executed in the two-dimensional image data for the background created by using the hidden surface processing (step S1802). Specifically, one pixel is extracted from the area corresponding to the sea level display, and a predetermined number (for example, five) of pixels are extracted on both sides in the X-axis direction with the pixel as the center. After that, the weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined by using the Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended (combined) with the determined weighting applied. Similarly, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of pixels are extracted on both sides in the Y-axis direction with the same pixel as the center. After that, the weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined by using the Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended with the determined weighting applied. Then, the blurring process using the Gaussian filter is executed for all the pixels constituting the area corresponding to the sea level display.

Next, the contents of the sea level display will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea level display, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining the setting mode of the color information in the region where the sea level display is performed. ..

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), an image showing the sea is displayed in the background in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed. The sea level display SP is made at the upper part of this background. In this case, the orientation of the surface data SD for displaying the sea surface is finely controlled, and the color information is set according to the finely controlled state, so that the orientation of the sea surface is expressed in detail. The transmission of light from the atmosphere to the sea is realistically expressed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a realistic sea level display SP.

Further, since the configuration is such that the direction of each surface data SD is adjusted after setting the form of the first stage of the sea surface object PC 19, the large movement of the sea surface is made regular, but the regular large movement is performed. It is possible to give irregularity to the orientation of each surface data SD.

Further, when controlling the movement of each surface data SD individually, it is not necessary to individually change the orientation of each surface data SD by calculation by using the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load. In particular, by changing the positions of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 in the world coordinate system, the unit normal data UND associated with each surface data SD is changed as the sea surface display SP progresses. When the orientation of the surface data SD is complicatedly changed with the progress of the sea surface display SP, the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 can be used and the same application process can be used, so that the storage capacity can be used. And the processing load can be reduced.

Further, since the rough movement determination using the sea level animation data AD is executed by the display CPU 131, and the fine surface orientation determination using the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is executed by the VDP135. , The processing load can be distributed.

Further, as already described, by executing the sea surface blurring process, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the pixel PS (the pixel on the left side) in which the color information corresponding to the fact that there is almost no light transmission is set. Between the PS) and the pixel PS (pixel PS on the right side) in which the color information corresponding to the highest light transmission is set, the pixel PS (center side) in which the color information of both pixel PSs is blended. Pixel PS) will exist. As a result, it is possible to make the boundary of the portion where the color information is different inconspicuous in the configuration in which the color information is individually set in the area where the sea level display SP is performed.

Further, since the blurring process is executed after the two-dimensional image is formed, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the blurring process is executed in the state of the three-dimensional image.

<Another form of color information setting processing for sea level display>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the color information setting process for sea level display executed by the VDP 135.

First, in step S2801, the initialization process of the application counter is executed in the same manner as in step S2701. In the following step S2802, similarly to the above step S2702, the orientation data is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the sea surface object PC19, and in step S2803, as in the above step S2703, The refraction angle is calculated from the grasped orientation data.

In the following step S2804, color information is derived from the refraction angle information calculated in step S2803. In this case, when deriving the color information, the color table in which the refraction angle information and the color information are associated is read from the memory module 133, and the color information corresponding to the refraction angle information is read out. That is, in the present different form, the color information is directly read from the refraction angle information.

After that, in step S2805, the Z coordinate data of the surface data SD targeted this time is read out, and in step S2806, the color information adjustment process corresponding to the read Z coordinate data is executed. In this case, the more the surface data SD exists at a distance from the viewpoint VD, the larger the shift amount when shifting the color information set in step S2804 to the darker color side is executed.

In the following step S2807, the numerical information of the application counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter so that the target for which the color information is set shifts to the next surface data SD. After that, in step S2808, whether or not the numerical information of the applied counter after the update is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD is completed, that is, the numerical information of the applied counter is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the process returns to step S2802 and the processes of steps S2802 to S2807 are executed for the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the main color information setting process is terminated.

<Other forms>
The number of unit normal data UNDs included in one normal map data ND1 and ND2 may be less than or equal to the number of surface data SD included in the sea level object PC19. In this case, by arranging a plurality of the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 side by side, the unit normal data UND may be associated with all of the surface data SD.

-It is not necessary that a plurality of types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are set, and a single normal map data may be set. In this case, when displaying the sea level, only the single normal map data may be applied to the sea level object PC19. Even with this configuration, by changing the position of the normal map data applied to the sea level object PC 19, it is possible to change the direction of each surface data SD as the sea level display progresses. In addition, by reading out a plurality of the single normal map data at the same time and making the positions applied to the sea level object PC19 different from each other in the plurality of normal map data, it is possible to control the direction of a complicated surface. It may be configured to be used.

-The target to which the unit normal data UND of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied is limited to the configuration in which a plurality of surface data SDs sharing the same vertex data are restricted so as not to be applied at the same time. However, the unit normal data UND may be applied to the full-scale data SD. However, in this configuration, different coordinates are set for one vertex data at the same time, so it is necessary to adjust them separately. For example, the priority when setting the coordinates of the vertex data is set in advance between adjacent surface data SDs, and the unit normal data UND is applied as it is to the surface data SD with high priority, and the surface with low priority is applied as it is. For the data SD, while maintaining the coordinates of the vertex data determined by the high-priority surface data SD, the orientation is closer to the direction determined by the unit normal data UND applied to itself than the state of the first stage form. It may be configured to be adjusted as follows.

The setting of the color information for each surface data SD is not limited to the setting method using the color table CT and the setting method shown in FIG. 47. For example, the lighting of the drawing process (FIG. 16). In the process, the virtual light source may be set on the opposite side of the viewpoint VD with the sea surface object PC 19 interposed therebetween, and the amount of light transmitted from the virtual light source may be calculated individually for each surface data SD. In this case, it is conceivable to derive color information according to the amount of transmitted light by using predetermined table information, and set the color information of the derived result in each surface data SD. Further, it is conceivable that the initial color information is set in advance for each surface data SD, and the color information is adjusted in relation to the calculated transmission amount.

The sea level object PC 19 is not limited to the configuration set above the viewpoint VD, and the sea surface object PC 19 may be set below the viewpoint VD. In this case, after the orientation of each surface data SD is determined by each of the above methods, bright color information is set if the orientation of each surface data SD is an orientation that easily reflects light, and the orientation of each surface data SD is set. Set dark color information if the direction is such that light can easily pass through. In this setting, the table information prepared in advance may be used, or the configuration may be configured to actually calculate using a virtual light source.

-For the surface data SD in which the derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, the brightest color information may be set regardless of the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD. Instead of this, for the surface data SD in which the derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, brighter color information than in the case of other refraction angles is set, and the color information is used as a base from the viewpoint VD. The color information may be adjusted so that the farther the distance in the Z-axis direction is, the darker the color information is.

-The processing configuration for controlling the orientation of the surface and setting the color information as described above does not have to be the sea surface, but may be another water surface such as a river or a pond. Further, when expressing a transmissive film or a reflective film that changes the state of the surface over time, a processing configuration for controlling the orientation of the surface and setting color information as described above may be applied.

-The target of the parameter controlled by using the map data is not limited to the direction and the coordinates, and may be the color of the surface or the transparency value of the surface.

The number of unit normal data UNDs included in the normal map data ND1 and ND2 may be smaller than the number of surface data SD included in the sea level object PC19. In this case, one normal map data ND1 and ND2 are applied to a predetermined number of surface data SDs in the sea surface object PC19, and the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 are applied to the remaining surface data SD again. You can apply it.

In the normal parameter setting process (FIG. 43), the process of step S2606, that is, the adjustment process of the adjacent surface data may not be executed. In this case, regarding the surface data SD2 for buffering, among the plurality of vertex data possessed by the surface data SD2, the vertex data shared with the surface data SD1 to be applied is associated with the application of the normal map data ND1 and ND2. The coordinates set in the first stage form are maintained for the vertex data that is changed but not shared. Even in this case, the orientation and size of the cushioning surface data SD2 will be changed according to the change in the orientation and size of the surface data SD1 to be applied.

-Instead of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 that directly control the orientation of the surface data SD, map data that directly controls the coordinates of each vertex data of the sea surface object PC 19 may be used. In this case, by applying the map data to the sea surface object PC 19, the coordinates of the vertex data are changed, and as a result of the change, the orientation of the surface data SD is changed. In this configuration, the control target is not a surface but a vertex, so it is possible to separate the surface data SD1 to be applied and the surface data SD2 for buffering as in the case where the normal map data ND1 and ND2 are used. You don't have to do it. The amount of control of each vertex data set in the map data is preferably the amount of change from the coordinates in the form of the first stage.

-A configuration in which the sea level object PC 19 is distinguished into a plurality of surface data groups is not essential, and a configuration in which such a distinction is not made may be used. In this case, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is individually controlled by using the normal map data ND1, ND2, and the like.

-At the same update timing, the setting of the first stage form based on the control in units of the surface data group and the individual control of the orientation of the surface data SD using the normal map data ND1, ND2, etc. The configuration is not limited to both, for example, the first stage form is set at one update timing, the orientation of the surface data SD is individually controlled at the next and subsequent update timings, and further, these are performed. It may be a structure that repeats. In this case, the processing load at one update timing can be reduced.

-The color information is not limited to the configuration in which the color information is selected according to the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, and the color information is selected according to the distance from the viewpoint VD determined by the X coordinate, the Y coordinate and the Z coordinate. It may be configured. Alternatively, the color information may be selected according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, or the color information may be selected according to the distance in the Y-axis direction. Further, the color information may be selected according to the rotation position and scale of the target object instead of the distance from the viewpoint VD.

<Configuration for focusing display>
Next, a configuration for performing focus display will be described.

In the focus display, when a plurality of types of individual images are simultaneously displayed on the display surface G as if the positions of the display surface G in the depth direction are different from each other, they exist at a predetermined position or range in the depth direction. The individual image is in focus, and for the individual image, the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved part, and the outer edge part are clearly displayed, but are they present on the front side and the back side of the individual image? The individual image displayed in this way is out of focus, and the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved part, and the outer edge part are blurred and displayed in a blurred state.

The focus display is executed during the opening / closing execution mode in which the processing load required for image display is relatively low among the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode. That is, during the game round, it is necessary to display the variation of the symbol according to the animation data predetermined in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3. Therefore, in the task process (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131, steps S903 to At least the process of step S905 is executed. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode, it is not necessary to display the fluctuation of the symbol in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3. Therefore, in the task process (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131, steps S903 and S904 are executed, but the step. S905 is not executed. Since the processing load of the display CPU 131 is reduced by this amount in the open / close execution mode, the control for focus display is executed by utilizing the reduced amount.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode executed by the display CPU 131. The effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed by the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is started when the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode is set.

First, in step S2901, the object for the effect to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2901, the setting process for starting control (step S901) for the object for the effect is completed. In the following step S2902, various parameters of the grasped object for the effect are calculated and the information for control is updated.

In the following step S2903, the teaching object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. The teaching object is an object used when displaying an image that enables the player to be taught the situation of the game. For example, if the game is in the middle of a round, the current round is the number of the round. The contents such as "" are taught using the object for teaching (see FIG. 52). In addition, information on the type of symbol combination displayed on the effective line in the game round that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is taught using the teaching object (see FIG. 52). Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2903, the setting process for starting control (step S901) for the object for teaching is completed. In the following step S2904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

In the following step S2905, it is determined whether or not the focus effect period is in the open / close execution mode based on the currently set data table. The focus effect period is a period during which the focus display can be performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. In this pachinko machine 10, a focus effect period is set as a part of the opening / closing execution mode, and specifically, a predetermined round such as the first round (that is, a period during which a prize can be won in the variable winning device 22). ) Has a focus effect period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the focus effect period may be set for a plurality of rounds, the focus effect period may be set at the opening or the ending, and the focus effect period may be set between rounds. It may be set, the focus effect period may be set over a predetermined round and the next round, and the entire open / close execution mode may be set as the round effect period.

If it is not the focus effect period (step S2905: NO), the present effect calculation process is terminated as it is. When the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is instructed to use the effect object grasped in step S2901 above. Information is set along with information on the texture usage instructions for those objects. Further, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set in the drawing list, and the information of the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set.

When it is the focus effect period (step S2905: YES), it is determined in step S2906 whether or not it is the focus selection period. In the focus effect period, a focus selection period is set so that the player can select the focus over a predetermined number of frames (predetermined plurality of image update timings) such as 300 frames from the start timing. When the player gives an instruction to select a focus in the focus selection period based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, the focus display execution period is set to be performed. This pin and display execution period will continue until the end of the round being executed. Since the individual images that are the target of focus selection during the focus selection period continue to be displayed during the subsequent focus display execution period, it is possible to execute focus display that reflects the result of focus selection during the focus selection period. It becomes.

The focus display execution period is executed over a predetermined number of frames (predetermined plurality of image update timings) such as at least 500 frames. Further, a predetermined round may be set as a focus selection period, and subsequent rounds may be set as a focus display execution period.

In the case of the focus selection period (step S2906: YES), the parameter adjustment process for focus selection is executed in step S2907, and the execution designation information for focus selection is stored in step S2908. Ends the arithmetic processing.

When the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is instructed to use the effect object grasped in step S2901 above. Information is set along with information on the usage instructions of the texture corresponding to those objects. Further, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set in the drawing list, and the information of the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, the parameters for focus selection are set as the parameters of the object for effect grasped in step S2901, and the execution designation information for focus selection is set.

Here, during the focus selection period, the display is performed so that the player can recognize that the individual images that enable the focus selection are gradually switched on the display surface G. For example, in a state where a plurality of individual images are displayed at the same time as if they are arranged so as to be offset in the depth direction of the display surface G, the plurality of individual images are sequentially transitioned to a focus selectable state. The method of making the focus selectable state is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration in which the annular portion is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the individual image and the annular portion is blinked, a configuration in which the individual image is enlarged and displayed, or an individual image is displayed. A configuration in which the image is enlarged and then reduced is displayed, or a configuration in which another image pointing to an individual image is displayed is conceivable. Such display of the focus selectable state is executed by referring to the above parameter for focus selection in VDP135 in the situation where the drawing list in which the execution designation information of focus selection is set is output.

In the pachinko machine 10, the individual image that enables focus selection is an individual image for effect displayed in front of the background, but a background image may be included.

On the other hand, if it is not the focus selection period (step S2906: NO), the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not the focus display is being executed. If the focus display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2910 whether or not a focus instruction command has been received from the voice emission control device 60. The focus instruction command is a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 at the end timing of the focus selection period when the player gives a focus selection instruction during the focus selection period, and the focus instruction command includes the focus instruction command. The information of the individual image for which the focus selection is instructed is included.

If a negative determination is made in step S2910, this process ends as it is. When the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is negatively determined in step S2905 above, and the effect calculation process ends. The same information as when is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, the focus range calculation process is executed in step S2911. In the focus range calculation process, a process of calculating the focus range from the information of the individual image of the focus selection referent included in the focus instruction command is executed. In this case, since the type of the individual image displayed during the focus effect period has already been determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the focus range data is associated with the individual image to be the focus selection target on a one-to-one basis. Is predetermined as a focus range table. Therefore, in step S2911, first, the focus range table is read from the memory module 133, and the data in the focus range corresponding to the individual image targeted for the focus selection instruction is read. After that, in step S2912, after storing the execution designation information of the focus effect, the calculation process for the present effect is terminated.

When the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is instructed to use the effect object grasped in step S2901 above. Information is set along with information on the usage instructions of the texture corresponding to those objects. Further, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set in the drawing list, and the information of the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, the data of the focus range calculated in step S2911 is set, and the execution designation information of the focus effect is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, the focus display is in the execution state. The setting to the execution state of the focus display is performed, for example, by setting "1" in the flag for distinguishing whether or not the focus display is the execution state in the data table. When the focus display is in the execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2909, the execution designation information of the focus effect is stored in step S2912, and then the calculation process for this effect is terminated.

When the effect calculation process in the open / close execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is instructed to use the effect object grasped in step S2901 above. Information is set along with information on the texture usage instructions for those objects. Further, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set in the drawing list, and the information of the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, the data of the focus range corresponding to the current focus effect is set, and the execution designation information of the focus effect is set.

The VDP 135 displays an image for the focus selection period and displays an image for the focus display execution period based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. In this case, regarding the image display for the focus selection period, the individual images that are in the focus selectable state as described above are sequentially arranged based on the drawing process (FIG. 16) while referring to the focus selection parameter. An image display that switches is performed. On the other hand, the image display for the focus display execution period is performed by executing the process for adjusting the focus after the process of shifting from the state of the three-dimensional image data to the state of the two-dimensional image data is executed. ..

Hereinafter, a specific configuration for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 will be described. FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the VRAM 134 used for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 having a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b, and a Z buffer 143. These buffers 142 and 143 have already been described, and the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 are drawing data which are two-dimensional data referred to when drawing to the symbol display device 31. Is created, and the Z buffer 143 is used to temporarily store the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction when executing the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18).

In addition to the buffers 142 and 143 described above, the VRAM 134 is provided with a blur buffer 181 as an area for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135. The blur buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b. That is, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b has the same number of unit areas as each other, and the blur buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas. The blur buffer 181 can temporarily store the drawing list created in one frame area as it is.

If the drawing list can be temporarily stored as it is, the number of unit areas in the blur buffer 181 may be larger than the number of unit areas possessed by one frame area.

The process for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 is executed in the drawing data synthesis process in step S1012 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the drawing data synthesis process.

In the drawing data synthesis process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the execution designation information of the focus effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3002.

In step S3002, the background drawing data already created in the immediately preceding step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. After that, in step S3003, the drawing data for the effect and the design already created in the immediately preceding step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the frame area 142a in which the drawing data for the background is written as described above. , 142b, and then the synthesis process is terminated.

In this case, the drawing data for the effect and the design is written while referring to the α value, as described above. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the symbol does not exist in the drawing data for the effect and the pattern, and only the data corresponding to the individual image for the effect exists. Furthermore, in the open / close execution mode, the drawing data for the effect and the design includes the data of the individual image for teaching created based on pasting the texture for teaching to the object for teaching. For the data of the individual image for the teaching, the drawing data for the effect and the design is created so that the data of the other individual images does not overlap from the front side.

On the other hand, if the execution designation information of the focus effect is set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, similarly to step S3002, the background drawing data already created in the immediately preceding step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. In the following step S3005, similarly to the above step S3003, the drawing data for the background is written as the drawing data for the effect and the design already created in the immediately preceding step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144. Write to the frame areas 142a and 142b. Then, in step S3006, after performing the adjustment process for focusing effect, the present synthesis process is terminated.

FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing an adjustment process for focusing effect.

In the adjustment process for the focus effect, first, in steps S3101 to S3107, the blur map creation process for creating the blur map data to be referred to for executing the focus effect is executed. The blur map data is the drawing data that is two-dimensional image data, and how the color information set in each unit area of the frame areas 142a and 142b where the drawing data is created is in the situation of the three-dimensional image data. It is map data for specifying by VDP135 whether or not it had the coordinates in the Z-axis direction. That is, it is the data in which the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each unit area of the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Here, as already described, for the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect and the design, each object is set for the world coordinate system in the drawing process (FIG. 16) (steps S1002 to S1004). After the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (step S1005), the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (step S1006) is executed, and in that state, the clipping process (step S1007), the lighting process (step S1008), and the color. It is created after executing the information setting process (step S1009). In this case, since each drawing data is created for the frame areas 142a and 142b, the color information setting process is performed in the field coordinate system as described above when creating the drawing data. The state of the data is maintained, and even after the drawing data is created, it is maintained until a new drawing process is started. Then, the blur map data is created by using the data in the state where the color information setting process is performed in this visual field coordinate system.

In the blur map creation process, the blur map data is created based on the same process as the hidden surface process (FIG. 18) using the Z buffer 143. However, in the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18), the drawing data for the background is created with only the image data for the background as the processing target, and the drawing data for the effect and the design is generated with only the drawing data for the effect and the design as the processing target. Although it was configured to be created, in the blur map creation process, all the image data clipped in the visual field coordinate system is collectively treated as a processing target without making such a distinction.

Specifically, regarding the blur map creation process, first, in step S3101, an individual image included on the Z axis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) is used as a reference, and this time. Grasp the Z value set for the target pixel of the individual image that was the test target. In the following step S3102, the Z value set in the area of the dots corresponding to the drawing target dots on a one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In the following step S3103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S3101 corresponds to the front side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S3102. If it corresponds to the front side, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the Z value grasped in step S3101 is overwritten in the dot area referred to in step S3102 in the Z buffer 143. After that, the process proceeds to step S3105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that it does not correspond to the front side, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing the process of step S3104. That is, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or the back side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is not updated. .. On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the front side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all the target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If it is not completed, the process returns to step S3101 and a Z test is performed on the new target pixel.

If it is completed, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC12. If it is not completed, in step S3107, after updating the projection target dot, the process returns to step S3101, and a Z test is performed on the new projection target dot. If it is completed, it means that the creation of the blur map data is completed, so the process proceeds to step S3108.

By creating the blur map data as described above, the VDP135 specifies what kind of coordinates the color information corresponding to each unit area of the composite drawing data has in the Z-axis direction. Is possible. Therefore, for the color information corresponding to each unit area, the relative positional relationship in the depth direction can be specified by the VDP 135.

In the adjustment process for focusing effect, after creating the blur map data in steps S3101 to S3107, the process proceeds to step S3108.

In step S3108, the composite drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn by the processes of steps S3004 and S3005 in the drawing data composition process (FIG. 49 (b)) is stored in the blur buffer 181. In the following step S3109, the data in the focus range set in the drawing list this time is read out.

After that, in steps S310 to S3117, the blurring process is executed based on the read focus range data. In the blurring process, the unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time is subjected to the determination process of whether or not the unit area is the execution target of the blurring process, and the unit area determined to be the execution target is subjected to the determination process. , Blurring is executed, and these processes are further executed for all the unit areas included in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time.

Here, the process of causing blurring cannot be executed for the unit area where the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponds to the focus range, but the focus range corresponds to a single coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. However, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), it corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction. That is, the focus range is set to have a certain depth of field, and the image displayed on the display surface G is not excessively blurred. The focus range is specifically arbitrary, but it is set so as to include the entire individual image for one effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction in the state of the three-dimensional image data. Is preferable.

For the unit area where the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is out of the focus range, the degree of blurring is set to be larger as the data exists at a distance farther from the focus range. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are set so that the degree of blur gradually increases as the distance from the focus range increases. It is set.

The first blur range is set so as to be continuous from the focus range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous on the side away from the focus range in the Z-axis direction. The first blur range exists on both the back side and the front side of the focus range. Further, the second blur range is set so as to be continuous from the first blur range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the focus range and the side away from the first blur range in the Z-axis direction. The second blur range exists both on the further back side of the first blur range on the back side and on the further front side of the first blur range on the front side. Further, the third blur range is set so as to be continuous from the second blur range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the focus range, the first blur range, and the side away from the second blur range in the Z-axis direction. doing. The third blur range exists both on the further back side of the second blur range on the back side and on the further front side of the second blur range on the front side.

The first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are specifically arbitrary, but the entire individual image for one effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction in the state of the three-dimensional image data. It is preferable that each is set so as to be within a range in which the above can be included. In this case, the number of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range is the same as each other, and the number of the coordinate data is the same as the focus range. It may be different from the focus range, or it may be different from each other. For example, the number of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the blur range farther from the focus range may be increased.

As described above, the focus range is changed based on the operation of the player's effect operating device 48. Therefore, the focus range data stored in advance in the memory module 133 is included in the focus range. It is set as data of the number of coordinate data that are continuous in the Z-axis direction. Then, based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction as a reference for setting the focus range are determined, and the Z included in the focus range data is determined based on the coordinates. The focus range is set by converting the number of coordinate data in the axial direction as the range of the actual coordinate data. In this case, it is preferable that the coordinates in the Z-axis direction, which is a reference for setting the focus range, are set as the coordinates on the frontmost side or the coordinates on the farthest side of the focus range. By setting it as the frontmost coordinate, the focus range can be set by simply adding the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data to the reference coordinate. It becomes possible. Even if it is set as the innermost coordinates, the focus range can be obtained by simply subtracting the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data for the reference coordinates. Can be set.

Similarly, for the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range, the data for each blur range stored in advance in the memory module 133 is included in the blur range in the Z-axis direction. It is set as the data of the number of consecutive coordinate data. Then, based on the focus range determined as described above, the reference coordinates of each blur range are determined, and by applying the data for each blur range to the reference coordinates, each blur range is determined. It becomes possible to set.

As described above, the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range can be set for each of the front side and the back side of the focus range, but as already explained, the focus range is the player's. It is determined based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Then, the focus range may be set corresponding to the individual image for production that exists in the foreground side. In this case, each blur range is set only on the far side of the focus range.

Returning to the description of FIG. 50 (a), in the blurring process, first, in step S3110, the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to the current unit area is read out from the blur map data created in steps S3101 to S3107. In the following step S3111, it is determined whether or not the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in step S3110 is included in the focus range read in step S3109. If it is included in the focus range, it is not necessary to execute the process of causing blurring for the unit area, so that the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the processes of steps S3112 to S3115.

If it is not included in the focus range, in step S3112, it is determined whether or not the unit area of this time corresponds to the teaching area for displaying the individual image for teaching. The individual image for teaching is an image displayed by using the object for teaching already described. If it corresponds to the teaching area, the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the processes of steps S3113 to S3115. That is, the process of causing blurring is not executed for the individual image for teaching. As a result, even in the case of performing the focus effect, it is possible to suitably teach the information using the individual image for teaching.

By the way, since the position where the individual image for teaching is displayed is unchanged regardless of the operation mode of the effect operation device 48 by the player, the address of the unit area included in the teaching area is predetermined. , The data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

If a negative determination is made in step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3113, the process of determining the blur range is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in step S3110 is included in the first blur range, the second blur range, or the third blur range, and the blur is generated. Determine the target blur range with. After that, in step S3114, the blur generation process is executed.

The blur generation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51 (a).

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first blur range is determined in step S3113. When the first blur range is determined, in step S3202, the first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the X-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference, and the colors from each of the unit areas are specified. Extract information. This extraction is performed not from the frame areas 142a and 142b that are the objects of drawing this time, but from the blur buffer 181. Further, in step S3202, the color information set in the unit area of this time is also extracted, and this extraction is also performed from the blur buffer 181.

In the following step S3203, the blurring generation process in the X-axis direction is executed. In the blur generation process, a Gaussian filter is used to generate a blur. That is, the weighting according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the unit area centered on the target unit area this time is determined by using the Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas. Then, with the determined weighting applied, the color information of the unit area centered above and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended. The color information of the blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

In the following step S3204, a first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the Y-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blur buffer 181. Further, in step S3204, the color information set in the unit area of this time is also extracted, and this extraction is also performed from the blur buffer 181.

In the following step S3205, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. In the blur generation process, a Gaussian filter is used to generate a blur. That is, the weighting according to the distance in the Y-axis direction from the unit area centered on the target unit area this time is determined by using the Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas. Then, with the determined weighting applied, the color information of the unit area centered above and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended. The color information of the blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

Then, in step S3206, the blending process is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3203 and the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3205 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the main blur generation process is terminated.

By executing the blur generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), the first predetermined number on both sides in the X-axis direction with respect to the unit area targeted this time. Each color information set in the unit area of the minute and each color information set in the unit area of the first predetermined number on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the unit area targeted this time. Blended against information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the second blur range is determined in step S3113. When the second blur range is determined, in step S3208, a second predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the first predetermined number, is specified in each of the X-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference. , Extract color information from each of those unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blur buffer 181. Further, in step S3208, the color information set in the unit area this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In the following step S3209, the blur generation process in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific content of such processing is the same as in step S3203.

In the following step S3210, a second predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the first predetermined number, is specified in each of the Y-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blur buffer 181. Further, in step S3210, the color information set in the unit area of this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In the following step S3211, the blurring generation process in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific content of such processing is the same as in step S3205.

Then, in step S3212, the blending process is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3209 and the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3211 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the main blur generation process is terminated.

By executing the blur generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), a second predetermined number is used on both sides in the X-axis direction with reference to the unit area targeted this time. Each color information set in the unit area of the minute and each color information set in the unit area of the second predetermined number on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the unit area targeted this time. Blended against information. In this case, since the number of unit areas to be blended is larger than that in the case of FIG. 51 (b-1), the degree of blurring is larger in the case of the second blurring range than in the case of the first blurring range. Become.

If a negative determination is made in step S3207, it means that the third blur range has been determined in step S3113. When the third blur range is determined, in step S3213, a third predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the second predetermined number, is specified in each of the X-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference. , Extract color information from each of those unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blur buffer 181. Further, in step S3213, the color information set in the unit area of this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In the following step S3214, the blurring generation process in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific content of such processing is the same as in step S3203.

In the following step S3215, a third predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the second predetermined number, is specified in each of the Y-axis directions with the current unit area as a reference, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blur buffer 181. Further, in step S3215, the color information set in the unit area of this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In the following step S3216, the blurring generation process in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific content of such processing is the same as in step S3205.

Then, in step S3217, the blending process is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3214 and the color information of the blending result calculated in step S3216 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the main blur generation process is terminated. By executing the blur generation process as described above, the degree of blur can be made larger than that in the case of the second blur range.

Returning to the description of the adjustment process for focusing effect (FIG. 50A), after executing the blur generation process in step S3114, the color information of the result calculated by the blur generation process is obtained in step S3115. After overwriting the current unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, the process proceeds to step S3116. As a result, the color information corresponding to each blur range is set in the unit area.

Here, in the configuration in which the color information resulting from the blurring is sequentially set in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, in the blurring generation processing, the frame areas 142a and 142b are described above. Instead of reading the color information from, the color information is read from the blur buffer 181. As a result, when blurring is generated in a predetermined unit area, it is possible to prevent the color information as a result of already causing blurring from being used. Therefore, it is possible to cause blurring in a manner that does not depend on the order in which the blurring generation processing is executed.

In step S3116, it is determined whether or not all the unit areas of the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time are the execution targets of the process of steps S3110 to S3115. If it is not completed, in step S3117, after updating the target unit area, the process returns to step S3110, and the process of steps S3110 to S3115 is executed for the new target unit area. If it is completed, this adjustment process is terminated.

Next, the content of the focus display will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the focus display is not performed, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the focus display is performed.

In the state where the focus is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the individual images CH11, CH12, CH13 for each effect, the background image (sea surface image, sandy beach image, and sky image) CH14 and The individual images CH15 and CH16 for each teaching are in a state of being in focus. Therefore, in each of these images CH11 to CH16, the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved portion, and the outer edge portion are clearly displayed.

On the other hand, in the state where the focus is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the focus range of the individual image CH11 for directing and the image CH14 of the background of the sandy beach where the individual image CH11 exists. Although it is clearly displayed because it is included in, the borders and bends of the pattern are out of focus for the individual images CH12 and CH13 for other effects and the background image CH14 for other parts. The boundary of the part and the outer edge part are displayed in a blurred state and are not clear. In particular, the degree of the blurred state becomes larger as the image is displayed so as to be farther from the individual image CH11 for effect included in the focus range to the front side and the back side in the depth direction of the display surface G. ing. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the individual image CH 11 for production is in focus.

However, even when the focus is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are clearly displayed as in FIG. 52 (a). As a result, even if the focus is displayed, it is possible to satisfactorily teach information using the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching. Further, since the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are displayed as if they are arranged on the front side of the other images, even if they are excluded from the target of blurring, they are excluded from the target of focus display. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the image, and it is possible to perform a good focus display.

Further, at the time of the focus display, the blur map data is not stored in the memory module 133 in advance, but is created by the VDP 135 each time. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity. In particular, in a configuration that allows the player to actively participate in the game by setting the focus range based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player, the blur map data is set in advance. If you try to keep it, the data capacity will be enormous. Further, if an attempt is made to suppress this enormous amount of data capacity, the number of patterns in the focus range that can be selected based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 is reduced. On the other hand, as described above, by creating the blur map data each time with VDP135, it is possible to preferably encourage the player to actively participate in the game while reducing the data capacity. It becomes.

On the other hand, if the blur map data is created as described above, the processing load of the VDP 135 increases accordingly. On the other hand, when blurring is generated, it is necessary to perform complicated processing when averaging color information by performing it in the state of a two-dimensional image instead of performing it in the state of a three-dimensional image. Is eliminated, and the processing load for generating blur is reduced.

<Another form of focus display>
-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the blur map data is created when the drawing data is created, and the blur map data may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance. In this case, if the focus range is selected based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, it is necessary to create the blur map data in advance corresponding to all the variations related to the selection. Further, if the focus range is not selected based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 and the blur display is performed in a certain mode, the blur map data according to the mode may be created in advance.

In the configuration in which the blur map data is created in advance as described above, the data set corresponding to each unit area in the blur map data does not have to be the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction, and the focus range, And, it may be data indicating which range corresponds to each blur range.

-The averaging process of color information for causing blurring does not need to be performed after converting the 3D image data into 2D image data, and may be performed in the state of the 3D image data. In this case, when blending the pixels around the reference pixel with respect to the reference pixel, the distance from the reference pixel to the surrounding pixels is calculated in a three-dimensional state, and weighting is performed according to the calculation result. Is applied to the color information of the pixels around them, and the blending process may be performed.

-The color information averaging process for causing blurring may be configured to evenly blend the extracted color information, instead of using a Gaussian function to perform weighting according to the distance from the center. In this case, although the realism of the blurred display is reduced, the processing load can be reduced.

The color information averaging process for causing blurring is not limited to the configuration performed in each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and may be configured to be performed only in one of them. In this case, although the realism of the blurred display is reduced, the processing load can be reduced.

-The averaging process of color information for causing blurring is limited to a configuration in which the drawing data set in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are separately stored in the blurring buffer 181. Instead, the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn may be used as they are. In this case, when blurring the color information of a predetermined unit area, the color information of the unit area that has already caused blurring is used, and the order of the processing for causing blurring affects the degree of blurring. However, the storage capacity can be reduced because it is not necessary to separately provide the blur buffer 181 and the processing load can be reduced because it is not necessary to separately store the blur buffer 181. Be done.

-A buffer other than the Z buffer 143 may be used when creating the blur map data. In this case, the VRAM 134 may be provided with a dedicated buffer for creating the blur map data.

-Instead of creating the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect and the design individually and synthesizing them to create the drawing data for one frame, the color information setting process is performed in step S1009. After the execution, the drawing data for one frame may be collectively created. In this configuration, when the drawing data for one frame is created by using the hidden surface processing, the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to each unit area is set in the Z buffer 143. Therefore, the data created in the Z buffer 143 by this hidden surface processing can be used as it is as the blur map data.

-The focus may be displayed as an effect for the game. In this case, the symbols that are variablely displayed in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 may be excluded from the blurring target in the same manner as the individual images for teaching are excluded from the blurring target as described above. Further, if the focus is displayed as an effect during reach, the symbols forming the reach line may be excluded from the blurring target on the symbol rows SA1 and SA3 that are previously stopped and displayed. In addition to or instead, the symbol of the final stop symbol sequence SA2 may be excluded from the blurring target. By excluding the symbols forming the reach line, the focus display can be used as a reach effect without deteriorating the distinctiveness of the type of reach symbols, and the symbols in the final stop symbol column SA2 are excluded. This makes it possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without deteriorating the distinctiveness of the symbols existing near the reach line in the final stop symbol sequence SA2.

Further, in a configuration in which the symbols SA1 to SA3 are hidden and the reach effect is performed using the focus display while displaying the symbols forming the reach line or the image teaching the type thereof, the reach line is formed. An image that teaches the pattern or its type may be excluded from the blurring target. This makes it possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without deteriorating the distinctiveness of the type of reach symbol.

Further, in the case of performing the focus display as an effect for the game round, the target to be excluded from the blurring target may be other than the symbol, for example, an image for teaching the number of reserved information is displayed on the display surface G. If so, the image for teaching the number of pending information may be excluded from the blurring target.

Instead of displaying an image using three-dimensional image data, focus display may be performed in a configuration in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data such as sprite data. In this case, when setting the sprite data in the frame areas 142a and 142b, the coordinate data corresponding to the depth direction of the display surface G is set in each sprite data, and the coordinate data is the focus range and each blur range. Depending on which of them is included, a configuration in which a blurred display is performed can be considered.

-After setting the image data in the world coordinate system, the configuration for executing the process of creating the map data including the parameter group may be performed for a purpose other than the focus display.

For example, in a configuration in which either lighting or extinguishing is set according to the orientation of the surface of an object in displaying whether or not a predetermined area is blinking in an image for one frame, a world coordinate system or a field coordinate system is used. In the state set to, the orientation of each surface is read as a parameter, and map data is created as data that aggregates them. Then, the drawing data after projection may be displayed in a blinking manner by processing the color information based on the created map data.

Further, for example, in displaying a surface whose shape changes with time, such as the sea surface in an image for one frame, in a configuration in which color information to be set in each surface data is selected according to the orientation of the surface of the object, the world The orientation of each surface is read as a parameter in the state set in the coordinate system or the field coordinate system, and map data is created as data that aggregates them. Then, the drawing data after projection may be displayed on the surface by processing the color information based on the created map data.

<Configuration for displaying pattern changes>
Next, the configuration for performing the pattern change display will be described.

The pattern change display is a case where a special character is continuously displayed over a plurality of frames (multiple image update timings), and the pattern is changed as the frame progresses while the outer edge shape of the special character is the same. It is a display effect. However, instead of simply changing the pattern, when changing the pattern of a part of the special character, the type of the first part texture to be pasted on the special object corresponding to the special character is switched. Regarding the change of other patterns of the special character, the type of the second partial texture to be pasted on the special object is the same, but the pasting position of the second partial texture with respect to the special object is changed. Change the pattern.

These special objects, the first partial texture, and the second partial texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c). 53 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special object PC 20, and FIGS. 53 (b-1) to 53 (b-3) are explanatory views for explaining the first partial textures PC 21 to PC 23. 53 (c-1) to (c-4) are explanatory views for explaining the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

As shown in FIG. 53A, the special object PC 20 includes a large number of polygons, is created as data corresponding to a three-dimensional shape, and has a plurality of parts parts BP, AP1 to AP4. As the plurality of parts parts BP, AP1 to AP4, the main body parts part BP and a plurality of accessory parts parts AP1 to AP4 attached to the main body parts part BP are included. The special character is a character that applies a whale to a humanoid shape, the main body parts BP corresponds to the face part and the body part, and the attached parts parts AP1 to AP4 correspond to the hand part and the foot part continuous from the body part. doing.

As shown in FIGS. 53 (b-1) to 53 (b-3), the main body parts BP are displayed as if the face pattern (eyes and mouth pattern) and the body are reflected by light. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 for displaying an image including both of the patterns for the purpose are pasted. These first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are set so as to be able to cover the entire main body part portion BP. Further, as for the data for displaying the pattern of the face, the position (coordinates) of the main body part portion BP to which these data are pasted is the same between the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. On the other hand, regarding the data for displaying as if the body is reflected by light, the position (coordinates) of the main body part BP to which these data are pasted is the position (coordinates) of each first part texture PC21 to PC23. It is different between.

That is, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 display data for displaying an invariant pattern in which the position pasted on the main body parts BP does not change, and a change pattern in which the position pasted on the main body parts BP changes. The data structure for displaying the invariant pattern is common between the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but the data structure for displaying the change pattern is different.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 53 (c-1) to (c-4), the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 have a pattern for displaying as if the hands and feet are reflected by light. The second partial textures PC24 to PC27 for displaying the image including the above are pasted. These second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the accessory parts portions AP1 to AP4, and further, one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 with respect to one accessory part portions AP1 to AP4. Only are provided. The second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are set so as to be able to cover the corresponding accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the pattern that causes the boundary portion is set to have continuity with the pattern that causes the boundary portion on the opposite side.

The pasting of the first partial texture PC21 to PC23 and the second partial texture PC24 to PC27 to the special object PC20 is performed based on a predetermined UV coordinate value. The UV coordinate values are as described above, and are stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture, and each pixel of the image data for the texture is stored. Can be associated with each pixel of image data for an object on a one-to-one basis.

When displaying the special character, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are changed in a predetermined order for the main body part BP of the special object PC20. This order is set so that the mode in which the change pattern changes has continuity. On the other hand, one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 corresponding to each of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 of the special object PC20 will be pasted, and the UV coordinates to be referred to when the pasting is performed. The value is changed from the initial setting state in a predetermined manner. The change of the UV coordinate value is set so that the mode in which each of the patterns corresponding to the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 changes has continuity.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pattern change display using the special object PC20, the first partial texture PC21 to PC23, and the second partial texture PC24 to PC27 will be described. The special object PC20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a special character executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the special character is executed in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the arithmetic processing for the special character is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the special character is displayed is set.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the special character is being displayed based on the currently set data table. If the special character is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the special character display. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S3303, the process for starting control is completed for the special object PC 20 in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S901). Further, the information for controlling the special object PC 20 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the display of the special character is completed.

In the following step S3304, the initial setting process of the first partial texture is executed. Specifically, among the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the first partial texture PC21 in which the order of use is first set is specified, and the usage instruction information of the first partial texture PC21 is stored. The data in the order of use of the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information.

In the following step S3305, the initial setting process of each second partial texture is executed. Here, in the display CPU 131, when the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are changed, the amount of change from the initial coordinate values is derived in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective second partial textures PC24 to PC27. Then, each derived amount of change is provided to VDP135. In VDP135, the provided data of each change amount is applied to each corresponding initial coordinate value. In this case, when viewed from the first second partial texture PC24 to PC27, since the second partial texture PC24 to PC27 contains a large number of pixels, the initial coordinate value exists for each of the large number of pixels. There is. Therefore, the data of the amount of change corresponding to the first second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is uniformly applied to each initial coordinate value of the first second partial texture PC24 to PC27.

For example, in a situation where the initial coordinate values of the predetermined pixels constituting the first second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are (U1, V1) and the initial coordinate values of the other pixels are (U2, V2), the amount of change. When the data of (w1, w2) is (w1, w2), the UV coordinate value of the predetermined pixel is set to (U1 + w1, V1 + w2), and the UV coordinate value of the other pixels is set to (U2 + w1, V2 + w2). NS. Therefore, the relative positions of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 with respect to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 are changed in the same direction and with the same amount of change. Since step S3305 is an initial setting process, data corresponding to the fact that the amount of change does not exist is stored.

The data of the amount of change for changing the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 from the initial coordinate values is set as table information in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of the order of use. The table information is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the table information is individually set for each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

After that, in step S3306, the start designation information of the special character is stored, and in step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC20 to update the control information related to the special object PC20. This arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the special character is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and in step S3304 above. The usage instruction information of the first partial texture PC 21 stored in the above step S3305 and the data of each change amount derived in the above step S3305 are set. Furthermore, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set in the drawing list, and the start designation information of the special character is set.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the special character is being displayed, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target in step S3308 based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S3309, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 based on the currently set data table. The update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is set once for a predetermined plurality of first specific number frames, that is, once for a predetermined plurality of image update timings of the first specific number. Furthermore, this update timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and the predetermined first portion textures PC21 to PC23 may be set as the next first portion. The number of frames until the update timing of the textures PC21 to PC23 (the number of image update timings) and the number of frames from the first partial texture PC21 to PC23 until the next update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 (the number of frames). The number of image update timings) may be different.

If it is not the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the usage instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in the previous processing times is stored as it is in step S3310. On the other hand, when it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the usage instruction information corresponding to the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 in the following order is stored in step S3311.

After executing the process of step S3310 or step S3311, it is determined in step S3312 whether or not it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value applied to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. The update timing of the UV coordinate value is set once for a predetermined plurality of second specific number frames, that is, once for a predetermined plurality of second specific number of image update timings, and further, this update. The timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and may be set from a predetermined UV coordinate value to the next UV coordinate value update timing. The number of frames until the UV coordinate value is updated (the number of image update timings) and the number of frames from the UV coordinate value until the next UV coordinate value is updated (the number of image update timings) may be different.

Further, the update timing of the UV coordinate value is synchronized with the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but may be asynchronous. In order to make it asynchronous, a configuration in which each update cycle is different can be considered. In this case, the UV coordinate value update timing may be shorter or longer than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but the update cycle may be shorter on the UV coordinate value update side. However, in view of the fact that there is almost no effect on the data capacity, it is preferable that the update timing of the UV coordinate value is shorter than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23.

If it is not the update timing of the UV coordinate value, in step S3313, the data of each change amount stored in the previous processing time is stored as it is. On the other hand, when it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value, the data of each change amount in the following order is stored in step S3314.

After executing the process of step S3313 or step S3314, the continuation designation information of the special character is stored in step S3315, and various parameters are calculated for the special object PC 20 in step S3307 to calculate the special object PC 20. After updating the control information related to, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the special character is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing is set with the information of the instruction to use the special object PC20, and in step S3310 and the above step S3310. The usage instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in any one of steps S3311 and the data of each change amount stored in any of the steps S3313 and S3314 are set. Furthermore, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set in the drawing list, and the continuation designation information of the special character is set.

In VDP135, when a drawing list to display a special character is received, a process of setting the special object PC 20 in the world coordinate system is executed in the setting process (step S1003) for the effect in the drawing process (FIG. 16). do. In this case, since the coordinates, scale, rotation angle, etc. for setting in the world coordinate system are also specified in the drawing list, the special object PC 20 is set with them applied. In addition, since the special character is displayed as if it is displaced in a predetermined direction over a plurality of frames, a drawing list corresponding to the special character is applied to the VDP135, and the special character is specially applied to the world coordinate system in the corresponding state. The object PC 20 is set.

Further, in the VDP135, when the drawing list to display the special character is received, the first partial texture PC21 to PC23 is subjected to the special object PC20 in the color information setting process (step S1009) in the drawing process (FIG. 16). And the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are pasted. The process related to the pasting of the texture will be described below.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the texture mapping process for the special character. The texture mapping process for the special character is started when either the start designation information of the special character or the continuation designation information of the special character is set in the drawing list this time.

First, in step S3401, the usage designation information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 set in the drawing list this time is grasped. In the following step S3402, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 corresponding to the usage designation information grasped in step S3401 are read from the memory module 133. After that, in step S3403, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 read in step S3402 are attached to the main body parts BP of the special object PC20. This completes the attachment of the texture to the main body parts BP.

In the following step S3404, "4", which is information corresponding to the number of the accessory parts portions AP1 to AP4, is set in the accessory parts counter provided in the register 153, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 corresponding to the accessory parts portions AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory parts counter are read from the memory module 133.

In the following step S3406, the data of the initial coordinate values corresponding to the accessory parts parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory parts counter is read out. Further, in step S3407, among the change amount data set in the drawing list this time, the change amount data corresponding to the accessory parts parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory parts counter is grasped. Then, in step S3408, the UV coordinate value of this time is derived by applying the amount of change grasped in step S3407 to the initial coordinate value read out in step S3406. After that, in step S3409, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 read out in step S3405 are attached to the corresponding accessory parts AP1 to AP4 according to the UV coordinate values derived in step S3408.

In the following step S3410, the numerical information of the attached parts counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S3411, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the attached attached parts counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the process returns to step S3405, and the process of pasting the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 according to the above steps S3405 to S3409 is executed for the next accessory parts AP1 to AP4. If it is determined in step S3411 that the numerical information of the attached parts counter is "0", this texture mapping process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the pattern change display will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

56 (a) and 56 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the pattern change display.

In the pattern change display using the special character CH17, as shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B, a reach line is formed on a predetermined effective line during the game rotation, and the final stop symbol sequence SA2 is used. It is executed in the situation where the variable display of the symbol is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, a pattern change display is performed as an effect for notifying the player that the game times have a high expectation of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. The pattern change display using the special character CH17 may be configured to occur with a predetermined probability only in the game times that trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode.

In the pattern change display, the special character CH17 is displaced and displayed in a predetermined direction. In this case, the pattern attached to the special character CH17 is changed according to the displacement of the special character CH17. Specifically, the surface of the special character CH17 is illuminated and reflected by light, and the pattern is changed so that the reflected and brightened portion is displaced. This pattern change occurs in each of the main body parts BP and the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. On the other hand, the positions of the eyes and mouth displayed on the special character CH17 are constant.

As described above, a plurality of types of textures PC21 to PC23 are stored in advance for a part of the special object PC20, and the textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are sequentially changed, whereas the special character is used. The other parts of CH17 are single textures PC24 to PC27, but the UV coordinate values of the textures PC24 to PC27 are sequentially changed, so that the pattern change display is achieved while balancing the data capacity and the processing load. Can be done.

Also, in special characters such as eyes and mouth, where there is a pattern whose relative position with respect to the outer edge does not change, the pattern is not changed by switching the UV coordinate value of a single texture, but it is pasted. By sequentially changing the textures PC21 to PC23 to change the pattern, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the pattern at the relevant portion.

On the other hand, for the accessory parts AP1 to AP4, which are relatively small in size, the pattern is changed by switching the UV coordinate values of the single textures PC24 to PC27, so that the pattern is changed with the change of the UV coordinate values. Even if the shape of the pattern is slightly deformed, it can be made inconspicuous.

<Another form of pattern change display>
-Instead of the configuration in which the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are set to correspond one-to-one with each accessory part parts AP1 to AP4, the predetermined second part texture is applied to a plurality of accessory parts parts AP1 to AP4. It may be a configuration that is commonly used, or a configuration in which one second partial texture is commonly used for all the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in order to make the patterns of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 different, it is preferable to make the initial setting values of the UV coordinate values different from each other.

-The speed at which the UV coordinate values of the second part textures PC24 to PC27 to be pasted in each accessory part part AP1 to AP4 are changed is not limited to the same configuration, and some parts are different. It may be a configuration in which there is, or a configuration in which all are different.

-The pattern may be attached so as to straddle at least one of the main body parts BP and the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, when the appearance of the special character is changed, the change of the straddling pattern when the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are changed so that the continuity of the pattern in the straddling portion is guaranteed. It is preferable to associate the aspect with the change mode of the straddling pattern when the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are changed.

<Regarding the composition related to round production>
Next, the configuration related to the round effect will be described.

The round effect is an effect that can be executed when a round game is performed in the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode is set so that multiple round games are performed, and the round effect is when the round effect is won in the round effect lottery executed when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. , Is executed every time a round game is played. If the round effect lottery is not won, the calculation process or the like in the open / close execution mode will be executed.

As described above, the round game means that (1) the opening time of the variable winning device 22 elapses for a predetermined time, and (2) the total number of winning balls to the variable winning device 22 is a predetermined number. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions is met.

In the round effect, moving image data is used. The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to the still image data for one frame, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded by a moving image decoder (not shown) provided in the VDP 135, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames. By sequentially drawing these still image data, a series of movies are played back.

The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

As shown in FIG. 57, the round moving image data RMD0 is set as the moving image data used in the round effect. In the round moving image data RMD0, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

The compressed data includes I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by itself at the time of decoding. The P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. .. The B-picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or multiple frames before and the I-picture data or P-picture data after one frame or multiple frames at the time of decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data of the round moving image data RMD0, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., The m-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data in the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1th frame, ..., The n-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

The size of the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is set to correspond to the display surface G, and specifically, is set to a size that can be displayed on the entire display surface G. ..

Further, in the round effect, the inserted image data IPD0, which is still image data, is used in addition to the round moving image data RMD0. The contents of the round moving image data RMD0 and the inserted image data IPD0 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58A shows a part of the content of the image set in the round moving image data RMD0, and FIG. 58B shows the image set in the inserted image data IPD0.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a-1), the round moving image data RMD0 has a first background image BP1 showing a wavy state so as to overlap with the first background image BP1 showing a state of surfing. Reference data (I picture data) RMD1 to which the moving character image MP1 and the second moving character image MP2 which is an image of the octopus are added is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (a-2) and 58 (a-3), although the first background image BP1 is not provided, the difference data (P picture) corresponding to the movement of the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are obtained. Data or B picture data) RMD2 is set. By creating still image data for one frame by the reference data RMD1 and applying the difference data RMD2 to the reference data RMD1, each difference data is applied to the first background image BP1 set in the reference data RMD1. Still image data for one frame to which each moving character image MP1 and MP2 set in RMD2 are added is created.

Incidentally, the round moving image data RMD0 is set so that each of the moving character images MP1 and MP2 is framed out from the display surface G. Specifically, the difference data is set so that the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move to the frame-out position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (a-3), the reference data RMD3 in which the second background image BP2 showing the clouds is drawn is set in the round moving image data RMD0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (a-4), the round moving image data RMD0 is set with the reference data RMD4 in which the boy's third moving character image MP3 is enlarged and drawn. Further, although not shown, the round moving image data RMD0 is set with the difference data corresponding to the third moving character image MP3 performing a predetermined operation.

A series of moving image display is performed by sequentially pasting the still image data created by each of the above data RMD1 to RMD4 to the moving object.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the inserted image data IPD0 corresponds to an image displayed on a part of the display surface G, and is more than the image data used to display the entire display surface G. The data is set so that the size and the amount of data (data capacity) are small.

A plurality of types of image data having different display modes are set in the inserted image data IPD0. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b-1), the inserted image data IPD0 includes a first inserted image data IPD1 on which a first inserted character image IP1 showing two girls is drawn. As shown in FIG. 58 (b-2), the second inserted image data IPD2 in which the second inserted character image IP2 showing the three girls is drawn is set.

In the round effect, a series of round moving images set in the round moving image data RMD0 is played back. Then, the inserted character image is inserted and displayed using the inserted image data IPD0 at a predetermined timing during playback of the moving image. In this case, the inserted image data IPD0 used is set to be different depending on the round.

A specific processing configuration for performing a round effect using the round moving image data RMD0 and the inserted image data IPD0 will be described below.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for round effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the round effect is started by the effect operation process in step S904 in the task process (FIG. 14) when the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode is set.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the round effect is being executed based on the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode. The data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode is set so that the round video is played multiple times as a round effect. Specifically, the round video is set to be played the same number of times as the number of rounds. ..

If the round effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3502, and it is determined whether or not it is the playback start timing of the round moving image based on the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode, a plurality of playback start timings of the round video are set in correspondence with the playback of the round video a plurality of times. The reproduction start timing is synchronized with the start timing of the round game, and in detail, the timing is configured to be one processing time (20 msec) before the start timing of the round game.

If it takes a longer period than the period for one processing to decode the round moving image data RMD0, the playback start timing of the round moving image is set to the round moving image data RMD0 rather than the start timing of the round game. It is advisable to set it earlier by the period required for decoding. This makes it possible to suitably cope with the time lag that may occur due to the period required for decoding. In short, if the playback start timing of the round video is set in consideration of the period required to decode the round moving image data RMD0 so that the playback of the round video and the start of the round game are at the same timing. good.

If it is not the playback start timing of the round video, the arithmetic processing for this round effect is terminated as it is, while if it is the playback start timing of the round video, the process proceeds to step S3503 and the round counter area provided in the work RAM 132 is provided. The round counter RC stored in is updated. The round counter RC is for grasping the number of rounds by the display control device 130. The round counter RC is set to "0" as an initial value when the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode is set.

In step S3503, a process of adding 1 to the round counter RC is executed. Thereby, by grasping the round counter RC, it is possible to grasp the number of times the round moving image is played in the opening / closing execution mode of 1. That is, by grasping the round counter RC, it is possible to specify the round number of the round game currently being performed.

After that, in step S3504, various addresses are grasped based on the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, when the address where the round moving image data RMD0 is stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the round moving image data RMD0 are decoded to create still image data for a plurality of frames, they are still. Know the address of the area where the image data is stored.

In the following step S3505, the decoding designation information that specifies that the round moving image data RMD0 is decoded by the VDP135 is stored, and this calculation process is terminated.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), a drawing list in which the decoding designation information of the round moving image data RMD0 is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135.

If the round effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3506 to grasp the moving object. The moving object is an object for mapping still image data. The moving object is composed of rectangular plate-shaped plate polygons. The plate polygon can be said to be an object with a small number of polygons, and is low-definition data configured in a plane shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction.

The size of the moving object is set to a size capable of displaying an image of the entire display surface G. Specifically, the size of the board surface of the moving object is set to the same size as the still image data.

After grasping the moving object, in step S3507, a process for specifying the still image data to be mapped to the moving object is executed. Specifically, among the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the data table corresponding to the currently set open / close execution mode.

In the following step S3508, an arithmetic process for determining the parameters applied to the moving object is executed. Then, in step S3509, the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is used is stored.

After executing the process of step S3509, the arithmetic process related to the inserted image data IPD0 is executed in steps S351 to S3518.

First, in step S3510, it is determined whether or not the inserted character image is being displayed based on the currently set data table. If the inserted character image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3511 to determine whether or not it is the display start timing of the inserted character image.

Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode, the display start timing (insertion timing) of the inserted character image in the round moving image is predetermined. In detail, the insertion timing of the inserted character image is set according to the content of the round moving image, and the timing between the frame-out timing of each moving character image MP1 and MP2 and the display timing of the reference data RMD4 is described in detail. It is set to the display timing of the reference data RMD3. Based on the data table, it is determined whether or not it is the insertion timing of the inserted character image.

When it is the insertion timing of the inserted character image, the process related to the insertion of the inserted character image is executed in steps S3512 to S3516.

Specifically, first, in step S3512, the insertion object for drawing the inserted image data IPD0 is grasped. The insertion object is composed of rectangular plate-shaped plate polygons. As already described, the plate polygon can be said to be an object having a small number of polygons, and is low-definition data configured in a plane shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction.

The insertion object is set corresponding to the inserted image data IPD0. Specifically, the size of the insertion object is set so that the size of the plate surface of the insertion object and the size of the insertion image data IPD0 are the same. As a result, the inserted image data IPD0 can be mapped to the insertion object without performing special processing such as compression, and the inserted character image can be displayed by the mapping.

Here, the inserted image data IPD0 is image data related to an image partially displayed on the display surface G. Therefore, the insertion object set corresponding to the inserted image data IPD0 is set smaller than the moving object used to display the image of the entire display surface G.

After grasping the insertion object, in steps S3513 to S3515, a process of grasping the image data (texture) to be mapped to the insertion object is executed. In this case, the image data to be mapped is different depending on how many rounds the current round moving image is.

Specifically, first, in step S3513, it is grasped how many rounds the current round production corresponds to. Specifically, the round counter RC is grasped.

Then, in step S3514, one image data corresponding to the round counter RC grasped in step S3513 is selected from the inserted image data IPD1 and IPD2. Specifically, when the round counter RC grasped in step S3513 is an odd number, the first inserted image data IPD1 corresponding to the first inserted character image IP1 is selected, and the round counter grasped in step S3513 is selected. When RC is an even number, the second inserted image data IPD2 corresponding to the second inserted character image IP2 is selected. Then, the address of the selected inserted image data is set.

After that, in step S3515, arithmetic processing of various parameters of the insertion object is executed. In this case, the coordinates of the insertion object are set so that the inserted character image is displayed in the center of the display surface G when converted to the world coordinate system, and is set before the moving object. ing.

After that, in step S3516, the image insertion designation information indicating that the inserted character image is to be displayed is set, and the present calculation process is terminated.

When the above calculation process is executed, moving image designation information is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806). In addition, a moving object is set in the drawing list, and various parameters applied to the moving object are set. In this case, the parameter includes the address of the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 as the image data (texture) mapped to the moving object.

Further, when the current arithmetic processing is the insertion timing of the inserted character image, the information for displaying the inserted character image corresponding to the current round effect, specifically, the insertion object and the insertion object. The applied parameters are set, and the image insertion specification information is set. In this case, the above parameter includes the address of the inserted image data corresponding to this round as the image data (texture) mapped to the insertion object.

If the inserted character image is being displayed, affirmative determination is made in step S3510, and in steps S3517 and S3518, a process of maintaining the display of the currently displayed inserted character image is executed. Specifically, in step S3517, the insertion object is grasped, and in step S3518, an operation for maintaining the parameters of the insertion object currently set is performed. In this case, the address of the inserted image data mapped to the insertion object is also maintained. Then, in step S3516, the image insertion designation information is set, and this calculation process is terminated.

When the above calculation process is executed, moving image designation information is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), and still image data corresponding to the current frame number is supported. Information for displaying the image is set.

When the inserted character image is being displayed, information for displaying the image corresponding to the inserted character image corresponding to this round is set in the drawing list.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing for the round effect, the arithmetic processing of the individual image for recognizing the number of rounds of the current round game may be executed. In this case, the player can easily confirm the round number of the current round game.

Further, during the open / close execution mode, the symbol calculation process (step S905) is configured to be skipped. As a result, since the variable display of the symbol is not displayed during the open / close execution mode, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the round moving image by the round moving image data RMD0, and to reduce the processing load in the open / close execution mode. be able to. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display of the symbol is performed during the open / close execution mode.

Further, the background setting process (step S903) is configured to be skipped during the reproduction of the round moving image. Even in this case, by pasting the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 to the moving object, the image related to the still image data is displayed over the entire display surface G. .. That is, the image related to the moving image display functions as a background image. As a result, the processing load can be reduced by the amount of the processing load related to the background setting process.

Next, the decoding process executed by the moving image decoder of VDP135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is started when any of the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. Further, the decoding process is started asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 16) executed by the VDP 135.

First, in step S3601, the address of the round moving image data RMD0 is grasped from the information of the address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S3602, the expansion destination area of the round moving image data RMD0 is grasped from the information of the expansion destination address specified in the drawing list.

In the following step S3603, the round moving image data RMD0 is read from the address grasped in step S3601, and the round moving image data RMD0 is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S3602. After that, the present decoding process is terminated.

By the way, the period required from the reception of the drawing list in which the decoding specification information is set to the creation of the still image data of the first frame of the round moving image is set to be smaller than the reception cycle (20 msec) of the drawing list. Has been done. As a result, from the time when the drawing list in which the decoding specification information is set is received to the time when the drawing list in which the address corresponding to the still image data in the first frame is set is received, the still image data in the first frame is stored. Has been created. Therefore, the situation that the still image data corresponding to the address does not exist does not occur.

The decoding process is configured to be started asynchronously with the drawing process, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to develop the still image data related to the new frame based on the completion of drawing using the still image data written in the predetermined area in the drawing process. In this case, since the still image data is sequentially expanded each time the decoded still image data is used, the area for writing the still image data is divided as compared with the configuration in which all the decoded still image data is expanded and saved at once. Can be reduced. Further, since the round moving image is reproduced while decoding, the time lag due to decoding can be reduced.

Next, the setting process for the round effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The setting process for the round effect is executed as a part of the setting process for the effect executed in step S1003 of the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, when the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the round effect is executed.

First, in step S3701, the moving object set in the drawing list is grasped, and in step S3702, various parameters applied to the moving object are grasped based on the drawing list.

After that, in step S3703, the setting process for the moving object in the world coordinate system is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3704.

In the following step S3704, it is determined whether or not the image insertion designation information is stored in the drawing list. If the image insertion designation information is not stored, the present setting process is terminated as it is, while if the image insertion designation information is stored, the insertion setting set in the drawing list this time in step S3705 is performed. The object is grasped, and the parameters applied to the insertion object are grasped based on the drawing list in step S3706. Then, in step S3707, the setting process for the insertion object is executed in the world coordinate system, and this setting process is terminated.

By executing the setting process as described above, the placement of the moving object and the insertion object is started at the same time in the world coordinate system. In this case, the insertion object is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the moving object.

Next, the mapping process for round effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The round effect mapping process is activated when a drawing list (drawing list in which moving image designation information is set) related to the round effect is created in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16). Will be done.

First, in step S3801, the information of the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S3802, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3801. In the following step S3803, the still image data grasped in step S3802 is mapped to the moving object. In this case, the coordinate value of the still image data is a UV coordinate value preset for the moving object, and the position where the still image data is attached to the moving object is uniquely determined.

After that, in step S3804, it is determined whether or not the image insertion designation information is set in the drawing list this time. If the image insertion specification information is not set, this process is terminated as it is, while if the image insertion specification information is set, the inserted character image set in the drawing list this time in step S3805. Grasp the information of the data address.

In step S3806, the inserted image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3805. After that, in step S3807, the inserted character image data grasped in step S3806 is mapped to the insertion object, and this process is terminated.

By executing the above processing, the round moving image related to the round moving image data RMD0 is reproduced on the display surface G. Further, when the image insertion designation information is set, the inserted character image is displayed so as to overlap with the round moving image.

Here, only the second background image BP2 is drawn in the round moving image, and each inserted character image is not set. Since the inserted character image corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed so as to overlap the second background image BP2, the inserted image data IPD0 is prepared as image data to be displayed on the entire display surface G. There is no need. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of inserted image data IPD0.

That is, when a part of the display surface G is changed, the data related to the common part (second background image BP2) is set as the moving image data, and the individual parts (each inserted character image IP1 and IP2) are related. By preparing the data separately, it is possible to reduce the amount of data as a whole.

Further, due to the characteristics of moving image data, it is necessary to set still image data for each continuous frame. By drawing the second background image BP2 using this essential still image data, the essential still image data can be suitably used, and the amount of data related to the round effect can be reduced.

Further, for example, when an attempt is made to overwrite the first inserted character image IP1 on an image in which the second inserted character image IP2 is drawn superimposed on the second background image BP2, the girl displayed in the center is erased. The area to be overwritten becomes large due to the need to draw the second background image BP2 for the area corresponding to the girl, or different α values are set between the area to be erased and the other areas. It may be necessary to separately provide the created α data. Therefore, the processing load may increase or the amount of data may increase. On the other hand, the above inconvenience is avoided by setting the still image data related to the second background image BP2 as the moving image data and preparing the image data related to the inserted character image to be changed separately from the moving image data. can do.

Since the plate surface of the moving object is a flat surface, the image related to the still image data is not curved. As a result, the image related to the still image data is displayed as it is.

Further, the moving object and the insertion object are configured to be projected in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image on the edge side of the display surface G from being curved due to the perspective.

Next, the state of the round effect will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a time chart showing the state of the round effect.

At the timing of t1, which is the start timing of the round effect, the first background image BP1 and the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Then, with the passage of time (update of the frame number), the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move in a predetermined direction. For example, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), a state in which the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move on the wave is displayed. Then, the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are framed out.

After that, the inserted character image is displayed with the second background image BP2 as the background at the timing of t3, which is the image insertion timing. In this case, when the round effect this time is the odd-numbered round, the first inserted character image IP1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (c-1). On the other hand, when the round effect this time is an even-numbered round, the second inserted character image IP2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (c-2).

After that, at the timing of t4, the third moving character image MP3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Then, after the third moving character image MP3 performs a predetermined operation, the round effect ends.

As described above, the configuration is such that the round video is played each time the round game is started, and the inserted character image corresponding to this round is inserted so as to overlap the image related to the round video during the playback of the round video. It is configured to execute the round effect to be displayed. As a result, since the moving images of a plurality of display modes can be visually recognized using the round moving image data RMD0 of 1, the memory module 133 is stored in comparison with the configuration in which the round moving image data RMD0 is prepared for each round. The amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

In particular, in the open / close execution mode, the same game, that is, a round game is repeatedly performed. In this case, if the same round effect is repeatedly executed in response to the repeated round game, the degree of attention to the round effect may decrease. However, if a different moving image is displayed for each round game, there is a concern that the amount of moving image data related to the moving image display will increase.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10, the inserted character image corresponding to this round is displayed during the playback of the round moving image, so that the same round moving image can be used as a variation of the round effect. Can be diversified.

Two types of inserted image data IPD0, the first inserted image data IPD1 and the second inserted image data IPD2, are prepared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the inserted image data may be prepared for the number of rounds. In this case, it is advisable to associate and set each inserted image data for each round. As a result, it is possible to diversify the round effect and grasp the round number of the current round game based on the image displayed based on the inserted image data.

Further, the inserted image data may be prepared in a larger number than the number of rounds, and the inserted image data of one of the plurality of inserted image data may be selected at the insertion timing of the inserted character image in each round. As a result, the randomness of the inserted character image to be inserted can be increased, and the degree of attention to the inserted character image can be increased.

Further, in the situation where the inserted character image is displayed, the parameter applied to the inserted image data IPD0 is not changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the applied parameter may be sequentially updated. In this case, if the α value is uniformly updated, the inserted character image can be faded in or faded out, and if the magnification information is updated, the inserted character image can be enlarged or reduced. It will be possible.

When the inserted character image is faded in or faded out, the blending process of the inserted character image and the image related to the moving image drawn on the back side of the inserted character image may be executed. As a result, the affinity between the inserted character image and the image related to the moving image can be enhanced, and the discomfort that may occur when the inserted character image and the image related to the moving image are displayed at the same time can be reduced.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the round moving image, and the present invention may be applied, for example, when performing super reach display or when performing normal reach display. In this case, the reach moving image data related to the reach moving image played during the super reach display is prepared, and a plurality of types of inserted image data of the inserted image inserted during the playing of the reach moving image are prepared. Then, the display CPU 131 executes a process of drawing one image data out of a plurality of types of inserted image data when performing super reach display, and sets the address of the drawn inserted image data in the data table. Then, when it is the insertion timing of the inserted image, the inserted image data this time is grasped based on the address of the inserted image data set in the data table, and drawing is performed based on the inserted image data. This makes it possible to perform a plurality of types of super reach display using one reach moving image data.

Further, in the above configuration, the round moving image is reproduced for each round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a series of movies that are reproduced over a plurality of rounds may be used. In this case, it is preferable to repeatedly play the above series of movies until the open / close execution mode ends. Even in this case, it is possible to recognize different movies by inserting different inserted character images in the middle of a series of movies.

When a series of movies are played over the plurality of rounds, the inserted character image may be displayed during the interval period between the rounds. This makes it possible for the player to preferably recognize that the movie is being played over a plurality of rounds during the interval period.

Further, although only the second background image BP2 is drawn in the reference data RMD3, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, both the first inserted character image IP1 and the second background image BP2 may be drawn. In this case, the coordinates of the second inserted image data IPD2 may be set so that the second inserted character image IP2 overlaps with the first inserted character image IP1. As a result, it is possible to display different round effects depending on whether the image is inserted or not. However, considering that the moving image data can be effectively used and that it is necessary to secure a large size of the image data in order to overwrite the image displayed on the back side, the reference data RMD3 includes the second. It is better to have a configuration in which only the background image BP2 is drawn.

Further, the configuration is such that the inserted character image is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and another insertion moving image may be reproduced from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, for example. In this case, it is advisable to decode the insertion moving image at a timing before the t3 timing so that the insertion moving image can be played back at the timing of t3. Further, the insertion moving image may be a moving image corresponding to a predetermined area on the display surface G, or may be a moving image of the entire display surface G.

In the above configuration, the inserted character image related to the round video is displayed during the playback of the series of round videos. It may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, the specific image may be displayed in a part of the period during which the round moving image is played, or may be displayed over the entire period during which the round moving image is played.

As the specific image, for example, a teaching image that can teach the player which round the current round is, a teaching image that can teach the number of times the round video has been played, or a display when a big hit is won. It may be a symbol image constituting a combination of jackpot symbols displayed on the surface G, an image corresponding to the symbol image, or the like.

In this case, for example, as a process related to the display of the teaching image, various image data for teaching (object for teaching and texture for teaching) are prepared separately from the round moving image, and the above is performed for the image related to the round moving image. A configuration in which a teaching image created by using an object for teaching and a texture for teaching is inserted and displayed, or a configuration in which a round moving image including a predetermined teaching image is prepared can be considered.

In a configuration in which a round moving image including the predetermined teaching image is prepared, when the content of the teaching image is changed, the change destination is changed so as to overlap with the predetermined teaching image included in the round moving image. Draw a teaching image. Specifically, the object for teaching to be changed is arranged so as to overlap the area where the predetermined teaching image is displayed. As a result, the teaching image of the change destination is overwritten on the predetermined teaching image included in the round moving image, and the teaching image of the change destination is displayed.

In such a configuration, when the inserted character image is inserted and displayed, the positional relationship between the insertion object and the teaching object is set so that the teaching image is not overwritten by the inserted character image. Specifically, in the world coordinate system, the coordinates of both are set so that the object for teaching is arranged on the side closer to the object for insertion than the object for insertion. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience that the teaching image is obscured by the inserted character image.

Further, the invention of image insertion may be applied to a configuration for performing two-dimensional display. Specifically, for example, the image data corresponding to the image to be inserted is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as sprite data, and various parameter information applied to the sprite data is stored. Then, the still image data created by decoding the moving image data may be written in the frame buffer 142, and the sprite data related to the image to be inserted into the frame buffer 142 may be written.

<Another form for round production>
A different form in the case of performing the round effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68.

In this different form, the configuration of the round moving image data RMD0 is different. The difference will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the round moving image data RMD0 in the present alternative mode.

In the present alternative mode, the round moving image data RMD0 is divided at the timing when the inserted character image is displayed, and in detail, from the start timing of the round moving image to the fading out of the moving character images MP1 and MP2. 1st round moving image data RMD0a corresponding to the 1st round moving image, and 2nd round moving image data RMD0b corresponding to the 2nd round moving image from the display of the 3rd moving character image MP3 to the end timing of the round moving image. It is divided into.

The compression mode of the first round moving image data RMD0a and the second round moving image data RMD0b will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a compression mode of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, and FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram and a diagram for explaining a compression mode of the first round moving image data RMD0a. 65 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the second round moving image data RMD0b, and FIG. 65 (c) is a graph for explaining the bit rate of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b.

As described above, the first round moving image data RMD0a and the second round moving image data RMD0b are encoded compressed data, and have reference data and difference data. In this case, even if the playback time of each round moving image is the same and the reference data included in each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b is the same, the first round moving image data RMD0a and The amount of data of the second round moving image data RMD0b may be different.

Specifically, when comparing the first round video and the second round video, the first round video has more characters to move than the second round video, so the first round video has more characters. The movement is more intense than the second round video, and it is complicated (high-definition). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 65 (a-1) and 65 (b-1), the difference data of the first round moving image data RMD0a is larger than the difference data of the second round moving image data RMD0b.

Here, the amount of data that can be allocated to the entire round moving image data RMD0 is predetermined, and it is necessary to adjust each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b so as to match the data amount. In this case, by adjusting the bit rates of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, it is possible to set a desired amount of data while maintaining the image quality of the entire round moving image.

Specifically, for those with little movement or relatively uncomplicated ones (low-definition ones), the image quality is unlikely to deteriorate even if the bit rate is lowered. On the other hand, if the bit rate is lowered for a moving object or a relatively complicated object, a large amount of block noise and mosquito noise are generated, and the image quality is greatly deteriorated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), a relatively large amount of data (FS1) is secured by allocating a relatively large bit rate to the first round moving image data RMD0a, and the first round is secured. Suppresses the deterioration of the image quality of round moving images. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (b-2), a relatively small amount of data (FS2) is secured by allocating a relatively small bit rate to the second round moving image data RMD0b, and the second round. It is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data RMD0b. As a result, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the image quality of a series of round moving images used in the round effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), by increasing the bit rate of the first round moving image data RMD0a and decreasing the bit rate of the second round moving image data RMD0b, each round moving image data RMD0a, Compared with the case where RMD0b is set at the same bit rate (see the dotted line in FIG. 65 (c)), the deterioration of the image quality of the round moving image is suppressed even though the total amount of data is the same. As a result, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the image quality of the round moving image while setting the round moving image data RMD0 to a desired amount of data.

Incidentally, to explain in detail the compression process at the stage of creating each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b, each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b is to be compressed a plurality of times (specifically, twice). Created by. Specifically, in the first compression process, the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 set in advance is grasped, and each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b are assigned so as to be the data amount. The data amounts FS1 and FS2 are grasped, and the bit rates corresponding to the respective data amounts FS1 and FS2 are grasped. Then, in the second compression process, the actual compression process is executed using the bit rate grasped in the first compression process. As a result, the round moving image data RMD0 is set to a preset amount of data.

Here, in the compression of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, the difference data is compressed by simplifying the difference data so that the data amount is based on the bit rate set individually, and the reference data is used as the reference data. It is not simplified. Since the reference data is the reference data for each difference data (P picture data and B picture data), if the image quality of the reference data deteriorates, the image quality of the entire round moving image due to the error due to the inter-frame compression is significantly deteriorated. Is.

Further, in the present different form, the inserted image data IPD0 is different. Specifically, the size of the inserted image data IPD0 in the present alternative mode is set so that the image related to the inserted image data IPD0 can be displayed on the entire display surface G. Then, in the inserted image data IPD0, the inserted image data in which the first inserted character image IP1 is drawn superimposed on the second background image BP2 and the second inserted character image IP2 are drawn superimposed on the second background image BP2. Inserted image data and are provided. That is, the inserted image data IPD0 of the present different form indicates one image itself displayed on the entire display surface G. In the following description, an image displayed using the inserted image data IPD0, that is, an image in which any of the inserted character images IP1 and IP2 is drawn on the second background image BP2 is also simply referred to as an inserted image.

In the present alternative mode, the divided round moving image data RMD0a and RMDb are sequentially decoded at predetermined intervals, and the first round moving image and the second round moving image are sequentially reproduced at predetermined intervals, and the said person concerned. Using the inserted image data IPD0 during the interval, a series of round moving images is reproduced by displaying an inserted image in which either the second background image BP2 and each of the inserted character images IP1 and IP2 are integrated. Let me.

Next, the arithmetic processing for the round effect in the present alternative mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the inserted character image is being displayed based on the currently set data table, specifically, the data table corresponding to the open / close execution mode. If the inserted character image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3902, and it is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the inserted character image based on the currently set data table. The display start timing of the inserted character image is predetermined in the data table corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and is specifically set to be the same as the end timing of the first round moving image.

If it is not the display start timing of the inserted character image, the process proceeds to step S3903, and it is determined whether or not the effect related to the round moving image is being executed based on the currently set data table. In this case, it is determined whether or not the production related to the first round moving image or the second round moving image is being executed.
If the effect related to the round moving image is not being executed, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not it is the reproduction start timing of the first round moving image. If it is not the playback start timing of the first round video, this calculation process is terminated as it is, while if it is the playback start timing of the first round video, the process of adding 1 to the round counter RC is executed in step S3905. Then, in step S3906 and step S3907, the process related to the decoding of the first round moving image data RMD0a is executed.

Specifically, in step S3906, the address where the first round moving image data RMD0a is stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the first round moving image data RMD0a are decoded and still image data for a plurality of frames. When you create, you need to know the address of the area where the still image data is stored.

Then, in step S3907, the decoding designation information of the first round moving image data RMD0a is set, and this calculation process is terminated.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), a drawing list in which the decoding designation information of the first round moving image data RMD0a is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135. The moving image recorder of the VDP 135 executes the decoding process of the first round moving image data RMD0a based on the reception of the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set. Since the decoding process is as described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect related to the round moving image is being executed, the process of setting the still image data corresponding to the round moving image as the drawing target is executed in steps S3908 to S3910. In this case, when the decoded round moving image data RMD0 is the first round moving image data RMD0a, the still image data related to the first round moving image is set as the drawing target, while the decoded round moving image is set. When the image data RMD0 is the second round moving image data RMD0b, the still image data related to the second round moving image is set as the drawing target. Since the specific configuration of the process has already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in step S3911, the round effect designation information for specifying the execution of the round effect by the VDP 135 is set, and the present calculation process is terminated.

When the above calculation process is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), the moving object is set as the drawing target, and various parameters applied to the moving object are set. The various parameters include the address of the still image data as the image data mapped to the moving object.

On the other hand, when it is the display start timing of the inserted character image (step S3902: YES), the process of setting the inserted character image as a drawing target is executed in steps S3912 to S3915.

Here, the size of the insertion object of this different form is set corresponding to the size of the inserted image data IPD0. Specifically, the size of the insertion object is set so as to be the same as the size of the inserted image data IPD0. That is, in this different form, the insertion object and the moving object are the same.

Since the specific processing configurations of steps S3912 to S3915 have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processes of steps S3912 to S3915, the round effect designation information is set in step S3911, and the present calculation process is terminated.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, the insertion object is set as a drawing target and various parameters applied to the insertion object are set in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806). The various parameters include the address of the inserted image data corresponding to the current round game as the image data mapped to the insertion object.

Here, the size of the insertion object corresponds to the entire display surface G, and the size of the inserted image data IPD0 mapped to the insertion object is set to correspond to the entire display surface G. There is. The second background image BP2 is drawn in advance on the inserted image data IPD0 in the present different form. As a result, in the present different form, the inserted image functions as a background image. That is, it can be said that the inserted image is one image in which the background image and the character image are combined in the present different form. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the entire display surface G even in a situation where the round moving image is not reproduced.

When the inserted character image is being displayed (step S3901: YES), the process proceeds to step S3916, and it is determined whether or not it is the playback start timing of the second round moving image based on the currently set data table. The reproduction start timing of the second round moving image is set to the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the display start timing of the inserted image (the end timing of the first round moving image).

If it is not the playback start timing of the second round moving image, the process for maintaining the display of the inserted image is executed in step S3917 and step S3918, the round effect designation information is set in step S3911, and this calculation process is performed. To finish. Since these processes have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is the reproduction start timing of the second round moving image, the process for reproducing the second round moving image is executed in step S3919 and step S3920. Specifically, in step S3919, the address in which the second round moving image data RMD0b is stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the second round moving image data RMD0b are decoded and still images for a plurality of frames are decoded. When the data is created, the address of the area where the still image data is stored and the address are grasped.

Then, in step S3920, the decoding designation information of the second round moving image data RMD0b is set, and this calculation process is terminated.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), a drawing list in which the decoding designation information of the second round moving image data RMD0b is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135. The moving image recorder of the VDP 135 executes the decoding process of the second round moving image data RMD0b based on the reception of the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set.

According to this process, when the first round moving image or the second round moving image is being played, a drawing list in which the moving object is set as a drawing target is created, while the end timing of the first round moving image is set. During the period between the start timing of the second round moving image, a drawing list in which the insertion object is set as the drawing target is created. In this case, both the moving object and the insertion object are not set in the drawing list of 1.

Incidentally, with respect to the processing times in which the processing in step S3919 and step S3920 is executed, the processing in steps S3908 to S3911 is executed after the next processing time. As a result, the still image data related to the second round moving image is set as the image data mapped to the moving object.

As described above, in the arithmetic processing for round effect, the drawing target of this time is set for each processing. As a result, the drawing list is set for each processing, and the VDP135 executes the drawing processing so that the image is updated for each processing. That is, the image is updated for each frame, and the frame rate is set to be the same for the period during which the round moving image is reproduced.

Next, the setting process for the round effect in the present alternative mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67 (a). The setting process for the round effect in the present alternative mode is configured to be activated when the round effect designation information is set in the received drawing list.

First, in step S4001, the object to be drawn is grasped. Specifically, when the first round moving image or the second round moving image is being played, the moving object is grasped. On the other hand, when the period is between the end timing of the first round moving image and the start timing of the second round moving image, the insertion object is grasped.

After that, in step S4002, the parameters applied to the object to be drawn are grasped based on the drawing list. After that, in step S4003, the setting process for the moving object grasped in step S4001 is executed in the world coordinate system, and this setting process is terminated.

Next, the mapping process for round effect of this different form will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67 (b).

First, in step S4101, among the parameters applied to the object to be drawn, the address of the image data (texture) to be mapped is grasped. In this case, if the video object is set in the drawing list, the address of the still image data corresponding to the frame number is grasped, while if the insertion object is set in the drawing list, this time. Grasp the address of the inserted image data IPD0 corresponding to the round game.

In the following step S4102, the image data (texture) to be mapped is grasped based on the address grasped in the step S4101. Then, in step S4103, the image data grasped in step S4102 is mapped to the object to be drawn, and this mapping process is terminated.

Next, the execution mode of the round effect in the present alternative mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 68 (a) is a time chart showing the playback period of the first round moving image, FIG. 68 (b) is a time chart showing the display period of the inserted image, and FIG. 68 (c) is a time showing the playing period of the second round moving image. It is a chart.

First, as shown in FIG. 68A, the reproduction of the first round moving image is started on the display surface G at the timing of t11, which is the start timing of the round game. Then, when the first round moving image is completed at the timing of t12, as shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), the display surface G relates to the inserted image data IPD0 instead of the first round moving image. The inserted image is displayed. Specifically, the first inserted character image IP1 or the second inserted character image IP2 is displayed so as to overlap the second background image BP2.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 68 (b) and 68 (c), the second round moving image is started in place of the inserted image at the timing of t13, and the second round moving image is ended at the timing of t14. As a result, a series of round effects in which images are displayed in the order of the first round moving image → the inserted image → the second round moving image is performed on the display surface G.

Then, at the timing of t15, which is the start timing of the next round game, the first round moving image is sequentially reproduced.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the round moving image data RMD0 relating to a series of round moving images is divided into a plurality of unit data (first round moving image data RMD0a and) according to the intensity of movement in the round moving image. The second round moving image data RMD0b) was divided. Then, by adjusting the bit rate for each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, it is possible to efficiently adjust the image quality while setting the round moving image data RMD0 to a predetermined amount of data.

Specifically, the bit rate is relatively high for the first round moving image data RMD0a, which is assumed that the difference data tends to be relatively large due to the relatively intense movement in the first round moving image. By performing the encoding process with, the image quality of the first round moving image can be maintained. On the other hand, the bit rate is relatively low for the second round moving image data RMD0b, which is assumed that the difference data tends to be relatively small due to the relatively gentle movement in the second round moving image. By performing the encoding process with, it is possible to reduce the amount of data of the second round moving image data RMD0b while maintaining the image quality.

In particular, focusing on the point of suppressing the amount of data of the round moving image data RMD0, it is conceivable to suppress the frame rate of the round moving image, specifically, the update timing of the image. However, if the configuration is such that the frame rate is changed, a separate process for changing the frame rate such as a process for grasping the current frame rate is required, which increases the processing load and the program capacity related to the above process. There is concern about the conversion.

On the other hand, according to the present alternative mode, it is possible to suppress the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 without executing the process related to the change of the frame rate. That is, the reduction in the amount of data is realized by a compression mode rather than a configuration that compensates by processing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of round moving image data RMD0 while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the data amount of the moving image data subjected to the encoding process depends on the bit rate regardless of the data amount of the difference data. That is, the encoder secures the amount of data corresponding to the bit rate as the data of the moving image data regardless of the amount of the difference data. In this case, when encoding processing is performed at a relatively high bit rate for a video that is expected to have small difference data, it is necessary to secure a useless amount of data in which no data is actually stored. Therefore, the amount of data is wasted. On the other hand, according to the present alternative mode, it is possible to suppress the generation of the above-mentioned useless data, so that the amount of data can be reduced.

Further, the inserted image is displayed between the first round moving image and the second round moving image, and the inserted image is made different according to the round related to the current round effect. As a result, it is possible to perform a plurality of round effects by using the round moving image data RMD0 of 1. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data while suitably performing a plurality of round effects.

Further, since the timing of decoding the first round moving image data RMD0a and the timing of decoding the second round moving image data RMD0b are different, the processing load related to the decoding for reproducing the round moving image is distributed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing omissions due to a local increase in processing load.

In this different form, the intensity and complexity of the movement are different due to the switching of scenes in the round movie, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the switching of scenes and the intensity of movement are different. , It may be configured not to synchronize. In this case, the moving image data may be divided for each scene change. As a result, by preparing a plurality of unit moving image data for each scene and combining these unit moving image data, it is possible to diversify a series of round moving images. Further, the amount of data related to the moving image data can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which a series of moving image data is prepared for each combination. However, from the viewpoint that the bit rate can be suitably assigned, the configuration in which the round moving image data RMD0 is divided based on the intensity of movement or the like is preferable.

Further, although one round moving image is divided into two moving image data, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that it is divided into three or more moving image data. However, due to the characteristics of the moving image data, it is necessary that the reference data that serves as the reference for the difference data is provided in the moving image data of 1. The reference data is not subject to compression, or even if it is compressed, the compression ratio is smaller than that of the differential data. Therefore, the total amount of round moving image data RMD0 may increase. Therefore, the relationship between the increase in the reference data due to the division of one round moving image data RMD0 into a plurality of moving image data and the reduction in the total data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 by adjusting the bit rate. In consideration of this, it is advisable to determine the division mode of the moving image data. Specifically, when the amount of increase in the amount of data due to the increase in the reference data that can occur due to the division is smaller than the amount of reduction in the amount of data that can be secured by adjusting the bit rate of the divided moving image data, the moving image When the data is divided and the increase amount is larger than the reduction amount, it is preferable to treat the data as one moving image data without dividing the data.

Further, although it is assumed that the data amounts of the reference data are the same for each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, the data amount is not limited to this, and different configurations may be used. Further, although it is assumed that the reproduction time of each round moving image reproduced by each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b is the same, the reproduction time is not limited to this, and different configurations may be used. Even in these cases, the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 can be suitably adjusted by adjusting the bit rate of each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b.

Further, although a predetermined period is provided between the first round video and the second round video, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first round video and the second round video may be continuously displayed. good. In this case, the inserted image may not be displayed, or the inserted image may be displayed in the first round moving image, in the second round moving image, or across each round moving image.

<Structure for displaying a sandy beach background image and configuration for performing a sandy beach sprinting effect>
Next, a configuration for displaying the sandy beach background and a configuration for performing the sandy beach sprinting effect will be described.

The sandy beach background image is an image when the sea is viewed from the sandy beach, and is an image showing how waves are rushing to the sandy beach at a predetermined cycle. The sandy beach background image is used as a background image when the variable display of the pattern is performed.

The sandy beach sprinting effect is an effect that can be executed when a round game is performed in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the sandy beach sprinting effect is an effect executed when the sandy beach sprinting effect is won in the effect lottery process executed when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The sandy beach sprinting effect is a production in which multiple symbol images sprint on the sandy beach. In the production, the landscape drawn on the sandy beach background image is used as a background image when the landscape is viewed from another angle, more specifically, the landscape from a low angle.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, perspective projection and parallel projection are set as projection patterns, and these projection patterns are used properly according to the content of the image to be displayed. Perspective projection refers to projecting each object placed in the world coordinate system in a state of being viewed from a predetermined viewpoint. Specifically, the vertices of each polygon of each object are linearly directed toward a predetermined viewpoint. Projecting to move. As a result, the image related to each object is displayed so as to change according to the distance from the viewpoint.

On the other hand, parallel projection means projecting each object as it is seen from the screen area PC12, and specifically, the vertices of each polygon of each object move perpendicularly to the screen area PC12. It means to project like this. As a result, each image of each object is always displayed in a constant size regardless of the distance from a predetermined viewpoint. The proper use of these projection patterns will be described later.

When displaying the sandy beach background image, a plurality of objects and a plurality of textures set corresponding to each of the objects are used.

A plurality of objects used for displaying a sandy beach background image will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each object OB1 to OB4.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the world coordinate system will be used as a reference, and the viewpoint will be oriented in the + Z direction.

As shown in FIG. 69A, as objects related to the display of the beach background image, the sandy beach object OB1 used for displaying the sandy beach, the wave object OB2 used for displaying the waves, and the sea are displayed. The sea object OB3 used for and the empty object OB4 used for displaying the sky are set. Each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is composed of rectangular plate polygons, and the size in the longitudinal direction thereof is set to be larger than the size in the longitudinal direction of the screen area PC12.

Each object OB1 to OB4 is arranged so as to be an image of the sea seen from a sandy beach when perspectively projected from a specific viewpoint PV1. Specifically, each object is arranged in the order of the sandy beach object OB1, the wave object OB2, the sea object OB3, and the empty object OB4 in the depth direction (+ Z direction) when viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 in the world coordinate system. The coordinates of OB1 to OB4 are set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the sandy beach object OB1, the wave object OB2, and the sea object OB3 are arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the screen area PC12 (projective plane). This makes it possible to give a sense of perspective (a sense of depth) to each individual image displayed by each of the objects OB1 to OB3 when perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1.

Further, some of the adjacent objects are arranged so as to overlap and overlap each other, and the objects OB1 to OB3 are continuous. Specifically, the front end of the wave object OB2 overlaps the back end of the sandy beach object OB1, and the front end of the sea object OB3 is the back end of the wave object OB2. It overlaps on top. In this case, since the wave object OB2 overlaps with the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3, the continuity between the objects OB1 to OB3 is ensured even if the wave object OB2 moves in the inclined direction. ..

The empty object OB4 is arranged so as to be continuous from the end on the inner side of the sea object OB3. The empty object OB4 is arranged upright in the + Y direction.

A plurality of textures TD1 to TD4 are provided corresponding to each object OB1 to OB4. Each of these textures TD1 to TD4 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each texture TD1 to TD4. In addition, due to the relationship with the drawings, a part of the textures TD1 to TD4 is shown. The two-dot chain line indicates the projection area.

As shown in FIG. 70, each texture TD1 to TD4 is set as rectangular image data corresponding to each object OB1 to OB4. An image corresponding to the object to be pasted is drawn on each texture TD1 to TD4, and specifically, a sandy beach texture TD1 on which a sandy beach is drawn is provided as a texture corresponding to the sandy beach object OB1. A wave texture TD2 with waves drawn is provided as a texture corresponding to the wave object OB2, and a sea texture TD3 with a sea drawn is provided as a texture corresponding to the sea object OB3, which corresponds to the sky object OB4. An empty texture TD4 in which the sky is drawn is provided as a texture.

Here, each texture TD1 to TD4 is set so as to be a sandy beach background image having a sense of depth when each object OB1 to OB3 is viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1. Specifically, the image data corresponding to the image actually viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 and to which a predetermined perspective is applied as a whole (creating a perspective) is set as each texture TD1 to TD4. There is. In this case, the textures TD1 to TD4 correspond to the distance between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 to OB4 so that the perspectives (perspectives) between the individual images displayed by the objects OB1 to OB4 match. Is set. As a result, when each object OB1 to OB4 is perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1 in a situation where the objects OB1 to OB4 are continuously arranged, a sandy beach background image with a sense of depth with a consistent perspective is generated. Will be done.

As described above, the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged at an angle with respect to the screen area PC12 (YZ plane) while being continuous, and the specific viewpoint PV1 is used as the textures TD1 to TD4 to be attached to the objects OB1 to OB4. A sandy beach with a sense of depth using plate polygons by using image data that is consistent with the perspectives between each individual image so that a predetermined perspective is applied as a whole. You can create a background image. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize a realistic image with a relatively small processing load and data amount.

Incidentally, in the perspective related to each individual image, the distance between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 to OB4 is more dominant than the image data of the textures TD1 to TD4. That is, the perspective related to each individual image changes greatly with the change in the distance.

Next, the sandy beach sprinting effect will be described.

The sandy beach sprinting effect is an effect in which a plurality of symbol images are displayed as if they are running on the sandy beach in a predetermined direction over a plurality of continuous frames. In this effect, the objects OB1 to OB4 and the textures TD1 to TD4 used to display the sandy beach background image are used.

Here, the background image used in the sandy beach sprinting effect (hereinafter referred to as a production background image to distinguish it from the sandy beach background image) has a different viewpoint from the sandy beach background image. Therefore, if the textures TD1 to TD4 determined based on the specific viewpoint PV1 are used, the perspective becomes inconsistent and the image becomes uncomfortable.

This phenomenon will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change in perspective. For convenience of explanation, the wave object OB2 and the sky object OB4 are omitted, and the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are described in succession.

As described above, since the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are inclined with respect to the screen area PC12, the distance between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 and OB3 differs depending on the parts of the objects OB1 and OB3. ing. Specifically, the distance R1 from the specific viewpoint PV1 to the front end of the sandy beach object OB1, the distance R2 from the specific viewpoint PV1 to the front end of the sea object OB3, and the back of the sea object OB3 from the specific viewpoint PV1. The distance to the end on the side is increased in the order of R3 (R1 <R2 <R3). In such a situation, by performing perspective projection with the specific viewpoint PV1 as a viewpoint, an image with a perspective corresponding to each distance R1 to R3 can be obtained.

In this case, the degree of perspective engagement depends on the ratio of each distance R1 to R3. Specifically, the higher the ratio of the distance R2 to the distance R1, the greater the perspective of the sandy beach object OB1. The higher the ratio of the distance R3 to the distance R2, the greater the perspective of the sea object OB3.

Further, the textures TD1 and TD3 attached to the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are perspectives (perspective) between each individual image displayed by each object OB1 and OB3 (actually including the wave object OB2). ) Is set in consideration of the above ratio. This makes it possible to display an image with consistent perspective.

Here, when the viewpoint is moved from the specific viewpoint PV1 in the −Y direction and set to another viewpoint PV2, the distances R1 to R3 change to the distances R1 ′ to R3 ′, respectively, and the above ratio changes. As a result, the degree of perspective applied when perspectively projected is different. Then, when the textures TD1 and TD3 set according to the distances R1 to R3 are used, the perspective consistency between the objects OB1 and OB3 cannot be obtained. As a result, the image becomes uncomfortable as a whole.

In particular, when the images are updated by moving the objects OB1 and OB3 in a predetermined direction, a sense of discomfort due to the different perspectives of the images related to the objects OB1 and OB3 is likely to be noticeable. Specifically, the sea displayed on the back side moves faster than the sandy beach displayed on the front side.

Further, if the angle of view is changed from the viewpoint, the degree of application of the perspective will be different, so that the deviation of the perspective becomes conspicuous.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when creating a background image for production, parallel projection is performed instead of perspective projection, and the sizes of the objects OB1 and OB3 are set according to the distance in the depth direction. It was configured to be adjusted. These configurations will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each object OB1 and OB3 when creating a background image for effect.

As already described, the parallel projection is a method of projecting so that the vertices of each polygon of each object move linearly perpendicular to the screen area PC12. When the parallel projection is performed, an image that does not depend on the distance from the viewpoint, that is, an image without a sense of perspective is displayed.

Specifically, when the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are projected in parallel, both of them correspond to the distance from the viewpoint even though the sea object OB3 is located behind the sandy beach object OB1 in the screen area PC12. It is displayed without any size adjustment. As a result, the perspective gap that may occur between the two is reduced.

In particular, the perspective related to each individual image is dominated by the perspective based on the viewpoint and the distance between each object OB1 and OB3 rather than the perspective related to each texture TD1 and TD3. The deviation of the perspective based on it is easily noticeable.

On the other hand, by performing parallel projection, the perspective itself based on the above distance is not added, so that it is possible to reduce the deviation of the perspective.

In this case, the perspective based on each texture TD1 and TD3 is reflected, but the deviation of the perspective is less noticeable than the deviation of the perspective based on the above distance. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that the process of eliminating the perspective of each texture TD1 and TD3 may be executed. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize an image with a more consistent perspective.

Specifically, for example, in each texture TD1 and TD3, it is preferable to execute a correction process in which the area mapped to the front side is reduced in the horizontal direction (X direction), and the area mapped to the back side is enlarged in the horizontal direction. Further, for example, each object OB1 and OB3 may be a trapezoidal object having a long side on the front side and a short side on the back side, and a texture may be mapped to the trapezoidal object.

When parallel projection is performed, the sea, which should look smaller than the beach because it is originally located farther than the beach, is displayed without size adjustment, resulting in an image without a sense of depth. In other words, since the ratio of the size between the sandy beach and the sea does not correspond to the distance from the viewpoint, the image has no sense of depth.

On the other hand, the magnification of each object OB1 and OB3 is set so that the ratio corresponds to the distance from the viewpoint. Specifically, the size of each object OB1 and OB3 is set so that the size of each object OB1 and OB3 gradually decreases as the distance from the viewpoint increases.

More specifically, when the sandy beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are perspectively projected from the changed viewpoint, a sandy beach image which is an image related to the sandy beach object OB1 is displayed in the area A shown in FIG. 72. Then, a sea image, which is an image related to the sea object OB3, is displayed in the area B shown in FIG. 72. The ratio of the sizes of each of the above regions A and B depends on the distance from the viewpoint.

The size and coordinates (specifically, Y coordinates) of each object OB1 and OB3 are such that the area where the image related to each object OB1 and OB3 is displayed is the same as each of the above areas A and B when projected in parallel. Is set to. As a result, a background image for effect with a pseudo perspective is displayed.

For convenience of explanation, the wave object OB2 has been omitted, but the same applies to the situation where the wave object OB2 is set.

A specific processing configuration related to each of the above image displays will be described below.

First, the arithmetic processing for the sandy beach background will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. The sandy beach background arithmetic processing is performed in the background arithmetic processing (step S903) in the task processing (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131 when the currently set data table corresponds to the display of the sandy beach background image. Will be executed.

In step S4201, each object OB1 to OB4 required to display the sandy beach background image is grasped.

After that, in step S4202, the coordinates and angles of the objects OB1 to OB4 are updated. Specifically, when arranged in the world coordinate system, the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged continuously in the depth direction (direction away from the specific viewpoint PV1), and the objects OB1 to OB4 excluding the empty object OB4 are arranged. Each coordinate is set so as to be tilted at a predetermined angle with respect to the screen area PC12.

In the following step S4203, the address setting process of each texture is executed. Specifically, the address of each texture TD1 to TD4 to be pasted to each object OB1 to OB4 is set. After that, in step S4204, an arithmetic process for updating other parameters is performed.

In the following step S4205, the perspective projection designation information which is the information for specifying the perspective projection of each object OB1 to OB4 is set. Then, in step S4206, other background objects are grasped, in step S4207, arithmetic processing related to updating the parameters of the other background objects is performed, and the main sandy beach background arithmetic processing is completed.

When such processing is performed, in the drawing list output processing (step S806) performed thereafter, each object OB1 to OB4 is set as a drawing target, and various parameters applied to each of the objects OB1 to OB4 are set. A drawing list with is set is created. Further, perspective projection designation information is set in the drawing list. When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list, the VDP 135 arranges the objects OB1 to OB4 so that the objects OB1 to OB4 have the positional relationship as described above, and performs perspective projection. This creates an image with a sense of perspective.

Next, the calculation process for the background of the sandy beach sprinting effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74 (a). The background calculation process for the sandy beach sprinting effect is executed in the background calculation process in step S903 in the task process (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131 when the currently set data table corresponds to the sandy beach sprinting effect. Will be done.

First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the sandy beach sprinting effect is in progress based on the currently set data table.

If the beach sprinting effect is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S4302 to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect.

If it is not the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect, this calculation process is terminated as it is, while if it is the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect, the initial setting for drawing the background image for the effect in steps S4303 to S4308. Execute the process.

Specifically, first, in step S4303, a process of grasping each object OB1 to OB4 is executed.

Then, in step S4304, a process of adjusting the coordinates of each object OB1 to OB4 is executed, and further, in step S4305, a process of adjusting the magnification applied to each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed. Specifically, the coordinates and the magnification corresponding to the background image for production are set for each of the objects OB1 to OB4. Specifically, when each object OB1 to OB4 is projected in parallel, perspective projection is performed from another viewpoint PV2 in the coordinate system of each object OB1 to OB4 when the parallel projected area displays a sandy beach background image. The coordinates and magnification of each object OB1 to OB4 are set so as to overlap with the projection area of the case.

After that, another viewpoint PV2 is set as a viewpoint in step S4306, and arithmetic processing related to the initial setting of other parameters is executed in step S4307. Then, in step S4308, the parallel projection designation information is set. The parallel projection designation information is information for instructing the parallel projection of each object OB1 to OB4 in VDP135.

After that, in step S4309, other background objects are grasped, and in step S4310, various parameters applied to the other background objects are updated, and the calculation process is executed to end the calculation process. ..

When such a process is performed, each object OB1 to OB4 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), and each object OB1 to OB4 is set. Various parameters to be applied are set. The various parameters correspond to the case where the objects OB1 to OB4 are projected in parallel.

Further, parallel projection designation information is set in the drawing list. When the VDP135 receives the drawing list, the VDP135 grasps each object OB1 to OB4, applies a parameter corresponding to the parallel projection to each object OB1 to OB4, and parallelizes with reference to another viewpoint PV2. Make a projection. As a result, a background image for directing is created from a viewpoint (another viewpoint PV2) different from the viewpoint (specific viewpoint PV1) of the sandy beach background image.

When the sandy beach sprinting effect is in progress, the process for scrolling the background image for effect is executed in steps S4311 to S4314. Specifically, first, in step S4311, each object OB1 to OB4 is grasped.

In the following step S4312, a process of updating the position of the viewpoint is executed. Specifically, the process of displacing the first displacement amount in the −X direction from the currently set viewpoint is executed.

After that, in step S4313, an arithmetic process for updating the parameters applied to the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed. Specifically, each object OB1 to OB4 is moved in the −X direction by a predetermined displacement amount from the current coordinates. The predetermined displacement amount is set according to the distance between each object OB1 to OB4 and the viewpoint within a range smaller than the displacement amount of the viewpoint in the −X direction.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 74 (b), as the distance between the viewpoint and the objects OB1 to OB4 in the Z direction increases, the relative speed of the objects OB1 to OB4 with respect to the viewpoint decreases. , The displacement amount of each object OB1 to OB4 is set. Specifically, as the distance between the viewpoint and the distance between the objects OB1 to OB4 in the Z direction increases, the difference between the displacement amount of each object OB1 to OB4 and the first displacement amount becomes smaller. The amount of displacement is set. As a result, the object placed closer to the viewpoint appears to move faster in the + X direction, and the object placed closer to the viewpoint appears to move slower in the + X direction. Therefore, it is possible to express a pseudo perspective.

Further, for the wave object OB2, not only the displacement in the −X direction but also the Y coordinate and the Z coordinate are updated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the Y coordinate and the Z coordinate are set so that the wave object OB2 advances toward the front side while maintaining the inclination angle. This makes it possible to express how the waves are rushing toward you.

That is, the wave object OB2 is arranged so as to overlap with the sandy beach object OB1 (specifically, shifted in the Z direction), and the wave object OB2 is displaced relative to the sandy beach object OB1. As a result, the waves will be displayed so as to overlap the sandy beach.

Then, when the displacement amount of the wave object OB2 from the initial position becomes a specific amount in advance, the coordinates are maintained and the process of uniformly updating the α value so that the wave object OB2 gradually disappears is executed. .. Then, based on the fact that the uniform α value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the α value of complete transmission), the wave object OB2 is arranged at the initial position again and a series of processes are executed. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly show how the waves hit and disappear, and it is possible to realize realistic waves.

After that, the parallel projection designation information is set in step S4314, the processes of steps S4309 and S4310 are executed, and this calculation process is terminated.

When such a process is executed, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 required to display the background image is set as a drawing target in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and each of them. Parameter information applied to objects OB1 to OB4 is set. The various parameters are set so that the viewpoint moves in the −X direction, and the relative speeds of the objects OB1 to OB4 decrease as the distance between the viewpoint and the objects OB1 to OB4 increases. The displacement amount of the coordinates of is set. As a result, the background image for effect is displayed so as to scroll in the + X direction.

When the area to be projected becomes the area on the end side of each object OB1 to OB4 due to the movement of the viewpoint, the viewpoint of each object OB1 to OB4 currently to be projected is displayed. It is configured to continuously set the same objects OB1 to OB4 on the front side in the traveling direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the background image for production is interrupted due to the viewpoint moving at a speed faster than that of each object OB1 to OB4.

Further, it is preferable that both ends corresponding to the moving direction of the viewpoint in each texture TD1 to TD4, specifically, both ends in the X direction are set so that the drawn pattern is continuous. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the breaks in the object, and it is difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, the arithmetic processing for the production of the sandy beach sprinting effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75. The operation calculation process for the effect of the sandy beach sprinting effect is executed in the effect calculation process (step S904) in the task process (FIG. 14) when the currently set data table corresponds to the sandy beach sprinting effect. It is a process.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the sandy beach sprinting effect is in progress based on the currently set data table.

If the sandy beach sprinting effect is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect based on the currently set data table.

If it is not the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, while if it is the start timing of the sandy beach sprinting effect, the process proceeds to step S4403 to grasp the symbol object to be sprinted. Then, in step S4404, the arithmetic processing related to the initial setting of various parameter information applied to the symbol object is executed. In this case, when the symbol object is projected in parallel, the coordinates of the symbol object are set so that the image related to the symbol object overlaps the sandy beach image. Specifically, a symbol object is placed between the sandy beach object OB1 and the screen area PC12.

After that, in step S4405, the teaching object to be drawn this time is grasped. As already explained, the teaching object is an object used when displaying an image that enables the player to be taught the game situation, and in detail, teaches which round the current round is. An object for performing the operation and an object for indicating the number of times the open / close execution mode is continuously performed are set. In step S4405, these teaching objects are grasped.

Then, in step S4406, the arithmetic processing related to the initial setting of various parameter information applied to the object for teaching is executed. In this case, the coordinates of the teaching object are set so that the teaching object is arranged on the viewpoint side of the objects OB1 to OB4 used to generate the effect background image. Then, this arithmetic processing is terminated.

When such a process is executed, a symbol object and an object for teaching are set as drawing targets in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), and for these objects. The applicable parameters are set. These objects are arranged on the viewpoint side of the objects OB1 to OB4 used to generate the background image for effect. As a result, parallel projection is performed on each of the above objects, so that the design image and the teaching image are displayed so as to overlap the background image for production.

When the sandy beach sprinting effect is in progress, the process of grasping the symbol object to be sprinted is executed in step S4407. Then, in step S4408, an arithmetic process for updating the parameters applied to the symbol object is executed. Specifically, the coordinates of the symbol object are updated so that the symbol object moves with the movement of the viewpoint in the −X direction. In this case, the displacement amount of the viewpoint and the displacement amount of the symbol object are set to be the same. As a result, the movement of the viewpoint and the movement of the symbol object can be synchronized, and the viewpoint can be made to appear to follow as the symbol image moves.

In the following steps S4409 and S4410, the object for teaching is updated according to the movement of the viewpoint. Specifically, first, the object for teaching is grasped in step S4409. Then, in step S4410, an arithmetic process for updating the parameters applied to the teaching object is executed. Specifically, the coordinates of the teaching object are updated so that the teaching object moves with the movement of the viewpoint in the −X direction. In this case, the displacement amount of the viewpoint and the displacement amount of the object for teaching are set to be the same. As a result, the movement of the viewpoint and the movement of the teaching object can be synchronized, and the teaching image can be always displayed.

In the above processing, for convenience, the processing of steps S4403 to S4406 and the processing of steps S4407 to S4410 are displayed separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these processes may be shared. In this case, the image data to be set at each update timing is set in advance on the data table, and each time the update timing is reached, the various image data corresponding to the update timing is appropriately read out, and the setting process related to drawing is performed. It may be configured to be performed.

Next, the sandy beach background image and the state of the sandy beach sprinting effect will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface G on which a sandy beach background image is displayed, and FIG. 76 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of a sandy beach sprinting effect.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the sandy beach background image BP10 displays the first sand image BP11, the first wave image BP12, the first sea image BP13, and the first sky image BP14 in order from the front side. .. The sandy beach background image BP10 is an image with a sense of perspective. Specifically, for example, in the first sea image BP13, the wave interval and the wave width become smaller as it approaches the inner side (horizontal line).

In the sandy beach sprinting effect, as shown in FIG. 76B, the second sand image BP21, the second wave image BP22, the second sea image BP23, and the second sky image BP24 are displayed in order from the front side. A background image BP20 for directing, which has a different viewpoint from the sandy beach background image BP10, is displayed. In this case, the second sand image BP21 → the second wave image BP22 → the second sea image BP23 → the second sky image BP24 are displayed in smaller order, so that the image has a sense of perspective.

Then, the symbol images CP1 to CP3 and the teaching images CP4 and CP5 are displayed so as to overlap with the effect background image BP20. Then, by moving the background image BP20 for production to the right, which is the direction corresponding to the + X direction, the symbol images CP1 to CP3 appear to move toward the left, which is the direction corresponding to the −X direction. .. In this case, the moving speed becomes slower in the order of the second sand image BP21 → the second wave image BP22 → the second sea image BP23 → the second sky image BP24. As a result, the ones on the far side (farther from the viewpoint) seem to move more slowly, creating a sense of perspective.

As described above, the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged side by side in the depth direction, and the textures to be attached to the objects OB1 to OB4 are prepared to correspond to the image when viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1. In the configuration in which the sandy beach background image BP10 is displayed by perspective projection, when displaying the production background image BP20 based on another viewpoint PV2 different from the specific viewpoint PV1, each object OB1 to OB4 is projected in parallel. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the perspective consistency due to the change of the viewpoint while trying to standardize the textures used. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in that the texture can be standardized.

In particular, by arranging the objects OB1 to OB4 composed of plate polygons, which are relatively simple objects, at an angle with respect to the projection plane and performing perspective projection of each of these objects OB1 to OB4, a relatively small processing load is applied. It is possible to generate a sandy beach background image BP10 with a perspective applied by. On the other hand, when the viewpoints are different, the deviation of the perspective based on the perspective projection becomes more noticeable.

On the other hand, when the production background image BP20 having a different viewpoint is generated, the occurrence of the above-mentioned deviation can be suppressed by performing parallel projection without causing a perspective.

In this case, as the distance between the viewpoint and the objects OB1 to OB4 increases, the magnification of the objects OB1 to OB4 is reduced, and the relative movement speed of the objects OB1 to OB4 with respect to the viewpoint is reduced. As a result, the image obtained by parallel projection can be made to look like an image with a sense of perspective.

In the above configuration, each object OB1 to OB4 is a plate-shaped polygon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, any one of the objects OB1 to OB4 is set to correspond to the image to be displayed in three dimensions. It may be configured as a specific object of. In this case, a texture is provided corresponding to the specific object, and the texture is attached to the specific object. As a result, the image related to the specific object can respond to the change in the viewpoint, while the other objects cannot respond to the change in the viewpoint, and the perspective may not be consistent. On the other hand, when the viewpoint changes, the deviation between the two can be reduced by performing parallel projection.

Further, in the above configuration, the different viewpoint PV2 is set to the position where the specific viewpoint PV1 is moved in the −Y direction, but the position is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a position shifted in the Z direction, which is arbitrary.

Further, the consistency of the perspective between the images related to the objects OB1 to OB4 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the matching between the image related to the two-dimensional image data such as the rearmost image and the image related to one object. The same applies to sex. That is, even when displaying one image by combining one object and two-dimensional image data, switching between perspective projection and parallel projection due to a change in viewpoint can be applied.

In the above configuration, the texture used to display the sandy beach background image BP10 is configured to be used to display the production background image BP20, but the texture is not limited to this and is used to display a predetermined image. Any configuration may be used as long as it is used to display an image having a viewpoint different from that of the predetermined image, and the specific display content is arbitrary.

Further, in the above configuration, the viewpoint is moved in the −X direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the viewpoint is not moved may be used. In this case, it is preferable to configure each object OB1 to OB4 to move in the + X direction, and to make the movement amount different according to the distance from the viewpoint. Further, the moving direction of the viewpoint is set to the −X direction, but the movement direction is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In the above configuration, the coordinates and magnification of each object OB1 to OB4 are set so that the area when each object OB1 to OB4 is projected in parallel overlaps with the area when each object OB1 to OB4 is perspectively projected. Not limited to. In short, it may be a configuration in which the coordinates and magnifications of the objects OB1 to OB4 are adjusted so that the image corresponds to the different viewpoint PV2 and a sense of perspective is generated.

Further, when displaying the background image BP20 for effect, the tilt angle of each object OB1 to OB3 may be changed from the tilt angle when displaying the sandy beach background image BP10, and the tilt angle of each object OB1 to OB3 may be changed. May be changed individually.

Further, as the projection pattern for the teaching object and the design object to be drawn in the sandy beach sprinting effect, either parallel projection or perspective projection may be used. When parallel projection is performed, the symbol images CP1 to CP3 and the teaching images CP4 and CP5 can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner, while when perspective projection is performed, each of the above images CP1 to CP5 can be displayed three-dimensionally. ..

Further, the projection pattern of the object for teaching may be set to parallel projection, and the projection pattern of the design object may be set to perspective projection. In this case, the design images CP1 to CP3 related to the sandy beach sprinting effect can be displayed three-dimensionally while displaying the teaching images CP4 and CP5 in an easy-to-see manner.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a configuration for performing a distortion effect and a blink effect as a display effect is provided. The drawing process is different from that of the first embodiment according to the distortion effect. The configuration for performing each effect will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

<About the configuration for producing distortion>
The configuration for performing the distortion effect will be described.

The distortion effect is an effect in which a part of the background image is distorted when the variable display of the pattern is performed. Specifically, when a variable display of a pattern scrolling in a specific direction is started in a situation where an image depicting an underwater state is displayed as a background image, a part of the background image, in detail, The area of the symbol opposite to the traveling direction of the symbol is displayed so as to be distorted. As a result, it is assumed that the player recognizes the distortion as the refraction of light caused by the flow formed by the symbol starting to scroll. Therefore, it is possible to realistically recognize the scrolling of the symbol underwater.

The configuration used in the distortion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 77. 77 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the refraction object OB10, FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c) are explanatory views for explaining how the refraction object OB10 is deformed, and FIG. 77 (d) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the refraction α data SKD1 applied to the refraction object OB10.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the refraction object OB10 is composed of rectangular plate polygons. The plate polygon can be said to be an object with a small number of polygons, and is low-definition image data configured in a plane shape without unevenness in a three-dimensional direction (specifically, the Z direction in the local coordinate system).

The shape (size) of the refraction object OB10 is set corresponding to the distortion region PE1 in which distortion is desired to be generated. Specifically, the shape (size) of the refraction object OB10 covers the distortion region PE1 when the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system is performed. It is set to be able to. Specifically, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1. Therefore, when parallel projection is performed with the refraction object OB10 arranged so as to overlap the distortion region PE1, the image related to the refraction object OB10 is displayed on the distortion region PE1. It becomes.

Vertex coordinates are set in a grid pattern on the refraction object OB10. Local three-dimensional coordinates are set for the vertex coordinates, and the Z coordinates (coordinates in the depth direction) of each vertex coordinate are set to be the same.

The vertex coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set corresponding to the distortion region PE1. Specifically, the region formed by the vertex coordinates other than the vertex coordinates constituting the outer edge portion of the refraction object OB10 is the distortion region PE1. It is set to be substantially the same.

The refraction object OB10 is configured to be deformable. Specifically, the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate of the refraction object OB10 can be individually displaced, and the refraction object OB10 is distorted by the displacement of the Z coordinate.

The modified form of the refraction object OB10 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of modified forms of the refraction object OB10 are set. The refraction object OB10 of the first modified form and the refraction object OB10 of the second modified form among the plurality of types of modified forms will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c). 77 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the refraction object OB10 of the first modified form, and FIG. 77 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the refraction object OB10 of the second modified form. For convenience of explanation, in the following description, the refraction object OB10 in the first modified form is simply referred to as the first modified form OB10a, and the refraction object OB10 in the second modified form is simply referred to as the second modified form OB10b.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c), each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b is deformed so that unevenness is formed on the plate surface to which the texture is attached. Specifically, in each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b, the Z coordinates of each vertex coordinate corresponding to the strain region PE1 are displaced by a predetermined amount with reference to the Z coordinate of the vertex coordinates constituting the outer edge portion of the refraction object OB10. It is deformed by doing. Specifically, it is distorted so that a one-period sine wave having a Z component whose fixed end is the coordinates of the vertices of both ends in the X direction is formed, and an arc whose start point and end point are the coordinates of the vertices of both ends in the Y direction is formed. The Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate included in the region PE1 is displaced. In each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b, the phase of the sine wave is deviated by π.

A distorted image is expressed by mapping the texture of the portion of the background image corresponding to the region where the modified forms OB10a and OB10b are arranged to each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b. In this case, each time the predetermined update timing is reached, the refraction object OB10 is alternately deformed into the first deformed form OB10a and the second deformed form OB10b having different phases in the X direction, thereby advancing in the X direction. It is possible to express a distorted image corresponding to the flow of water. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize that a flow of water in the X direction is formed with the scrolling of the symbol in the X direction, and it is possible to preferably associate the scrolling of the symbol with the distorted image.

Further, in the distortion effect, the refraction α data SKD1 is used in order to blend the distortion image displayed in the region where the refraction object OB10 is arranged and the image on the periphery of the region. As described above, the α data is the transparency information applied to each pixel of the image data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as the image data.

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the size of the refraction α data SKD1 is set so that its outer shape matches the refraction object OB10 to which the object is applied. The refraction α data SKD1 is divided into a plurality of regions in which different α values are set.

The region that divides the refraction α data SKD1 is formed so that the transparency on the edge side is higher than the transparency on the center side. Specifically, the refraction α data SKD1 is provided in the central region of the refraction α data SKD1 so as to surround the opaque region SKA0 in which the opaque information “1” is set and the opaque region SKA0. It is provided so as to surround the first partial transmission region SKA1 in which the partial transmission information (0 <α1 <1) is set and the first partial transmission region SKA1, and the transmittance is higher than that of the first partial transmission region SKA1. It is divided into a second partial transmission region SKA2 in which high partial transparency information (0 <α2 <α1) is set.

By applying the refraction α data SKD1 to the refraction object OB10 (including the first modified form OB10a and the second modified form OB10b), the refraction α data is applied to each pixel included in the refraction object OB10. The α value contained in SKD1 is applied.

Further, when the distorted image is superimposed on the overlapping image on the back side of the display surface G, the α value defined in the refraction α data SKD1 and the refraction object OB10 are set at each dot related to the overlap. Numerical information is fused (that is, blending) based on the set uniform α value. Specifically, assuming that the α value set in the refraction α data SKD1 is an individual α value,
R: "R value of the back image" x ("1"-"individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "R value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
G: "G value of the back image" x ("1"-"individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "G value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
B: "B value of the back image" x ("1"-"individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "B value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
The operation of is performed.

By applying the refraction α data SKD1, the distorted image gradually becomes transparent from the central region toward the veranda. As a result, the edges of the distorted image become familiar with the background image, and the edges of the distorted image are less noticeable.

Further, the distorted image is displayed in a state reflecting a uniform α value. Specifically, when the uniform α value is small, the back side image is reflected rather than the distorted image. On the other hand, when the uniform α value is large, the distorted image is reflected more than the back image.

The specific processing configuration of the distortion effect will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a distortion effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 131. The distortion effect calculation process is executed when the currently set data table is a data table corresponding to the distortion effect in the effect calculation process of step S904 in the task process (FIG. 14).

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the distortion effect is being executed based on the currently set data table.

If the distortion effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S4502, and it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the distortion effect based on the currently set data table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data table currently set has information for specifying the start timing of the distortion effect. The start timing of the distortion effect is set to be the same as the fluctuation start timing of the symbol. As a result, the distortion effect is executed when the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, while if it is the start timing, the process related to the initial setting of the refraction object OB10 is executed in steps S4503 to S4507. Specifically, first, in step S4503, the refraction object OB10 is grasped. Then, in step S4504, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are initially set.

The coordinates are preset on the data table. Specifically, the region of the symbol image opposite to the scroll direction of the symbol image is set as the strain region PE1, and the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set so as to overlap the strain region PE1. ing. More specifically, when the refraction object OB10 is projected, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set so that the vertex coordinates other than the vertex coordinates constituting the outer edge portion of the refraction object OB10 are included in the distortion region PE1. There is.

After that, in step S4505, "1", which is opaque information, is set as a uniform α value. In the following step S4506, arithmetic processing of other parameters applied to the refraction object OB10 is performed.

Then, in step S4507, the initial setting of the coordinate mapping data is performed. The coordinate mapping data will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the coordinate mapping data. In detail, FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first coordinate mapping data MD1, and FIG. 79 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second coordinate mapping data MD2.

The coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2 are data used for determining the amount of displacement of each vertex coordinate constituting the refraction object OB10 in the Z direction. In each of the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2, the displacement amount in the Z direction is set so as to correspond one-to-one with each vertex of the refraction object OB10. Specifically, the upper left corner of the vertices constituting the refraction object OB10 corresponds to the fact that only 10 vertices of the refraction object OB10 are set in a matrix in the X direction and 7 vertices in the Y direction. Z (a, b) (a: 1-10, b: 1-7) are set in a matrix with the displacement amount in the Z direction applied to Z (1,1) as Z (1,1). For convenience of explanation, Z (a, b) set in the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is referred to as Z1 (a, b), and Z2 (a, b) set in the second coordinate mapping data MD2. It is assumed that Z (a, b) indicates both Z1 (a, b) and Z2 (a, b).

In Z (a, b), the amount of displacement in the Z direction with respect to the Z coordinate of each vertex forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 is set. Specifically, "0" is used for Z (1, b), Z (10, b), Z (a, 1), and Z (a, 7) corresponding to each vertex forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10. Is set, and in the other Z (x, y) (x: 2-9, y: 2-6), the displacement amount corresponding to each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b is set.

Specifically, Z1 (x, y) is set so that the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the first deformation form OB10a. On the other hand, Z2 (x, y) is set so that the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the second deformation form OB10b.

In step S4507, a process of setting the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 in the drawing list is executed as an initial setting. As a result, a drawing list in which the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set is created. Then, the VDP135 acquires the first coordinate mapping data MD1 based on the address information and displaces each vertex of the refraction object OB10 by the amount of displacement of the Z coordinate corresponding to each vertex. , The process of transforming the refraction object OB10 into the first deformation form OB10a is executed.

In step S4507, the display CPU 131 executes a process for specifying which coordinate mapping data is currently set. Specifically, the work RAM 132 is provided with a specific storage area for storing information for specifying the currently set coordinate mapping data. In step S4507, information corresponding to the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set for the specific storage area.

After executing the process of step S4507, the refraction α data SKD1 is set in steps S4508 to S4510. Specifically, in step S4508, the refraction α data SKD1 is grasped, and in step S4509, the coordinates of the refraction α data SKD1 are set to the same coordinates as the refraction object OB10. Then, in step S4510, calculation processing of other parameters applied to the refraction α data SKD1 is performed.

After that, the other effect objects are grasped in step S4511, and the parameter calculation process applied to the effect object is performed in step S4512.

In the following step S4513, the distortion effect designation information for specifying that the distortion effect is performed by the VDP 135 is set, and the present calculation process is terminated.

When such a process is executed, at least the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806). In this case, the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set to the same coordinates.

Further, the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 and the distortion effect designation information are set in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the distortion effect is being executed (step S4501: YES), it is determined in step S4514 whether or not the transparency period is in progress based on the currently set data table. Specifically, information for specifying that the transparency period is set is set in the data table corresponding to the distortion effect. The transparency period is set to a period from the timing before a plurality of frames (for example, 10 frames) to the end timing of the distortion effect with respect to the end timing of the distortion effect. In step S4514, it is determined whether or not the information is set in the currently set data table.

If it is not during the transparency period, the refraction object OB10 is grasped in step S4515, and the parameter calculation process is executed in step S4516. In this case, the various default parameters are maintained.

After that, in step S4517, a process of updating the deformation of the refraction object OB10, that is, a process of updating the coordinate mapping data is executed. Specifically, the coordinate mapping data set in the previous processing times is grasped based on the information stored in the specific storage area. Then, the address of the coordinate mapping data different from the coordinate mapping data grasped in the previous processing time is set, and the information corresponding to the coordinate mapping data set this time is stored in the specific storage area. For example, if the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set in the previous processing time, the second coordinate mapping data MD2 is set, and if the second coordinate mapping data MD2 is set in the previous processing time, the second coordinate mapping data MD2 is set. The first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set.

Then, the processes of steps S4508 to S4513 are executed, and the present calculation process is terminated.

When the above processing is executed, a drawing list in which at least the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set is created. In this case, the parameters applied to the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are maintained.

Further, in the drawing list created this time, the address of the coordinate mapping data different from the coordinate mapping data set in the drawing list created last time is set, and the distortion effect designation information is set.

If the transparency period is in progress (step S4514: YES), the refraction object OB10 is grasped in step S4518. Then, in step S4519, the α value is uniformly updated. Specifically, a process of subtracting a uniform α value by a predetermined value (for example, 0.1) is executed.

After that, the calculation process of other parameters is executed in step S4520, and the coordinate mapping data update process is executed in step S4521. Then, the processes of steps S4508 to S4513 are executed to end the calculation process. Since these processes have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the above processing is executed, drawing lists having different uniform α values applied to the refraction object OB10 are created. The uniform α value gradually decreases for each frame.

Here, the transparency period and the subtraction value of the uniform α value are set in correspondence with each other. Specifically, the subtraction value and the transparency period are set so that the α value uniformly becomes “0” at the end timing of the distortion effect. In detail, both are set so that the number of frames related to the transparency period = 1 / subtraction value. As a result, the image attached to the refraction object OB10 gradually disappears, and disappears completely at the end timing of the distortion effect.

In the symbol calculation process (step S905) of the task process (FIG. 14), the process related to the start of the variable display of the symbol is executed in synchronization with the start of the distortion effect. Specifically, a process for scrolling each symbol image in a predetermined direction (left direction) is executed.

Next, the drawing process performed by the VDP 135 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing process is a loop process that is periodically performed at a predetermined cycle, and in detail, is performed at a cycle shorter than the cycle (20 msec) in which the drawing list is created. In this case, the time required to execute the drawing process is set shorter than the reception interval of the drawing list. As a result, a new drawing list is not received while the drawing process is being performed.

Further, the total time of the time required for executing the drawing process and the time required for the drawing list to be created and the drawing list to be received is set to be shorter than the image update interval. This prevents the situation where the drawing time is longer than the image update interval.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list has been received. If the new drawing list is not received, this process is terminated as it is, while if a new drawing list is received, the drawing data for the background (background image) is first obtained in steps S4602 to S4608. ) Is created.

Specifically, first, the background setting process is executed in step S4602. Then, the processes of steps S4603 to S4608 are executed for the rearmost image and the background object grasped in step S4602. As a result, the drawing data for the background is created first and written to the buffer for the background.

After that, by executing the processes of steps S4609 to S4616, drawing data for the effect and the design is created. Then, the drawing data synthesis process is executed in step S4617, and the main drawing process is terminated.

According to this configuration, the creation of the background image is completed before the processing related to the creation of the drawing data for the effect and the design is executed. This makes it possible to use the background image when executing the process related to the creation of the drawing data for the effect and the design.

Next, the setting process for distortion effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the distortion effect is executed in the setting process for the effect in step S4609 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S4701, the refraction object OB10 set in the drawing list is grasped.

After that, in step S4702, the coordinate mapping data applied this time is grasped based on the address information of the coordinate mapping data set in the drawing list. In the following step S4703, the refraction object OB10 is deformed using the coordinate mapping data grasped in step S4702.

Specifically, by referring to the coordinate mapping data, the amount of displacement in the Z direction corresponding to each vertex constituting the refraction object OB10 is grasped. Then, the Z coordinate of each vertex in the local coordinate system is displaced by the grasped displacement amount in the Z direction. As a result, the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the first modified form OB10a or the second modified form OB10b.

After that, in step S4704, various parameters applied to the second modified form OB10b are grasped. Then, in step S4705, the setting process for the first modified form OB10a or the second modified form OB10b is executed in the world coordinate system, and the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4706, other effect objects are grasped, and in step S4707, the parameters applied to the effect object are grasped. Then, in step S4708, the setting process for the other effect objects is executed in the world coordinate system, and the setting process is terminated.

By executing the setting process as described above, the first modified form OB10a or the second modified form OB10b formed by deforming the refraction object OB10 is arranged in the world coordinate system.

Next, the texture mapping process for distortion effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The texture mapping process for distortion effect is executed in the color information setting process in step S4615 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

In the texture mapping process for distortion effect, a process of using a part of the background image as a texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 (specifically, any of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b) is executed.

In step S4801, the background image set as the drawing target this time is grasped. Specifically, the drawing data for the background written in the buffer for the background is grasped in step S4608 of the drawing process (FIG. 80).

In the following step S4802, a process of creating a texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 is executed using the background image grasped in step S4801. Specifically, by trimming the grasped background image, the image data of the portion of the background image corresponding to the region related to the refraction object OB10, specifically, the region corresponding to the region on which the refraction object OB10 is projected can be obtained. Extract. In this case, the image data is extracted so that the size is the same as the size of the refraction object OB10.

At the time of trimming, the drawing data for the background written in the buffer for the background is not changed, and a separate buffer is used.

Then, in step S4803, the image data of the portion extracted in step S4802 is pasted as a texture on the refraction object OB10 (first modified form OB10a or second modified form OB10b). In this case, the wrap mapping method or the UV wrapping method is used.

After that, in step S4804, the texture to be pasted to other objects is grasped based on the drawing list, and in step S4805, the texture is pasted to each object to end this process.

According to such a configuration, a background image corresponding to the projection region of the refraction object OB10 is attached to the refraction object OB10. In this case, the background image of the distortion region PE1 corresponding to the projection region of the refraction object OB10 is distorted by projecting the refraction object OB10 in a deformed state in the first deformation form OB10a or the second deformation form OB10b. As a result, it is possible to express how a part of the background image is distorted without separately providing a texture corresponding to the distortion.

Here, as described above, the size of the texture attached to the refraction object OB10 and the size of the refraction object OB10 are set to be the same. As a result, the deterioration in the image quality of the distorted image that may occur due to the deformation of the refraction object OB10 is less noticeable than the image quality of the image displayed in the other area.

In the effect of step S4616 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) and the drawing data creation process for the design in the case of executing the distortion effect, the drawing data is created by projecting by parallel projection. As a result, it is not necessary to set the size of the refraction object OB10 in consideration of the distance from the viewpoint, so that the size of the refraction object OB10 can be easily set.

However, the configuration is not limited to parallel projection, and may be configured to perform perspective projection. In this case, the size of the refraction object OB10 and the refraction object OB10 are considered in consideration of the distance from the viewpoint so that the projection area of the refraction object OB10 corresponds to the distortion area PE1 when the refraction object OB10 is projected. It is good that the coordinates of are set.

Next, the fusion process for distortion effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The distortion effect fusion process is executed in the drawing data composition process (step S4617) of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list. For convenience of explanation, the unit area corresponding to the dots included in the projected region of the deformed refraction object OB10 in the frame buffer 142 will be described, and the unit area corresponding to the dots included in the other regions will be described. The description of is omitted. Further, it is assumed that the target dot is predetermined.

First, in step S4901, the numerical information of the target pixel corresponding to the current target dot among the dots included in the region where the refraction object OB10 is projected is grasped based on the drawing data for the effect. The numerical information corresponds to the numerical information (referred to as "m") of the distorted image.

Then, in step S4902, the individual α value corresponding to the target dot this time is grasped based on the refraction α data SKD1, and in step S4903, it is applied to the refraction object OB10 based on the drawing list. Grasp the uniform α value.

In the following step S4904, the numerical information of the target pixel corresponding to the current target dot in the background image is grasped based on the drawing data for the background. The numerical information corresponds to the numerical information (referred to as "n") of the back image.

Then, in step S4905, the fusion process (blending process) is executed based on the grasped result grasped by the process of the above steps S4901 to S4904, and the fusion result is obtained by the current unit area in the frame buffer 142. Write in the unit area corresponding to the target dot.

In the above fusion process, the arithmetic expression described above is used. That is, the operation of n × (1- “individual α value” × “uniform α value”) + m × “individual α value” × “uniform α value” is performed.

In the following step S4906, it is determined whether or not the fusion process is completed for all the dots included in the projection region of the refraction object OB10. If it is not completed, the process of updating the target dot is executed in step S4907, and the process returns to step S4901. As a result, the fusion process is executed for the new target dot. If it is completed, the fusion process is terminated.

By executing the above processing, the distorted image and the background image are fused. That is, when the uniform α value is “1”, a distorted image that becomes transparent toward the outer edge portion is displayed. On the other hand, when the uniform α value is “0”, the background image is displayed as it is.

Next, the state of the distortion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distortion effect, FIG. 84 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image before the distortion effect is started, and FIG. 84 (b) is a first modified form OB10a. An explanatory diagram for explaining a distorted image based on the above, FIG. 84 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distorted image based on the second modified form OB10b. Due to the drawing, a part of the display surface G is shown, and only two coral images CP12 are displayed as a part of the pattern image CP11 to be the target of the distortion effect and the background image showing the state in the sea. A plurality of individual images and the rearmost image are displayed in.

As shown in FIG. 84A, the symbol image CP11 is stopped and displayed before the distortion effect is started. In this case, coral is drawn in the distortion region PE1 on the display surface G, specifically, in the region (right region) opposite to the scroll direction (left direction) of the symbol image CP11 with respect to the symbol image CP11. Two coral images CP12 are displayed side by side.

When the distortion effect is started, the symbol image CP11 scrolls to the left. In this case, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the first distorted image CP15 in which the expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted contracted coral image CP14 are drawn is displayed in the strain region PE1. In this case, the expanded coral image CP13 is displayed on the symbol image CP11 side, and the contracted coral image CP14 is displayed on the opposite side.

In the next frame with respect to the start timing of the distortion effect, as shown in FIG. 8C, the second distortion image in which the positional relationship between the expansion coral image CP13 and the contraction coral image CP14 is reversed in the distortion region PE1. CP16 is displayed.

After that, the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are alternately displayed for each frame. As a result, it appears that the symbol image CP11 is swaying due to the formation of an underwater flow in the region opposite to the traveling direction of the symbol image CP11.

Then, after the scrolling (distortion effect) of the symbol image CP11 is started, the strain region PE1 is gradually replaced with the expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted coral image CP14 based on the fact that a predetermined number of frames are updated. , Coral image CP12 is displayed.

As described above, when the variable display of the symbol image CP11 is performed, by alternately displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the strain region PE1, a flow is formed in the water by scrolling the symbol image CP11, and the back side is formed. You can make the background look like it's shaking. This makes it possible to express the scrolling of the symbol underwater more realistically.

In this case, the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the first modified form OB10a or the second modified form OB10b, and a part of the background image is attached to these as a texture to create the distorted images CP15 and CP16. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a texture for expressing the distortion, so that the amount of data required to distort the image can be reduced.

Further, the drawing data of the background image is created before the processing related to the drawing of the refraction object OB10 is executed, and the texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 is created by using the drawing data. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 in advance, so that the amount of texture data can be further reduced.

Specifically, various objects for the background are arranged in the world coordinate system, and by projecting these, drawing data to be distorted, that is, two-dimensional image data for the background is acquired. After that, the drawing data to be distorted is pasted and projected as a texture on the refraction object OB10 in a state where the refraction object OB10 is arranged and deformed. As a result, the process related to the creation of the texture can be used as a part of the drawing process, so that the processing load can be reduced. In other words, an image created in the middle of the drawing process can be used as a texture.

Here, in each unit area (pixel) of the texture, numerical information for three colors is stored as color information. Therefore, the amount of information tends to be larger than that of the coordinate mapping data in which only the displacement amount in the Z direction is set. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the distorted images CP15 and CP16 can be displayed using only the coordinate mapping data having a relatively small amount of information, the textures related to the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are separately provided. In comparison, the amount of data related to the distortion effect can be reduced.

Further, when the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1, the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 is deformed. The Z coordinate of the part is not changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the boundary between the image related to the refraction object OB10 and the other image from being conspicuous.

Further, the refraction α data SKD1 was provided so that the distorted images CP15 and CP16 became transparent toward the outer edges of the distorted images CP15 and CP16. As a result, the boundary between the image related to the refraction object OB10 and the other images can be more preferably made inconspicuous.

Then, when the distortion effect is completed, the distortion images CP15 and CP16 are gradually made transparent. As a result, when the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are transferred to the coral image CP12, the transition can be made inconspicuous.

In the above configuration, the scene in which the symbol image CP11 starts the variable display is set as the scene for expressing the distortion, but the scene is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, it may be used to express a shock wave generated by a high-speed movement of an object, or may be used to switch a scene or to switch a symbol image CP11 to another symbol image. In this case, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set according to the region to be distorted (distortion region PE1).

Further, the present invention is not limited to the effect of expressing distortion, and the present invention can be applied to a display effect of changing a part or all of an image. For example, a configuration may be configured in which a part of the image is enlarged or reduced by changing the parameters applied to the refraction object OB10, or a configuration may be configured in which the image is rotated. Further, a part of the image displayed on the display surface G may be made transparent as compared with other areas.

Further, for example, a specific object capable of displaying the entire display surface G when projected is provided, and the drawing data of the background image stored in the background buffer is pasted as it is for the specific object. Then, each time the update timing is set, the specific object is divided into a plurality of component objects, and the component objects are moved independently, whereby the background image displayed on the display surface G is cracked. It is possible to create an effect that makes the object visually visible. This makes it possible to suitably switch scenes and the like.

Further, according to the above configuration, the background image is trimmed so that the texture attached to the refraction object OB10 has the same size as the refraction object OB10, but the background image is not limited to this, and the size is different, for example. It may be configured to be trimmed so as to be. In this case, it is advisable to perform enlargement or reduction processing according to the size of the refraction object OB10. As a result, the image attached to the refraction object OB10 tail is distorted by the enlargement or reduction process, so that the distorted image can be further distorted. However, in the case of the above configuration, the boundary between the distorted image and another image becomes conspicuous, so the above configuration is better in consideration of the conspicuousness of the boundary.

Further, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1, but the shape is not limited to this, and the display area is, for example, the distortion area PE1. The shape of the refraction object OB10 may be set so as to match. In this case, when the refraction object OB10 is deformed, the coordinates of the vertices constituting the outer edge portion of the refraction object OB10 may also be displaced.

Further, in the above configuration, the first coordinate mapping data MD1 and the second coordinate mapping data MD2 are alternately used to make the background image appear to be shaken, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the distortion gradually increases. It may be configured to execute an effect that becomes or becomes smaller and an effect that combines these effects.

In the above configuration, the object of distortion is a part of the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the entire background image may be distorted. In this case, a refraction object capable of covering the entire display surface G is provided, and the drawing data of the background image stored in the background buffer is pasted as it is on the refraction object.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the background image, and may be configured to distort all or part of the pattern image, the predetermined character image, or the image itself displayed on the display surface G. In this case, before executing the process related to the drawing of the refraction object, drawing data related to the image including the object to be distorted is created in advance, and in the process related to the drawing of the refraction object, the drawing data is based on the above drawing data. It is good to create a texture to be pasted on the object for refraction and paste it.

Further, in the above configuration, the deformation of the refraction object OB10 is realized by using the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a four-dimensional function (x, y, z, t) is defined. The object OB10 for refraction may be deformed by deriving the amount of displacement of each vertex in the Z direction based on the four-dimensional function. In this case, the amount of data related to the distortion effect can be further reduced. However, in view of the increase in the processing load of the VDP135, the complexity of the function due to the high-definition distortion, and the like, the configuration using each coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2 is preferable.

In the above configuration, the refraction object OB10 is deformed by displacing the Z coordinate of each apex coordinate so that unevenness is formed on the plate surface of the refraction object OB10, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, X. It may be configured to displace at least one of the coordinates and the Y coordinate. In this case, it is advisable to set the XY coordinates of each vertex so that a vortex is formed by each vertex arranged in a grid pattern. This makes it possible to express a distorted image by pasting a texture corresponding to each vertex. However, from the viewpoint of processing load, it is better to use only the displacement in the Z direction.

Further, in the above configuration, the drawing data for the background (two-dimensional image data) is first created, and then the drawing data for the effect and the design is created. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first implementation. Each drawing data may be created by arranging objects for background, effect, and design in the world coordinate system and projecting them on each object as in the form of. In this case, it is preferable to execute the drawing process twice. Specifically, in the first time, each drawing data is created by arranging and projecting each object except the refraction object OB10, and in the second time, each object including the refraction object OB10 is arranged and projected, and each drawing data is projected. To create. In this case, in the second drawing process, the texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 is created by using the drawing data for the background created in the first drawing process. As a result, a part of the background image can be used as a texture. However, in the case of the above configuration, since it is necessary to perform the same processing more than once, there is a concern that unnecessary processing will increase and the processing load will increase. Focusing on this point, the configuration in which the drawing data for the background is first created and then the drawing data for the effect and the design is created is superior.

Further, the image to be transformed may be updated. For example, the distortion region PE1 may be sequentially scrolled as the symbol image CP11 scrolls. In this case, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are updated at each predetermined update timing (for example, each frame), and the area to be trimmed in the trimming process (step S4802) in the distortion effect mapping process (FIG. 82) is set as the refraction object. It is advisable to change it according to the coordinates of OB10. As a result, it is possible to suitably cope with the displacement of the strain region PE1 without causing an increase in the amount of data.

Further, the background image may be displaced while the distortion region PE1 is fixed. Even in this case, the drawing data for the background related to the background image is generated for each frame, and the drawing data for the background is used for each frame to generate the texture to be pasted on the refraction object OB10. Therefore, the displaced background image can be distorted.

As the displacement of the background image, scrolling of the background image in a predetermined direction can be considered. The scrolling can be realized by moving the objects constituting the background image or moving the viewpoint.

Further, the configuration in which a part of the image is processed to produce a display effect may be applied to the configuration related to the two-dimensional display. Specifically, a plurality of types of sprite data are stored in the memory module 133, and drawing data related to a predetermined image is generated using the sprite data. Then, the drawing data may be stored in a temporary buffer provided in the frame buffer 142, a part of the drawing data may be extracted, and the extracted data may be treated as sprite data. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect such as enlarging or reducing a part of the image related to the drawing data or moving the image in a predetermined direction.

Further, by superimposing the extracted data on another sprite data, it is possible to overwrite the image related to the extracted data.

Further, the texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 is created by projection, but is not limited to this, and may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance, for example. However, if we focus on increasing the amount of texture data, it is better to create it by projecting it.

Further, the refraction object OB10 is a plate-shaped polygon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a polygon having any shape may be used. However, from the viewpoint of processing load, it is better to use a plate-shaped polygon.

In the above configuration, the distortion is expressed by alternately switching the modified form of the refracting object OB10 between the first modified form OB10a and the second modified form OB10b, but the distortion is expressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two refraction objects OB10. The object OB10 for refraction may be transformed into a first modified form OB10a and a second modified form OB10b, respectively, and both may be connected at a short side portion. In this case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the connected objects are scrolled in a predetermined direction. Even in this case, the fluctuated image can be preferably displayed.

<About the configuration for blinking effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the blinking effect will be described.

The blinking effect is an effect in which a predetermined character image blinks.

In the blinking effect, the base object OB21 and the base texture TD11 used to display a predetermined character image, and the partial object OB22 and the partial texture TD12 used to change the eye portion are used. Each of these configurations will be described with reference to FIG. 85. 85 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22, FIG. 85 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base texture TD11, and FIG. 85 (c) explains the partial texture TD12. It is an explanatory diagram for this. In order to explain the relationship between the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22, the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 are shown in an overlapping manner in FIG. 85A, and the partial object OB22 is shown by a dotted line. Further, in order to explain the relationship between the base texture TD11 and the partial texture TD12, the outer shape of the partial texture TD12 is shown by a dotted line in FIG. 85 (b).

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), the base object OB21 is a unit object composed of a plurality of component objects, and by updating the parameters applied to each component object, the character of the 3D image can be moved or changed. Can be given.

Further, in the base object OB21, the base texture TD11 is set as a texture to be attached to the head object OB31 corresponding to the head of the character. As shown in FIG. 85B, the base texture TD11 is image data on which a face is drawn. The base texture TD11 is set as rectangular image data corresponding to the head object OB31. Specifically, the base texture TD11 is set corresponding to the image data when the three-dimensional head object OB31 is expanded in two dimensions, and the vertical and horizontal pixels have the same shape as the expanded image data. The number is set. The face is expressed by attaching the base texture TD11 to the head object OB31.

As for the hairstyle, a hairstyle object OB32 is provided separately from the head object OB31, and a hairstyle texture to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 is provided. The hairstyle is expressed using these, and the head of the character is expressed by superimposing the hairstyle object OB32 and the head object OB31.

Further, although the base texture TD11 is configured to be set as rectangular image data, the present invention is not limited to this, and the base texture TD11 may be set as image data having a different shape according to the shape of the head object OB31.

The shape and size of the partial object OB22 are set so as to be able to cover the display area of the eyes in the base object OB21 when the partial object OB22 is projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the partial object OB22 is composed of rectangular plate-shaped polygons having the same shape as the area where the eyes are displayed in the base object OB21. As a result, the base object OB21 is arranged in the world coordinate system, and the partial object OB22 is arranged between the viewpoint and the base object OB21 and so as to overlap the area where the eyes are displayed in the base object OB21. When parallel projection is performed in, the image of the partial object OB22 is displayed instead of the eyes of the base texture TD11. In this case, a character image having a different aspect of the eyes is displayed by pasting a texture having a different aspect from the eyes of the base texture TD11 to the partial object OB22.

A plurality of types (specifically, three types) of partial textures TD12 are provided as textures to be attached to the partial object OB22.

Explaining the partial texture TD12, the size of the partial texture TD12 is set to be the same as that of the partial object OB22, and specifically, the number of vertical and horizontal pixels of the partial texture TD12 is set to be the same as the shape of the partial object OB22. It is set. Therefore, the partial texture TD12 is attached to the partial object OB22 without being deformed.

In this case, the number of pixels of the base texture TD11 is set corresponding to the size of the entire head object OB31, and the number of pixels of the partial texture TD12 is set corresponding to the eye part of the head object OB31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85B, the partial texture TD12 has a smaller size than the base texture TD11, and the amount of data is small.

The partial texture TD12 contains image data in an intermediate state between the first partial texture TD21 (see FIG. 85 (c-1)), which is image data in a state where the eyes are open, and a state in which the eyes are open and the eyes are closed. The second partial texture TD22 (see FIG. 85 (c-2)) and the third partial texture TD23 with the eyes closed (see FIG. 85 (c-3)) are set. The first partial texture TD21 is a texture on which the same image as the eye portion of the base texture TD11 is drawn.

Blinking is performed by sequentially switching the texture to be pasted to the partial object OB22 from the first partial texture TD21 → the second partial texture TD22 → the third partial texture TD23 → the second partial texture TD22 → the first partial texture TD21 as one cycle. Can be expressed.

The specific processing configuration of the blinking effect will be described.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a blinking effect arithmetic process executed by the display CPU 131. The blinking effect calculation process is started when the currently set data table corresponds to the blinking effect in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14).

First, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the blinking effect is being performed based on the currently set data table.

If the blinking effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S5002, and it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the blinking effect based on the currently set data table.

If it is not the start timing of the blinking effect, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, while if it is the start timing of the blinking effect, the process proceeds to step S5003 to grasp the base object OB21. Then, the process proceeds to step S5004, and the address information of various textures to be pasted to the base object OB21 including the base texture TD11 is set.

After that, in step S5005, arithmetic processing related to the initial setting of other parameters applied to the base object OB21 is performed.

In the following step S5006, the partial object OB22 is grasped. Then, in step S5007, the initial coordinates of the partial object OB22 are set. The initial coordinates are set in advance in the data table. Specifically, when converted to the world coordinate system, the base object OB21 is on the front side (viewpoint side) of the base object OB21 and is projected (parallel projection). It is set to overlap the area where the eyes are displayed.

After that, in step S5008, the address information of the partial texture TD12 is initially set. Specifically, the address information of the first partial texture TD21 is set. Then, in step S5009, the arithmetic processing related to the initial setting of other parameters is executed.

After that, in step S5010, the blinking effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and this calculation process is terminated. The blink effect designation information is information used to specify that the drawing process related to the blink effect is executed in the VDP 135.

When such processing is executed, the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 are set as drawing targets in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the parameters corresponding to the respective objects OB21 and OB22 are set. Set. In this case, each object OB21, so that the image of the eyes by the partial object OB22 and the first partial texture TD21 is displayed so as to overlap the image of the eyes by the head object OB31 and the base texture TD11 of the base object OB21 when projected. The coordinates of OB22 are set. In addition, blinking effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the blinking effect is being produced, the process related to the setting of the base object OB21 is executed in steps S501 to S5013. Specifically, in step S5011, the base object OB21 is grasped, and in step S5012, the addresses of various textures are set. Then, in step S5013, calculation processing of other parameters is performed. In this case, the process of maintaining the various initially set parameters is executed.

After that, in steps S5014 to S5018, the process related to the setting of the partial object OB22 is executed. Specifically, first, the partial object OB22 is grasped in step S5014. Then, in step S5015, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the partial texture TD12 based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the blinking effect, information for specifying the update timing of the partial texture TD 12 is set for each predetermined number of frames. In step S5015, it is determined whether or not the above information is set.

If it is not the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the process proceeds to step S5016, and the address information of the previous partial texture TD12 is set. Then, the calculation process of other parameters is executed in step S5017, the blinking effect designation information is set in step S5010, and this calculation process is terminated.

When such a process is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process, the same drawing list as the previously created drawing list is created.

On the other hand, when it is the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the process proceeds to step S5018, and the process of setting the address information of the next partial texture for the previous partial texture is executed. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the blinking effect, the order of the partial textures TD21 to TD23 to be attached to the partial object OB22 is preset. Specifically, the first partial texture TD21 → the second partial texture TD22 → the third partial texture → the second partial texture TD22 is set as one cycle. In step S5018, based on the above cycle, the next partial texture is grasped with respect to the partial texture set in the previous drawing list, and the process of setting the address corresponding to the next partial texture is executed.

Then, the processing of step S5017 and step S5010 is executed to end this arithmetic processing.

When such a process is executed, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process has a different partial texture TD12 pasted to the partial object OB22 as compared with the drawing list created last time. ..

When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list in which the blinking effect designation information is set, the VDP 135 sets the world coordinate system based on the coordinates set in each of the objects OB21 and OB22. Then, various textures including the base texture TD11 are mapped to the base object OB21, and the partial texture TD12 set in the drawing list this time is mapped to the partial object OB22 to create drawing data for the effect and the design. In, the objects OB21 and OB22 are projected in parallel to create drawing data. This creates a character image in which the eye portion is replaced with the image of the partial texture TD12.

In this case, since the partial texture TD12 different from the previous drawing list is set in the drawing list related to the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the display surface G is compared with the character image displayed by the previous processing. Then, a character image having a different eye aspect is displayed.

Next, the state of the blinking effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking effect, and specifically, FIG. 87 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display surface G at the start timing of the blinking effect, FIG. 87. (B) and FIG. 87 (c) are explanatory views showing changes in the display mode of the character image CP22 in chronological order. For convenience of explanation, images other than the character image CP22 are omitted, but actually, a background image, a pattern image, and the like are displayed.

When the blinking effect is started, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the character image CP22 having the base image CP21 created by using various textures including the base object OB21 and the base texture TD11 is displayed. In this case, the first partial image CP23 created by using the partial object OB22 and the first partial texture TD21 is displayed in the overlap region PE2 (specifically, the eye region) in the base image CP21.

As described above, since the eye image drawn on the first partial texture TD21 is the same as the eye image in the base image CP21, the same image as the base image CP21 is actually displayed. It becomes.

After that, based on the update timing of the partial texture TD12, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the overlap region PE2 has a second portion created by using the partial object OB22 and the second partial texture TD22. Image CP24 is displayed.

Then, based on the next update timing, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the third partial image CP25 created by using the partial object OB22 and the third partial texture TD23 in the overlap region PE2. Is displayed.

As described above, by updating in the order of the first partial image CP23 → the second partial image CP24 → the third partial image CP25, the appearance of the eyes gradually closing is expressed.

After that, every time the update timing is reached, the second partial image CP24 → the first partial image CP23 is displayed in the overlap region PE2.

That is, the character image CP22 is repeatedly updated in the order of the first partial image CP23 → the second partial image CP24 → the third partial image CP25 → the second partial image CP24 → the first partial image CP23 → ... It looks like it's blinking.

As described above, the partial object OB22 is locally placed on the eye portion of the character image CP22, and the partial texture TD12 to be attached to the partial object OB22 is updated every time the predetermined update timing is reached. The blink of the character image CP22 can be expressed. In this case, since the partial texture TD12 is a texture in a part of the base texture TD11, the amount of data is smaller than that of the base texture TD11. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for blinking effect as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of base texture TD11s are prepared.

That is, the base image CP21 is divided into a part to be changed and a part not to be changed, a texture corresponding only to the part to be changed is provided, and the operation of the character image is performed by using the texture and the base image CP21. It was made to express. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of textures related to the entire base image CP21, that is, the base texture TD11. Therefore, it is possible to change a part of the specific character image while reducing the amount of data.

In this case, for example, the head object OB31 is divided into an eye object corresponding to the eye portion, a first object corresponding to the portion below the eyes, and a second object corresponding to the portion above the eyes. , A configuration that expresses blinking is also conceivable by changing the texture to be pasted on the eye object. However, in the case of such a configuration, the number of objects to be drawn increases due to the division of the head object OB31, and the number of vertices to be grasped increases. Therefore, there is a concern that the processing load will increase.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, blinking can be realized by one head object OB31 and one partial object OB22 which is a plate-shaped polygon having a relatively small processing load related to drawing. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load required for performing the blinking effect.

Although blinking has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied when a part of an individual image of one unit is changed. Specifically, the partial object may be arranged so as to overlap the area to be changed, and the partial texture corresponding to the changed partial image displayed in the area may be pasted to the partial object. For example, the present invention can be applied when changing the mouth or when partially changing the pattern of clothes.

Further, when performing the blinking effect, the first partial texture TD21 which is the same as the eye image of the base image CP21 is prepared, and the first partial image CP23 is displayed by using the first partial texture TD21. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first partial texture TD21 may not be prepared. As a result, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data required for blinking effect. In this case, information for specifying that the base image CP21 is to be displayed as it is is set in the data table corresponding to the blinking effect, and after the processing of step S5013 is executed, whether or not the period is in effect is determined. Execute the judgment process. If it is determined in the determination process that the period is for displaying the base image CP21 as it is, the calculation process is terminated without executing the process related to the setting of the partial object OB22 (steps S5014 to S5017). .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is not the period for displaying the base image CP21 as it is, it is preferable to execute the process related to the setting of the partial object OB22. This makes it possible to divert a part of the base image CP21 to perform a blinking effect. However, paying attention to the fact that the processing load of the blinking effect arithmetic processing increases by the processing load related to the determination processing, it is better to prepare the first partial texture TD 21 in advance.

In particular, in general, in periodic processing, it is necessary to design so that the processing does not drop even when the maximum load is applied. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration, it is necessary to design so that the processing does not fail even when the processing related to the determination processing and the setting of the partial object OB22 is executed. On the other hand, in the case of the configuration in which the first partial texture TD21 is prepared, the above determination process is not necessary, and a margin can be provided by that amount. As a result, it is possible to balance the reduction of the amount of texture data required for the blinking effect and the suppression of the increase in the processing load caused by the blinking effect.

It should be noted that the configuration is such that the second partial texture TD22 showing the state of the intermediate aspect of blinking is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the partial texture of the intermediate aspect is created based on the first partial texture TD21 and the third partial texture TD23. It may be configured. In this case, since it is not necessary to prepare the image data related to the partial texture of the intermediate aspect, the amount of data can be reduced. However, considering the processing load related to the creation of the partial texture of the intermediate mode, it is preferable to prepare the partial texture of the intermediate mode in advance.

In the above configuration, the partial object OB22 is provided, and the positional relationship between the two is set so that the partial object OB22 overlaps with the base object OB21 to realize the blinking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the OB 22 is not provided. In this case, the partial texture TD12 may be directly overwritten on the eye area in the head object OB31. Specifically, the UV coordinates of the partial texture TD12 are set in association with the vertices corresponding to the eye region of the head object OB31 to which the base texture TD11 is pasted, and the partial texture TD12 is pasted in the eye region. Execute the process of attaching. However, since the partial object OB22 is a plate polygon, the number of vertices constituting the partial object OB22 tends to be smaller than the number of vertices forming the eye region in the head object OB31. Therefore, the processing load related to the mapping tends to be lighter in the configuration in which the blinking effect is performed using the partial object OB22.

Further, a plurality of types of textures to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 may be provided, and the textures to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 may be switched according to the situation.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the contents of each of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) The image data required for creating the drawing data is not read from the memory module 133 at the required timing, but is read into the VRAM 134 in advance before the required timing. May be. By performing such pre-reading, it becomes possible to suitably create drawing data. In particular, when a NAND flash memory is used as the memory module 133, the time required for reading tends to be longer than that of the NOR flash memory. Therefore, the pre-reading configuration is applied to such a configuration. Then it is effective. In addition to or in place of the image data used in the VDP 135, the program or data used in the display CPU 131 may be read in advance.

(2) A buffer for the effect in which the drawing data for the effect is written and a buffer for the design in which the drawing data for the pattern is written are separately provided, and when the final generated data is generated, it is used for the background. The drawing data written in the buffer of the above, the drawing data written in the buffer for effect, and the drawing data written in the drawing data for the design may be combined. Further, instead of this, there is a buffer in which drawing data for the first effect is created and a buffer in which drawing data for the second effect is created, and the drawing data for the first effect is for the background. The drawing data may be combined so that the drawing data exists between the drawing data of the above and the drawing data for the design and the drawing data for the second effect exists in the foreground.

(3) The camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data placed in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, a single camera (viewpoint) is used for all image data placed in the world coordinate system. The camera may be set in common.

(4) The image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of a background image, a production image, and a pattern image, but it may be projected in units of a background image and a production image. , The structure may be such that the effect image and the pattern image are projected together in units, or the structure may be such that all are projected together.

(5) The holding information related to the prize in the upper operating port 23 and the holding information related to the winning in the lower operating port 24 are stored separately, and the holding information related to the winning in the lower operating port 24 has priority. A configuration to be digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the pending information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are left and right. It may be a configuration in which both actuation ports are arranged side by side, or a configuration in which both of these operating ports are arranged diagonally. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operating ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port or the winning of the second operating port can be aimed at.

Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 33 has a first display area for displaying the result of the winning / failing determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23, and the acquisition based on the winning of the lower operating port 24. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the hit / miss determination of the reserved information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern in the first display area is based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 is subject to the hit / fail judgment or based on the hit / fail judgment. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game round is terminated. In addition, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area prior to the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 24 or based on the fact that the winning / failing judgment is made. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game round is terminated.

(6) The player depends on the case where the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is the target of the winning / failing judgment and the case where the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is the target of the winning / failing judgment. May be configured so that the profits obtained are different. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in each of the above embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(7) Based on the command output from the main control device 50, instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the voice emission control device 60, based on the command output from the main control device 50. The display control devices 70 and 130 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and one of the two control devices may be provided. Functions may be integrated in the main control device 50, or both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the voice emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

(8) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels as a plurality of orbiters with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, and the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and then stopped. A slot that gives the player benefits such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch. The present invention can also be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reel, the present invention is applied to the control related to the display of images in the display control device. Can be applied.

In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that are equipped with a take-in device and start the rotation of the reel by operating the start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the above is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the update timing is set in advance. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for updating the contents of the image, and
Equipped with
In a gaming machine, the data generation means generates the generated data based on using the image data and applying the parameter data that determines the display mode of the image by the image data.
The data generation means is
Derivation means for deriving the parameter data to be applied when displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images on the display unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2212 in VDP135, or step S2305 in VDP135. , Step S2310, step S2317),
Based on the use of the specific image data in a state where the parameter data derived by the derivation means is applied to the specific image data (object PC17 for particle dispersion), the generated data for displaying the image group on the display unit. Means for image groups that enable generation (a function of executing the processing of steps S2206, S2210 and S2214 in the VDP135, or a function of executing the processing of steps S2307, S2313 and S2319 in the VDP135) and
Equipped with
The derivation means sets the first parameter data (for example, the first key data KD1) applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing and the second update timing after the first update timing. Using the second parameter data (for example, the second key data KD2) applied when displaying the image group, the image group is displayed at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S2208 in the VDP 135 or a function of executing the process of step S2310 in the VDP 135) for deriving the specific parameter data applied when displaying. ..

According to the feature A1, by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images, it is possible to complicate the display contents and increase the interest of the player in the image displayed on the display unit. Become.

In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived by using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data is derived. The data capacity can be reduced in that it is not necessary to store the data in advance, and it is possible to ensure the continuity of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing are the first parameter data and the second parameter as specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. As a result, the parameter data to be referred to when deriving the parameter data among the plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to the same update timing. Therefore, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A2. The image group includes a first individual image (for example, a single particle image PT1) and a second individual image (for example, a single particle image PT2).
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image.
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image.
The specific derivation means is applied when the parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and the case of displaying the second individual image by using the first parameter data and the second parameter data. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the specific parameter data including the parameter data to be obtained is derived.

According to the feature A2, each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data has parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group. Become. As a result, in a configuration in which the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing are collectively derived as specific parameter data, the time is required. When the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image is changed with the progress of the above, it is possible to make the changing mode correspond to each individual image.

Feature A3. The game according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data in a predetermined ratio. Machine.

According to the feature A3, it is possible to derive the specific parameter data while using the first parameter data and the second parameter data as they are.

Feature A4. The image group includes a first individual image and a second individual image.
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image.
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image.
The specific derivation means is
Using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the first specific parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and the second applied when displaying the second individual image. 2 The specific parameter data including the specific parameter data is derived.
Moreover, in the case of deriving the specific parameter data at a specific update timing, the predetermined ratio in the case of deriving the first specific parameter data and the predetermined ratio in the case of deriving the second specific parameter data. The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is characterized by being the same as.

According to the feature A4, each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data has parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group. Become. As a result, in a configuration in which parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is collectively derived as specific parameter data, the time is required. When the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image is changed with the progress of the above, it is possible to make the changing mode correspond to each individual image.

Further, in the configuration in which the specific parameter data is derived so as to include the parameter data corresponding to each individual image in this way, the predetermined ratio used when deriving the first specific parameter data corresponding to the first individual image is used. The predetermined ratio used when deriving the second specific parameter data corresponding to the second individual image is the same. As a result, the information of the predetermined ratio can be used in common, and the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the predetermined ratio is different.

Feature A5. Between the first update timing and the second update timing, there are a plurality of update timings in which the display mode of the image group is changed.
The specific derivation means has the first parameter data and the second parameter at each of a plurality of update timings in which the display mode of the image group is changed between the first update timing and the second update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the specific parameter data is derived using the data.

According to the feature A5, the same specific parameter data is not used for each of the plurality of update timings included between the first update timing and the second update timing, but the specific parameter data is individually specified at each update timing. Is derived, so that the parameter data can be derived so as to gradually approach the second parameter data from the first parameter data. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the image group as a series.

Further, since the parameter data used at each of the plurality of update timings is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the data capacity is compared with the configuration in which the parameter data is stored in advance. Is reduced. Furthermore, since the plurality of parameter data are all derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the type of parameter data to be referred to when deriving the plurality of parameter data is changed. No need arises. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature A6. The specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data in a predetermined ratio.
The data generation means is a ratio determining means (processing of step S2109 in the display CPU 131) for determining the predetermined ratio when the first parameter data and the second parameter data are blended at each of the plurality of update timings. (Or a function to execute the process of step S2309 in VDP135).
The ratio determining means is a change amount of the predetermined ratio when one update timing is changed to the next update timing in the plurality of update timings, and a case where the next update timing is further changed from the next update timing. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the determination is made so that the amount of change in the predetermined ratio is the same.

According to the feature A6, at each of the plurality of update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing, it is only necessary to change the predetermined ratio by a constant amount of change, so that the predetermined ratio is changed. The above configuration is simplified.

Feature A7. It is provided with a drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) that outputs drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information for designating image data and parameter data applied to the image data, which is necessary for displaying an image at one update timing. ,
The display control means causes the image to be displayed according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the display control means has the specific derivation means.

According to the feature A7, since it is not necessary to derive the specific parameter data on the drawing instruction means side, the processing load of the drawing instruction means can be reduced.

Feature A8. One of the features A1 to A7, wherein the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data include coordinate information for determining a position where the image group is displayed. The game machine described in.

According to the feature A8, it is possible to display an image in which the position of each individual image included in the image group changes while achieving the excellent effect as described above.

Feature A9. The coordinate information corresponding to the specific parameter data is on a virtual straight line connecting the position of each individual image included in the image group to the position determined by the first parameter data and the position determined by the second parameter data. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which is characterized by coordinate information.

According to the feature A9, when the image group is displayed as if it is moving from the position determined by the first parameter data to the position determined by the second parameter data, it moves on a straight line connecting both positions. Since it is only necessary to derive the specific parameter data, the processing load at the time of deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced in deriving the specific parameter data using the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Feature A10. The game according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the derivation means is derived by reading the first parameter data and the second parameter data from a storage means (memory module 133). Machine.

According to the feature A10, it is only necessary to read and use the first parameter data at the first update timing and read and use the second parameter data at the second update timing, so that the processing load at those update timings can be reduced. Will be. On the other hand, at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, the specific parameter data may be derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, so that the parameter data is stored accordingly. The amount of data to keep can be reduced. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to perform display using an image group while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature A11. The data generation means is an arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. The image data of the object is projected onto the viewpoint setting means (function for executing the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the data is projected on the projection plane. A drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135) for generating generated data is provided.
The specific image data corresponds to the image data of the object, and each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to each vertex data of the image data of the object. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A10.

According to the feature A11, in a configuration that enables realistic image display using three-dimensional information, one object may be arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space when displaying an image group, so that the processing load can be reduced. However, it is possible to display a group of images.

Feature A12. The arrangement means has drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) that includes information for designating image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least parameter data applied to the image data. ) Is output, and by arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, it is possible to generate the generated data corresponding to the drawing instruction information. It is something to do
When displaying the image group, the drawing instruction means includes the use instruction information of the specific image data in the drawing instruction information.
When the drawing instruction information includes the use instruction information of the specific image data, the arrangement means generates data for displaying the image group by arranging the specific image data in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to feature A11, which is characterized in that it enables generation.

According to the feature A12, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means only needs to include the usage instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information, so that the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. At the same time, the data capacity of drawing instruction information can be reduced.

Feature A13. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the image data of the object is projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is based on the data projected on the projection plane. ), And the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (function for executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135). A storage means for storing (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) that outputs and displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means to the display means (design display device 31), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means has a function of executing processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2212 in VDP135 for deriving parameter data to be applied when displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images on the display unit. Alternatively, the VDP 135 includes step S2305, step S2310, and step S2317).
The arrangement means uses the specific image data in a state where the parameter data derived by the derivation means is applied to the specific image data (object PC17 for particle dispersion), and the image group is displayed on the display unit. Means for image groups that enable generation of generated data to be displayed (a function of executing the processes of steps S2206, S2210 and S2214 in the VDP135, or a function of executing the processes of steps S2307, S2313 and S2319 in the VDP135). When,
Equipped with
The derivation means sets the first parameter data (for example, the first key data KD1) applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing and the second update timing after the first update timing. Using the second parameter data (for example, the second key data KD2) applied when displaying the image group, the image group is displayed at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S2208 in the VDP 135 or a function of executing the process of step S2310 in the VDP 135) for deriving the specific parameter data applied when displaying. ..

According to the feature A13, it is possible to display a realistic image using three-dimensional information, and further, it is possible to complicate the display contents by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit.

In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived by using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data is derived. The data capacity can be reduced in that it is not necessary to store the data in advance, and it is possible to ensure the continuity of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing are the first parameter data and the second parameter as specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. As a result, the parameter data to be referred to when deriving the parameter data among the plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to the same update timing. Therefore, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP135), the image data of the object is projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data is generated based on the data projected on the projection plane. Generated data (drawing data) generated by a data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135). A storage means for storing (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) that outputs and displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means to the display means (design display device 31), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is configured to simultaneously display an image group including a plurality of individual images by using specific generated data.
In the image data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means for displaying the image group, each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group is associated with each vertex data. A gaming machine characterized by being image data of an object (object PC17 for particle dispersion).

According to the feature A14, a realistic image display using three-dimensional information becomes possible. In this case, when displaying the image group, one object may be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, so that the image group can be displayed while reducing the processing load.

Feature A15. The arrangement means has drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) that includes information for designating image data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing and drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least parameter data applied to the image data. ) Is output, and by arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, it is possible to generate the generated data corresponding to the drawing instruction information. It is something to do
When displaying the image group, the drawing instruction means includes the use instruction information of the image data of the specific object in the drawing instruction information.
When the drawing instruction information includes the use instruction information of the image data of the specific object, the arrangement means displays the image group by arranging the image data of the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it enables generation of generated data.

According to the feature A15, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means only needs to include the usage instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information, so that the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. At the same time, the data capacity of drawing instruction information can be reduced.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature A group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set on the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, it is considered that the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit can be increased by complicating the display direction of the individual image or displaying a plurality of individual images at the same time. However, when displaying such an image, it is not preferable that the processing load is extremely increased or the data capacity is extremely increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a good display effect while suppressing a processing load.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the image data of the object is projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is based on the data projected on the projection plane. ), And the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (function for executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135). A storage means for storing (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (VDP135) that displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (design display device 31) and updates the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. Display circuit 155) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data of the object to be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means has data capable of defining a plurality of surfaces, and the three-dimensional shape is formed by the plurality of surface data (surface data SD). Image data of a multi-faceted object (object PC19 for sea surface) that can be defined is included.
The data generation means is
When the image data of the multi-faceted object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to display the multi-faceted image corresponding to the image data of the multi-faceted object over a plurality of update timings, the display mode of the multi-faceted image is changed. As described above, an arrangement mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode of at least a part of the plurality of surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing arithmetic processing for sea surface display in the display CPU 131, for sea surface display in VDP 135). Function to execute the setting process of) and
By changing the color information applied to the surface data whose arrangement mode has been changed by the arrangement mode changing means in units of the surface data according to the arrangement mode of the surface data, at least one of the multifaceted images. Display color changing means (a function to execute color information setting processing for sea surface display in VDP135) that enables image display in which the display color of the area is different between a plurality of update timings, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the arrangement mode of at least a part of the plurality of surface data is changed, and the color information applied to the surface data whose arrangement mode is changed is changed according to the change of the arrangement mode. Will be done. This makes it possible to complicate the display effect and increase the player's interest in the display effect.

Further, the change of the color information is performed in the surface data unit according to the arrangement mode of the surface data. This makes it possible to set the color information according to the arrangement mode of the surface data without storing a large number of textures in advance corresponding to the pattern in which the color information is changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display effect while suppressing the increase in the data capacity.

In addition, the configuration that "when the arrangement mode is changed, the arrangement mode changing means changes at least one of the orientation, the shape, and the size of at least a part of the plurality of surface data" is in the above configuration. included.

Feature B2. The arrangement mode changing means is a means for changing the arrangement mode of a part of the surface data among the plurality of surface data and making the arrangement mode of the other surface data correspond to the change of the arrangement mode for the part of the surface data. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that it is provided with (a function of executing a normal parameter setting process in VDP135).

According to the feature B2, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the surface data while not losing the continuity between the surface data.

Feature B3. The arrangement mode changing means changes a predetermined parameter that is at least one of orientation, shape, and size for discontinuous surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) in which the corresponding regions in the multifaceted image are not continuous with each other. Means for making the predetermined parameter of the surface data (surface data SD2 for buffering) in which the corresponding region in the multi-faceted image corresponds to the region corresponding to the discontinuous surface data correspond to the discontinuous surface data. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it is provided with (a function of executing a normal parameter setting process in VDP135).

According to the feature B3, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the surface data while not losing the continuity between the surface data. In particular, the target for which the arrangement mode is positively changed is the discontinuous surface data, and the surface data continuous with the discontinuous surface data is separated by corresponding to the discontinuous surface data. Compared with the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed without performing the adjustment, the processing load required for the adjustment for ensuring the continuity between the surface data can be reduced.

As a more specific configuration of the above feature B3,
"Each surface data is defined by a plurality of vertex data, and the predetermined plurality of surface data share some vertex data with each other.
The arrangement mode changing means changes a predetermined parameter, which is at least one of orientation, shape, and size, with respect to the surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) that does not share the vertex data with each other, and changes them. Means for associating the predetermined parameter of the surface data (surface data SD2 for buffering) that shares the target surface data and the vertex data with the surface data to be changed (normal parameter setting process in VDP135). Has a function to execute) "
The configuration is conceivable.

Feature B4. Each of the surface data is defined by a plurality of vertex data, and the predetermined plurality of surface data share a part of the vertex data with each other.
The feature B1 or the means for changing the arrangement mode is characterized in that at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of the surface data is changed by individually changing the coordinates of the vertex data. The gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, by changing the coordinates of one vertex data, it is possible to change at least one of the orientation, shape and size of the plurality of surface data. By controlling the parameters in units of vertex data instead of controlling the parameters in units of surface data in this way, it is not necessary to set a processing configuration to ensure continuity between surface data. It is possible to individually control the arrangement mode.

Feature B5. The arrangement mode changing means is
Data for reading individual control data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) from a storage means (memory module 133), which makes it possible to individually change each arrangement mode of the plurality of surface data. Reading means (function to execute step S2503 in VDP135) and
A function of executing the processing of the application changing means (step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512 in VDP135) in which the mode in which the individual control data is applied to the image data of the multifaceted object is different between the plurality of update timings. )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4.

According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode of the surface data is changed by using the individual control data stored in advance, the display mode of the multi-faceted image is changed between a plurality of update timings while using the individual control data. It is possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature B6. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data is applied to the surface data or data that defines the surface data.
The application changing means changes the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data in the image data of the multifaceted object according to the switching of the update timing (in VDP135). The gaming machine according to feature B5, which comprises a function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511, and step S2512).

According to the feature B6, since the display mode of the multi-faceted image is changed between a plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data, the individual control data. It is possible to reduce the processing load in a configuration in which the display mode of the multi-faceted image is changed while using the above.

Feature B7. The application changing means is a plurality of application means (step S2506, step S2507 in VDP135) for reflecting the contents of a plurality of the unit control data for one data of the target to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multifaceted object. , The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S2511 and step S2512).

According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed while referring to the unit control data, the arrangement mode to be changed can be diversified.

Feature B8. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data is applied to the surface data or data that defines the surface data.
The data reading means reads a plurality of the individual control data from the storage means.
The application change means
A plurality of application means (step S2507 and step in VDP135) for reflecting the content of each unit control data of the plurality of individual control data with respect to one data of the target to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multifaceted object. Function to execute the processing of S2512) and
In the image data of the multi-faceted object, the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data is changed according to the switching of the update timing, and the change of the correspondence is changed to the plurality of individual control data. Correspondence relationship changing means (function for executing the processing of step S2506 and step S2511 in VDP135) and
The gaming machine according to the feature B5 or B6, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B5 or B6.

According to the feature B8, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the individual control data at the game machine design stage.

Feature B9. The arrangement mode changing means is
With the first changing means for collectively changing the arrangement mode of a group of data including the plurality of surface data (a function of executing arithmetic processing for sea level display in the display CPU 131, a function of executing steps S2504 and S2509 in VDP135). ,
Processing of the second changing means (step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512 in VDP135) for individually changing the arrangement mode of each surface data included in the group of data whose arrangement mode is changed by the first changing means. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to the feature B9, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in the surface data unit in a complicated manner while changing the arrangement mode along a large flow.

In addition, as a more specific configuration that causes such an action and effect, "the type of the arrangement mode changed by the first changing means is at least one of the position, the orientation, and the size, and the second changing means. The type of arrangement mode changed by the means includes at least a part of the types of arrangement targets changed by the first changing means. "

Further, the configuration "the image data of the multi-faceted object includes a plurality of data of the group, and the first changing means individually changes the arrangement mode of the data of the plurality of groups". Conceivable.

Feature B10. The display color changing means is
A classification specifying means (step S2702-step in VDP135) for specifying whether or not the color information applied to the surface data is included in the predetermined classification according to the layout mode to be changed by the layout mode changing means. Function to execute S2705) and
Color information for selecting color information applied to the surface data specified to be included in the predetermined category by the category specifying means from a plurality of stages of color information based on a parameter of a type different from the arrangement mode. Selection means (function to execute steps S2706 and S2707 in VDP135) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the feature B10, the color information is determined based on the parameters different from the arrangement mode while changing the color information according to the arrangement mode, so that the color information can be set in a complicated manner. This makes it possible to realize a realistic image display.

Feature B11. The arrangement mode changing means at least changes the orientation of the surface data.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the display color changing means changes the color information applied to the surface data based on the angle of the surface data with respect to the viewpoint. ..

According to the feature B11, it is possible to set the color information according to the orientation of the surface, and it is possible to realistically display the multi-faceted image.

Feature B12. The display color changing means is
A category specifying means (step S2702- in VDP135) for specifying whether or not the color information applied to the surface data is included in the predetermined category according to the orientation of the surface data changed by the arrangement mode changing means. Function to execute step S2705) and
Color information selection that selects color information applied to the surface data specified to be included in the predetermined category by the category specifying means from a plurality of stages of color information based on a parameter of a type different from the orientation. Means (function to execute steps S2706 and S2707 in VDP135) and
The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature B12, the color information is determined based on a parameter different from the orientation of the surface while changing the color information according to the orientation of the surface, so that the color information can be set in a complicated manner. This makes it possible to realistically display a multi-faceted image.

Feature B13. The color information selection means obtains color information applied to the surface data specified to be included in the predetermined category by the category specifying means in a plurality of stages of color information based on a distance in a predetermined direction from the viewpoint. The gaming machine according to feature B12, which is characterized in that it is selected from among them.

According to the feature B13, since the color information changes not only according to the orientation of the surface but also according to the position of the surface, it is possible to realistically display the multi-faceted image.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature B group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the object. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the interest of the player in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the update timing is set in advance. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for updating the contents of the image, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display mode of the image in the display unit includes a mode in which the player recognizes that a plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generation means is an individual image displayed so that the player can recognize that it exists on the front side in the depth direction with respect to a predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the back side in the depth direction. The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in, is contoured as compared with the image recognized by the player as being present at the reference position. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a blur setting means (a function of executing an adjustment process for focusing effect in VDP135) so that a line becomes blurred and is displayed in a blurred state.

According to the feature C1, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

Feature C2. The data generation means generates the generated data based on setting the image data, and further sets the image data in a state where the depth parameter corresponding to the display position in the depth direction is applied. Based on this, the display mode is such that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction.
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set.
The blur setting means is
Parameter derivation means (steps S3101 to S3107 in VDP135) for deriving the depth parameter for each of the data corresponding to the image data set in the setting storage means and generating the unit data is executed. Function to do) and
By executing the blur generation process for the data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position, the blur execution is performed so that the image portion corresponding to the data is displayed in a blurred state. Means (function to execute steps S310 to S3115 in VDP135) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature C2, since it is not necessary to store the image data for the blurred state in advance, it is possible to display the image in the blurred state while reducing the data capacity. Further, since the depth parameter is derived for each of the data that causes each unit data, it is possible to finely control the display of the blurred state.

Feature C3. The display effect in the display means includes a blur display effect in which the display in the blurred state is performed over a plurality of update timings.
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the parameter derivation means derives the depth parameter at each of one update timing and another update timing of the blur display effect. ..

According to the feature C3, it is possible to change the display in the blurred state according to the progress of the display effect.

Feature C4. The data generation means is an arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. 2D information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the viewpoint setting means (function for executing the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. It is provided with a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135) for generating generated data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of the above.
The parameter derivation means derives the depth parameter for each unit data included in the projected two-dimensional information data.
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the blur execution means executes the blur generation process using the depth parameter with respect to the data of the two-dimensional information after projection. ..

According to the feature C4, since the depth parameter is derived and the blur generation processing is performed not for the three-dimensional information data but for the two-dimensional information data, the processing load is reduced. However, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Feature C5. The blur execution means, as the blur generation process, is a process of blending the color information of the unit data included in the two-dimensional information data after projection with the color information of the surrounding unit data (steps S3206 and S3212 in VDP135). The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the function of executing step S3217) is executed.

According to the feature C5, since the process of blending is executed when the blur occurs, it is possible to display the blurred state according to the type of the image displayed in the display effect of the blurred state. , It is possible to preferably display the blurred state. In this case, since the blending process is not performed on the three-dimensional information data but on the two-dimensional information data, the blurred state is displayed while reducing the processing load. Can be preferably performed.

Feature C6. The data generation means is an arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. 2D information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the viewpoint setting means (function for executing the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. It is provided with a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135) for generating generated data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of the above.
The blur setting means is characterized in that the target individual image is displayed in a blurred state by executing a blur generation process on the data of the two-dimensional information after projection. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5.

According to the feature C6, since the blurring generation process is not performed on the three-dimensional information data but on the two-dimensional information data, the processing load is reduced as described above. It is possible to achieve an excellent effect.

Feature C7. When the blur setting means displays in the blurred state, the special images (individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching) are present at positions deviated from the reference position in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, which is characterized in that it is excluded from the display target in the blurred state even if it is displayed so as to be recognized by the player.

According to feature C7, when displaying in a blurred state, the display in a uniformly blurred state is applied to individual images that are displayed as if they exist at a position deviated from the reference position. Attempting to do so may make it difficult for the player to recognize the information to be recognized. On the other hand, the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state regardless of whether or not it is displayed as if it exists at the reference position, which causes the above-mentioned inconvenience. It is possible to realize the display in a blurred state while suppressing the occurrence of.

The special image includes a teaching image used to teach the player the game situation.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the special image is an image displayed so that the player can recognize that the special image exists on the front side in the depth direction with respect to the reference position.

According to the feature C8, in the configuration in which the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the special image is intentionally excluded. Therefore, it is possible to exclude the special image from the display target in the blurred state without giving a sense of discomfort to the display effect in the blurred state.

Feature C9. Equipped with an operation receiving means (operation device 48 for directing) that accepts operations by the player.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the blur setting means changes the reference position based on the operation of the player with respect to the operation receiving means.

According to the feature C9, the standardization of the display effect in the blurred state is suppressed, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display effect.

Feature C10. The blur setting means does not display the blurred state during the predetermined first display period (game times), and the processing load of the processing excluding the processing required for displaying the blurred state is the first display. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the blurred state is displayed in a second display period (round game) lower than the period.

According to the feature C10, it is suppressed that the processing load of the update timing in the case of displaying the blurred state is extremely increased.

Feature C11. The data generation means generates the generated data based on setting the image data.
The blur setting means blends at least a part of the color information determined by the image data with the surrounding color information so that the target individual image is displayed in a blurred state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10.

According to the feature C11, since the process of blending is executed when the blurring occurs, it is possible to display the blurred state according to the type of the image displayed in the display effect of the blurred state. , It is possible to preferably display the blurred state.

Feature C12. The data generation means generates the generated data based on setting the image data, and further sets the image data in a state where the depth parameter corresponding to the display position in the depth direction is applied. Based on this, the display mode is such that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction.
The blur setting means blurs the target individual image corresponding to the image data by executing a blur generation process on the image data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position. It is intended to be displayed in the state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the reference parameter has a predetermined parameter range so that the reference position corresponds to the predetermined range in the depth direction.

According to the feature C12, it is possible to display a blurred state with the depth of field widened to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the blurred state.

Feature C13. The blur setting means exists at a position farther in the depth direction than the predetermined distance from an image recognized by the player as being present at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the depth direction from the reference position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12, characterized in that the image recognized by the player is displayed in a blurred state to a greater degree.

According to the feature C13, it is possible to display the blurred state more realistically.

Feature C14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the image data of the object is projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is based on the data projected on the projection plane. ), And the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (function for executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135). A storage means for storing (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) that outputs and displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means to the display means (design display device 31), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display mode of the image in the display unit includes a mode in which the player recognizes that a plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generation means is an individual image displayed so that the player can recognize that it exists on the front side in the depth direction with respect to a predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the back side in the depth direction. The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in, is contoured as compared with the image recognized by the player as being present at the reference position. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a blur setting means (a function of executing an adjustment process for focusing effect in VDP135) so that a line becomes blurred and is displayed in a blurred state.

According to the feature C14, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the object. Drawing data is created by projecting an object with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the player's attention to the display effect, it is preferable to display a more realistic image, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the update timing is set in advance. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for updating the contents of the image, and
Equipped with
In a gaming machine, the data generation means generates the generated data based on using the image data and applying the parameter data that determines the display mode of the image by the image data.
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set.
The data generation means is a set data derivation means (step in VDP135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generation unit data that generates each unit data. A function for executing S2503 and a function for executing steps S3101 to S3107 in VDP135) are provided, and each unit parameter data included in the aggregate data derived by the aggregate data derivation means is applied to the generation unit data. By generating the generated data and changing at least one of the method of applying the aggregated data and the content of the aggregated data to be applied, the generated data in which the same type of individual images are displayed in different modes is generated. A game machine characterized by being something to do.

According to the feature D1, since each unit parameter data group is treated as a set data, the processing can be simplified with respect to the handling of the data. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying the set data and the content of the set data to be applied, the generated data in which the same type of individual image is displayed in different modes is generated. It is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the amount of image data stored in advance.

Feature D2. The set data derivation means derives the set data by reading the set data (first normal map data ND1 and second normal map data ND2) from the storage means (memory module 133). The gaming machine according to the feature D1.

According to the feature D2, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load.

Feature D3. The data generation means is an arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. 2D information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the viewpoint setting means (function for executing the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. It is provided with a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135) for generating generated data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of the above.
The set data (first normal map data ND1 and second normal map data ND2) derived by the set data derivation means is applied to the image data of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that it is played.

According to the feature D3, since it is possible to change the arrangement mode of the image data of the three-dimensional information by using the set data, it is possible to perform a more complicated image display while realizing a realistic image display. It becomes. In this case, in the case of performing the complicated image display, since the configuration uses the aggregate data as described above, it is possible to balance both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D4. The set data derivation means derives the set data (blurring map data) by specifying the unit parameter data (Z value) corresponding to the set state in the state where the image data is set. It is a thing
The data generation means is characterized in that the generated data is generated based on applying the derived set data to the data created from the image data. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature D4, since it is not necessary to store the set data in advance, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D5. Described in feature D4, the set data deriving means derives the set data corresponding to each of the generated data in a situation where the generated data is generated using the set data. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D5, it is possible to use different set data at each update timing, and it is possible to diversify the display effect. Further, even in this case, since the set data is not stored in advance but is created each time, it is possible to diversify the display effect while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D6. The data generation means is an arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. 2D information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the viewpoint setting means (function for executing the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. It is provided with a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135) for generating generated data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of the above.
The set data derivation means derives the set data (blurring map data) by specifying the unit parameter data (Z value) according to the placement mode of the image data of the object by the placement means. The gaming machine according to the feature D4 or D5.

According to feature D6, in a configuration that realizes a realistic image display by using image data of three-dimensional information, aggregate data is created according to a data setting mode that enables the realistic image display. , It is possible to prevent the use of aggregate data from adversely affecting the realistic image display.

Feature D7. The data generation means is an arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) for arranging image data of an object which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. 2D information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the viewpoint setting means (function for executing the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. It is provided with a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135) for generating generated data which is two-dimensional information based on the data of the above.
The description in any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the set data (blurred map data) derived by the set data derivation means is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information after projection. Game machine.

According to the feature D7, since the set data is not applied to the data of the three-dimensional information but is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information, the above is made while reducing the processing load. It is possible to produce excellent effects such as.

Feature D8. The data generation means has different display modes of the same type of individual images among a plurality of update timings when the unit parameter data of the aggregate data is applied to the unit data for generation. It is provided with a generation execution means (a function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511, and step S2512 in VDP135, and a function of executing steps S101 to S1012) to generate the generated data corresponding to the change. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to change the display mode of the same type of individual image between a plurality of update timings while using a single set data. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D9. The generation execution means changes the correspondence between each unit parameter data and each generation unit data according to the switching of the update timing (step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S in VDP135). The gaming machine according to feature D8, which is characterized by having a function of executing the process of S2512).

According to the feature D9, since the display mode of the image is changed between a plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the unit parameter data and the unit data for generation, the image is displayed while using the aggregate data. It is possible to reduce the processing load in the configuration that changes the mode.

Feature D10. The generation execution means is a plurality of application means (steps S2506 and S2507 in VDP135) that reflect the contents of a plurality of unit parameter data with respect to one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each generation unit data. , The gaming machine according to feature D8 or D9, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S2511 and step S2512).

According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which the display mode is changed while referring to the unit parameter data, the display mode to be changed can be diversified.

Feature D11. The set data derivation means derives a plurality of the set data.
The generation execution means is
A plurality of application means (step S2507 and step S2512 in VDP135) for reflecting the content of each unit parameter data of the plurality of aggregate data for one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each generation unit data. Function to execute the processing of) and
In each of the generation unit data, the correspondence between the target data to which the unit parameter data is applied and the unit parameter data is changed according to the switching of the update timing, and the change of the correspondence is changed of the plurality of set data. Correspondence relationship changing means (function for executing the process of step S2506 and step S2511 in VDP135) to be performed for each, and
The gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature D11, it is possible to change the display mode in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the set data at the game machine design stage.

Feature D12. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the image data of the object is projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is based on the data projected on the projection plane. ), And the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (function for executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135). A storage means for storing (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) that outputs and displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means to the display means (design display device 31), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set.
The data generation means is a set data derivation means (step in VDP135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generation unit data that generates each unit data. A function for executing S2503 and a function for executing steps S3101 to S3107 in VDP135) are provided, and each unit parameter data included in the aggregate data derived by the aggregate data derivation means is applied to the generation unit data. By generating the generated data and changing at least one of the method of applying the aggregated data and the content of the aggregated data to be applied, the generated data in which the same type of individual images are displayed in different modes is generated. A game machine characterized by being something to do.

According to the feature D12, since each unit parameter data group is treated as a set data, the processing can be simplified with respect to the handling of the data. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying the set data and the content of the set data to be applied, the generated data in which the same type of individual image is displayed in different modes is generated. It is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the amount of image data stored in advance.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature D group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the object. Drawing data is created by projecting an object with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the interest of the player in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 in VDP135) and the image data of the object is projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is based on the data projected on the projection plane. ), And the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (function for executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in VDP135). A storage means for storing (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (VDP135) that displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (design display device 31) and updates the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. Display circuit 155) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means includes a texture setting means (a function of executing a texture mapping process for a special character in VDP) for setting a texture image data with respect to the image data of the object.
Predetermined object data (special object PC20) used when displaying a predetermined individual image (special character) is included as image data of the object, and is further set for the predetermined object data as image data of the texture. Predetermined texture data (first partial texture PC21 to PC23, second partial texture PC24 to PC27) is included.
The predetermined texture data is
The first texture data (first part texture PC21 to PC23) set for the first part data (main body part part BP) of the predetermined object data, and
The second texture data (second part textures PC24 to PC27) set for the second part data (attached parts parts AP1 to AP4) of the predetermined object data, and
Is included,
The texture setting means is
A first setting means (a function of executing steps S3401 to S3403 in VDP135) for changing the type of the first texture data set for the first part data, and
When the second texture data is set for the second part data, the second setting means (steps S3405 to S3409 in VDP135) for changing the setting positional relationship of the second texture data with respect to the second part data is performed. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when changing the appearance of a predetermined individual image, the type of the first texture data that is a part of the texture data is changed instead of changing the types of the texture data to be set collectively. The second texture data, which is another part of the texture data, has a configuration in which the set positional relationship with respect to the second part data is changed. As a result, the appearance of a part of the predetermined individual image can be changed in a complicated manner, and the data capacity of the other part can be reduced instead of reducing the complexity of the change in the appearance. Therefore, it is possible to change the appearance of the predetermined individual image as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the ratio occupied by the second part data in the predetermined individual image is smaller than the ratio occupied by the first part data.

According to the feature E2, the area where the set positional relationship is changed instead of the texture data type is less changed when the appearance is changed than the area where the type is changed instead of the set positional relationship of the texture data. However, since the former area is smaller, it is possible to make the player recognize that the appearance of the predetermined individual image as a whole has changed significantly.

Feature E3. In the area occupied by the first part data in the predetermined individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data, there is an image portion (eye or mouth pattern portion) in which the relative position with respect to the specific outer edge portion does not change in the predetermined individual image. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature E3, since the image portion that is not preferable when the relative position changes is set as the first texture data, it is possible to suitably change the appearance of the region including the image portion.

Feature E4. The second texture data is characterized in that the color information set in one boundary portion has continuity with respect to the color information set in the boundary portion on the opposite side. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

According to the feature E4, when the setting positional relationship of the second texture data is changed, it is possible to prevent the boundary of the pattern from being generated in the predetermined individual image.

Feature E5. There are a plurality of combinations of the second part data and the second texture data.
The second setting means is characterized in that when the setting positional relationship of one of the second texture data is changed, the setting positional relationship of the other second texture data is changed, the features E1 to E4. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature E5, in a configuration in which a plurality of second texture data exist, the processing load required for setting the second texture data can be reduced.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature E group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the object. Generated data is generated by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the interest of the player in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
A display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU131, VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image, and stores the compressed moving image data.
The display control means is
An expansion means (video decoder) that expands any of the moving image data into the expansion area and creates still image data for multiple update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data.
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings expanded by the expansion means in the order specified in the moving image data, one moving image corresponding to the moving image data can be used for the plurality of update timings. Display effect execution means for executing display effect to be displayed over the period of (a function of executing arithmetic processing for round effect in the display CPU 131, a function of executing setting process for round effect and mapping process for round effect in VDP135). When,
Equipped with
The display effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a display effect of a plurality of types of display patterns using the moving image of 1 by inserting a predetermined image in a specific period of a part of the effect period of the display effect. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the feature F1, by executing the display effect of a plurality of types of display patterns using one moving image, the amount of data required for the display effect is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is prepared for each display effect. Can be planned. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data while diversifying the display effect.

Feature F2. The display storage means stores predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) that is image data used for displaying the predetermined image and has a smaller amount of data than the moving image data.
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the display effect executing means can display the predetermined image using the predetermined image data in the specific period.

According to the feature F2, a predetermined image is displayed using the predetermined image data. The predetermined image data is set to a data amount smaller than that of the moving image data. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display effect with a smaller amount of data as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is prepared for each display effect.

Further, the configuration in which the predetermined image is displayed using the predetermined image data is compared with the configuration in which the predetermined image is created and displayed, and the process related to the creation of the predetermined image does not need to be executed. The processing load related to the display of a predetermined image tends to be light. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load required to display a predetermined image while reducing the amount of data related to the display effect, and it is possible to balance the reduction in the amount of data and the processing load.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the display effect executing means displays the predetermined image in place of the image related to the moving image in the specific period.

According to the feature F3, an image related to a moving image may be displayed or a predetermined image may be displayed in a specific period. As a result, it is possible to use the display of the image related to one moving image as one of the display patterns of the display effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect with a small amount of data.

As a specific configuration of this feature, it is conceivable that "the display effect executing means overwrites the predetermined image on the image related to the moving image 1 in the specific period". According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a predetermined image in place of the image related to one moving image without performing any special processing in the processing related to the moving image display.

Features F4. The display effect executing means is characterized in that a composite image is created by superimposing the image related to the moving image of 1 and the predetermined image in the specific period, and the composite image is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the feature F4, a composite image of the image related to the moving image 1 and the predetermined image is displayed. Therefore, the image related to the moving image 1 is used to display an image different from the image related to the moving image 1. be able to.

In particular, due to the characteristics of moving image data, it is necessary for the moving image data to hold continuous data for each update timing. In this respect, according to this feature, by creating a composite image using the continuous data, the continuous data can be suitably used, and the amount of data related to the entire display effect can be reduced. It can be preferably performed.

Further, according to the relationship with the feature F2, the display area of the predetermined image can be made smaller as compared with the configuration in which the image is displayed only with the predetermined image, so that the amount of the predetermined image data can be reduced. be able to. As a result, the amount of data required to display a predetermined image can be reduced.

Feature F5. Arrangement means for arranging image data of objects in virtual 3D space (function to execute setting processing for round effect in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting viewpoint in the virtual 3D space (camera coordinate system in VDP135) The generated data is generated using the projection data created by projecting the image data onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the direction in which the viewpoint faces. When a plurality of the image data are lined up in the row, the drawing setting means for reflecting the portion of each lined up portion having a small distance from the viewpoint in the direction facing the viewpoint in the generated data ( A function for executing drawing data creation processing for production in VDP135) and a storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data (drawing data) generated by the VDP135 are provided.
The display control means causes the display unit to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means.
The display storage means stores predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) that is image data used for displaying the predetermined image and has a smaller amount of data than the moving image data.
The object
The first object (object for moving image) to which the still image data generated from the moving image data is pasted as a texture, and
A second object (object for insertion) to which the predetermined image data is pasted as a texture, and
Is included,
The arrangement means arranges each object so that the distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint faces is smaller for the second object than for the first object in the specific period. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4.

According to the feature F5, the still image data generated from the moving image data is pasted as a texture on the first object, and the still image data is updated every time the update timing is reached, so that one moving image is obtained. Is displayed. Further, a predetermined image is displayed by pasting the predetermined image data as a texture on the second object. In this case, since the second object related to the predetermined image is arranged on the front side of the first object related to the moving image 1, the predetermined image is overlapped with the image related to the moving image 1 due to the configuration of the hidden surface elimination. Is displayed. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed in place of the image related to the moving image 1 or the image related to the moving image 1 and the predetermined image are combined by using the configuration of the hidden surface erasing for displaying the three-dimensional image. Can be made to.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein each object is a plate-shaped object to which each texture is attached to at least one surface.

According to the feature F6, the processing load can be reduced by using a plate-shaped object having a relatively small processing load as a target for pasting each image data.

Feature F7. The moving image data includes a first unit moving image data (first round moving image data RMD0a) and a second unit moving image data (second round moving image data RMD0b) divided into predetermined units. Ori,
The display effect executing means displays the moving image based on the first unit moving image data, and then displays the moving image based on the second unit moving image data based on the elapse of the specific period. It displays a video,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the display effect executing means displays the predetermined image over the specific period.

According to the feature F7, one moving image is displayed using at least the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data instead of using a single moving image data. Thereby, for example, it is possible to execute the expansion process for the first unit moving image data at the start of the moving image display of 1 above, and then execute the expansion process for the second unit moving image data. It becomes. In this case, it is possible to suppress the local increase in the processing load when starting the moving image display in 1 above, as compared with the configuration in which the expansion of the dual motion image data is performed collectively.

In such a configuration, the predetermined image is displayed over a predetermined period provided between the moving image display by the first unit moving image data and the moving image display by the second unit moving image data. As a result, the moving image display related to each divided moving image data is continuously displayed via the predetermined image, and the player can be made to recognize it as one moving image.

Further, according to such a configuration, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the processing related to the moving image display and the processing related to the predetermined image display. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to image display.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the display effect executing means can change the predetermined image to be displayed in the specific period.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to recognize that the display effect is different by changing the predetermined image to be displayed in a specific period each time the display effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the display pattern of the display effect.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "the display storage means stores a plurality of types of predetermined image data having different display contents, and the display effect executing means has the plurality of types. It is provided with a selection means for selecting any one of the predetermined image data, and the predetermined image data selected by the selection means is used to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data selected by the selection means in the specific period. The configuration is conceivable.

Features F9. The display effect executing means is such that when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the moving image is repeatedly displayed a plurality of times, and the moving image is displayed a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times. In the specific period in the above, the first predetermined image is displayed as the predetermined image, and in the specific period in the moving image display of the number of times different from the moving image display of the predetermined number of times, the second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed. The gaming machine according to the feature F8, which is characterized in that the image is displayed.

According to the feature F9, the moving image display may be repeatedly executed. In this case, since the predetermined image to be displayed is different between the moving image display of the predetermined number of times and the moving image display of the number of times different from the predetermined number of times, the display effect having different variations as a whole is executed. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the display effect due to the repeated display effect.

Feature F10. A determination means (a function for executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 50) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined lottery opportunity.
When the determination result of the determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state (game state transition processing in the main control device 50). Function to execute) and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the specific unit game that starts at a predetermined timing of the specific game state and continues until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is repeatedly performed a plurality of times.
The display effect executing means is executed every time the specific unit game is performed, and different predetermined images are displayed according to the number of times the specific unit game is executed in one specific game state. The gaming machine according to the feature F8 or the feature F9, which is characterized by being capable of.

According to the feature F10, the specific unit game is repeated a plurality of times during the specific game state. In this case, each time a specific unit game is played, a display effect using one moving image is executed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific unit game is repeatedly performed by repeatedly executing the display effect.

In this case, when the same display effect is executed, the player's attention to the display effect decreases. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a completely different display effect is executed, the inconvenience of increasing the amount of data may occur.

On the other hand, according to this feature, by making a predetermined image different according to the number of executions of the specific unit game, a variation can be made using the moving image data of 1 in the specific game state in which the specific unit game is repeatedly performed. It is possible to execute different display effects, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided.

The above-mentioned feature F group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display unit, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. In such a game machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit using the image data read from the memory.

Further, as image data, a configuration including moving image data is also known. Since the amount of moving image data is larger than that of still image data, it is stored in the image data memory in a compressed state. When playing a moving image related to the compressed moving image data, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area using a decoder to obtain a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are updated. It is necessary to use them in a predetermined order each time the timing is reached.

Here, in order to diversify the display effect, it may be desired to play a plurality of types of moving images. In this case, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of types of moving image data, decode any one of the plurality of types of moving image data, and reproduce the moving image related to the moving image data. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the amount of moving image data will increase.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
A display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU131, VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image, and stores the compressed moving image data.
The display control means is
An expansion means (video decoder) that expands any of the moving image data into the expansion area and creates still image data for multiple update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data.
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings expanded by the expansion means in the order specified in the moving image data, the moving image of the image corresponding to the moving image data can be used for the plurality of update timings. Video display execution means (function to execute setting processing for video in VDP135) to be displayed over the display period of
Equipped with
The moving image data is divided into a plurality of unit moving image data according to the mode of the moving image displayed by the moving image data.
The moving image display executing means displays a series of moving images by sequentially displaying moving images based on the unit moving image data in a predetermined order.
Each unit moving image data is characterized in that the amount of data allocated to each unit moving image data is different depending on the mode of each moving image displayed by the unit moving image data. A game machine to play.

According to the feature G1, a series of moving images are displayed by sequentially using each unit moving image data instead of using a single moving image data. As a result, for example, at the start of the series of moving image display, one unit moving image data can be subjected to the expansion process, and then the other unit moving image data can be expanded. It will be possible. In this case, it is possible to suppress the local increase in the processing load when starting the above-mentioned series of moving image display, as compared with the configuration in which the expansion of both unit moving image data is performed collectively.

In such a configuration, the amount of data allocated to each unit moving image data differs depending on the mode of the moving image displayed by each unit moving image data. As a result, the image quality can be adjusted according to the mode of the moving image, so that the image quality can be efficiently adjusted.

Feature G2. The display period includes a first section and a second section in which the mode of the moving image is different.
The unit moving image data includes
The first unit moving image data (first round moving image data RMD0a) corresponding to the first section and
The second unit moving image data (second round moving image data RMD0b) corresponding to the second section and
Is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the amount of data for displaying an image per unit period is set to be different between the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data.

According to the feature G2, by making the amount of data for displaying the image per unit period of each unit moving image data different, the moving image is suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of the image quality of the moving image displayed by each unit moving image data. It is possible to reduce the amount of data of the entire image data.

Feature G3. The first section and the second section are a large change section and a small change section in which the amount of change in the image between each update timing is relatively large or small.
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the first unit moving image data has a larger amount of data for displaying an image per unit period than the second unit moving image data.

According to the feature G3, a relatively large amount of data is allocated to the first unit moving image data corresponding to a large change section in which the amount of change in the image is relatively large, so that block noise, mosquito noise, etc. are generated. It's hard to do.

On the other hand, since a relatively small amount of data is allocated to the second unit moving image data corresponding to the small change section in which the amount of change in the image is relatively small, the data amount of the second unit moving image data can be reduced. Can be planned.

Features G4. The first section and the second section are a high-definition section and a low-definition section in which the fineness of the image related to the still image data is relatively high and low.
The first unit moving image data is described in feature G2 or feature G3, which is characterized in that a larger amount of data for displaying an image per unit period is set than the second unit moving image data. Gaming machine.

According to the feature G4, a relatively large amount of data is allocated to the first unit moving image data corresponding to the high-definition section having a relatively high image fineness, so that block noise, mosquito noise, etc. are generated. It's hard to do.

On the other hand, for the second unit moving image data corresponding to the low-definition section where the fineness of the image is relatively low, a relatively small amount of data will be allocated, so the data amount of the second unit moving image data can be reduced. Can be planned.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, wherein the update timing interval is set to be the same regardless of each section.

According to the feature G5, since the update timing interval is set to be the same regardless of each section, only the processing amount related to the change is compared with the configuration in which the update timing interval is changed according to each section. , The processing load related to the display of the moving image can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced by the amount of the program that executes the processing related to the change.

Even in this case, by adjusting the amount of data for displaying the image per unit period, it is possible to compress the total amount of moving image data to a predetermined amount while suppressing the deterioration of the image quality. can.

Feature G6. Predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) corresponding to a predetermined image is stored in the display storage means.
The display control means is
A predetermined image display executing means for displaying the predetermined image on the display unit using the predetermined image data (a function of executing the process of steps S351 to S3516 of the display CPU 131, steps S3704 to S3707, and steps S3804 to VDP135). The function of executing the process of step S3807) is provided, and the moving image and the predetermined image can be displayed at the same time by simultaneously executing both the moving image display executing means and the predetermined image display executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature G6, by combining a moving image and a predetermined image, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the image.

In this case, in order to display the moving image and the predetermined image at the same time, it is necessary to execute the processing related to the display control of both the moving image display and the predetermined image display. Therefore, there is a concern that the processing load will increase.

On the other hand, according to the relationship with the feature G5, the processing load during display of the moving image can be reduced by the amount of the processing load related to the change of the update timing interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent processing failure when both a moving image and a predetermined image are displayed at the same time.

Feature G7. Predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) corresponding to a predetermined image is stored in the display storage means.
When the moving image display executing means displays a moving image based on a predetermined unit moving image data among the plurality of unit moving image data, a predetermined period has elapsed from the moving image display based on the predetermined unit moving image data. Based on this, the video based on the subsequent unit moving image data is displayed.
The display control means is
It is characterized in that it is provided with means for displaying the predetermined image on the display unit using the predetermined image data for the predetermined period (a function of executing the processes of steps S3912 to S3915 in the display CPU 131). The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G5.

According to the feature G7, a predetermined image is displayed for a predetermined period provided between the moving image display by the predetermined unit moving image data and the subsequent moving image display by the unit moving image data. As a result, the moving image display related to the divided double-unit moving image data is continuously displayed via the predetermined image, and the player can be made to recognize it as a series of moving images.

Further, according to such a configuration, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the processing related to the moving image display and the processing related to the predetermined image display. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to image display.

The above-mentioned feature G group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display unit, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. In such a game machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit using the image data read from the memory.

Further, as image data, a configuration including moving image data is also known. Since the amount of moving image data is larger than that of still image data, it is stored in the image data memory in a compressed state. When playing a moving image related to the compressed moving image data, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area using a decoder to obtain a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are updated. It is necessary to use them in a predetermined order each time the timing is reached.

Here, due to the relationship between the storage capacity of the memory for image data and other image data, it may be necessary to compress the data amount of the moving image data to a predetermined set amount. In this case, depending on the compression mode of the moving image data, there may be a disadvantage that the image quality of the moving image using the moving image data is lowered and the degree of attention to the moving image is lowered.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. An image data storage means (memory module 133) in which various image data including image data of an object and image data of a texture attached to the object are stored, and an arrangement means (VDP135) for arranging the object in a virtual three-dimensional space. (Function for executing the processes of step S4602, step S4609, and step S4610) and the viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (conversion process to the camera coordinate system and conversion process to the field coordinate system in VDP135). (Function to be executed), a pasting means for pasting the texture to the object (a function to execute the color information setting process in VDP135), and the texture to be pasted on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Setting means for drawing to generate generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane (a function to create a drawing list in the display CPU 131 and a function to execute drawing processing in VDP135). A storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) having the above and
A display control means (display CPU 131 and display CPU 131) that displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display unit (display surface G) and updates the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. VDP135) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a transformation target object (refraction object OB10) set as a transformation target.
The data generation means is a distortion forming means that distorts at least a part of the image by deforming the object to be deformed (a function of executing distortion effect calculation processing in the display CPU 131, and various processes for distortion effect in VDP135). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute.

According to the feature H1, at least a part of the image displayed on the display unit can be distorted by deforming the object to be deformed. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated texture to distort the image. Therefore, it is possible to express the distortion of the image relatively easily while suppressing the increase in the amount of data.

Feature H2. The distortion forming means is described in the feature H1 characterized in that the deformation target object is deformed by individually updating at least a part of the coordinates of each vertex constituting the deformation target object. Game machine.

According to the feature H2, the coordinates of at least a part of the vertices in each vertex constituting the deformation target object are updated, so that the individual image based on the deformation target object can be visually recognized as distorted.

It should be noted that "coordinate mapping data for designating the coordinates at each vertex constituting the transformation target object is provided, and a plurality of types of the coordinate mapping data are set so that the designated coordinates are different from each other. The strain forming means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the coordinate mapping data to be referred to every time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the object to be deformed is deformed. Is to be transformed so that it fluctuates. " According to such a configuration, the fluctuation of the image can be expressed, and the coordinates of each vertex of the object to be deformed are individually set in comparison with the configuration in which the calculation formula of each coordinate is given and calculated from the calculation formula. The processing load required for this can be reduced.

Feature H3. Described in feature H2, the strain forming means does not change the coordinates of the vertices constituting the deformation target object and which are related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformation target object. Game machine.

According to the feature H3, since the coordinates of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformed object are not changed, the boundary between the individual image based on the deformed object and the surrounding image is not conspicuous. This makes it possible to distort a part of the image while blending the two.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the deformation target object is a plate-shaped object having a plane set corresponding to an image to be distorted.

According to the feature H4, the deformation target object can be easily deformed by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the deformation target object. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for distorting.

Feature H5. The distortion forming means arranges the deformation target object on the viewpoint side of the predetermined object for displaying the predetermined image, and applies image data corresponding to the predetermined image to the deformation target object as the texture. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4, which is characterized in that it is attached as.

According to the feature H5, the predetermined image is distorted by deforming the object to be deformed. As a result, it is possible to standardize the processing in that it is not necessary to make the processing for a predetermined object different between the case of distorting and the case of not distorting.

Further, since it is possible to deal with the case of distorting and the case of not distorting depending on whether or not the object to be deformed is placed, it is relatively easy to switch between the case of distorting and the case of not distorting. ..

Feature H6. The arrangement means includes means for arranging the predetermined object among a plurality of objects set as display targets (a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the VDP 135).
The drawing setting means projects the predetermined object and generates predetermined generated data corresponding to the image including the predetermined image based on the data projected on the projection plane (process of step S4608 in VDP135). Has the ability to execute)
The data generation means generates textures to be attached to the object to be deformed by extracting image data corresponding to the predetermined image included in the predetermined generation data (steps S4801 and S4802 in VDP135). It has a function to execute the processing of
The distortion forming means arranges at least the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, attaches the texture generated by the texture generation means to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object. The gaming machine according to feature H5, which is characterized in that the predetermined image is distorted by the result.

According to the feature H6, the predetermined generated data is generated by performing the first projection on the predetermined object, and the texture to be attached to the object to be deformed is generated using the predetermined generated data. Then, the predetermined image can be distorted by performing the second projection on the object to be deformed to which the texture is pasted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to store the texture pasted on the object to be deformed in advance.

Further, since the texture pasted to the object to be transformed has a structure generated by projecting a predetermined object, the image related to the texture is actually displayed using the predetermined object. It can resemble a predetermined image. This makes it possible to blend the image based on the object to be transformed with the image around it.

Feature H7. The predetermined image is configured to be updatable at each update timing.
The predetermined generated data is generated every time the update timing is reached.
The texture generation means is characterized in that it generates a texture to be attached to the deformation target object by using the predetermined generation data generated at the update timing each time the update timing is reached. The gaming machine described in H6.

According to the feature H7, predetermined generation data is generated every time the update timing is reached, and a texture to be attached to the object to be deformed is generated. As a result, even when a predetermined image is updated, the updated predetermined image can be distorted.

As a specific configuration of "the predetermined image is configured to be updatable every time the update timing is reached", for example, "the arrangement means is the predetermined object each time the update timing is reached". The configuration is such that the predetermined image is scrolled in a predetermined direction by updating the coordinates in which the image is arranged, or the viewpoint is moved in a predetermined direction each time the update timing is reached. Conceivable.

Feature H8. The distortion forming means arranges the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, attaches a corresponding texture to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object to obtain the predetermined image. Creates distortion generation data (drawing data for effects and patterns) corresponding to distorted distortion images.
The data generation means is characterized by including a synthesis means (a function of executing the process of step S4617 in VDP135) for generating 1 generation data by synthesizing the predetermined generation data and the strain generation data. The gaming machine according to the feature H6 or the feature H7.

According to the feature H8, the process of generating the predetermined generated data related to the predetermined image and the process of generating the strain generation data are separated, and the generated data of 1 is generated by synthesizing the two. , The process of generating the texture to be pasted on the object to be transformed can be used as the process of generating the generated data of 1. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the above-mentioned features, it is possible to reduce the number of objects that are overlapped in two projections. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load caused by overlapping arrangements, overlapping projections, and the like.

Feature H9. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the object to the object.
In the various parameter information, the individual reflection value information (individual α) that determines the degree of reflecting the color information of the texture attached to the object on the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel). Value) is included,
By adjusting the individual reflection value information applied to the deformation target object, the distortion forming means makes it difficult for the color information related to the individual image based on the deformation target object to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H8, which is characterized in that it is to be.

According to the feature H9, the color information related to the individual image is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image based on the object to be deformed. As a result, an image that is more familiar with other areas is displayed on the outer edge side of the individual image based on the object to be deformed. Therefore, the boundary between the area where the distorted image is displayed and the other area can be made inconspicuous.

Feature H10. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the object to the object.
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree to which the color information of the texture attached to the object is reflected on the display unit.
The distortion forming means gradually adjusts the reflected value information applied to the deformed object so as not to gradually reflect the color information related to the individual image based on the deformed object (). The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that the display CPU 131 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S4519.

According to the feature H10, the image expressing the distortion gradually disappears, so that the process of disappearing the distortion is inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player when the distortion disappears.

Features H11. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H10, wherein the image to be distorted is a part of a background image displayed on the entire display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display unit, the amount of image data tends to be larger than that of the individual image displayed on a part of the display unit. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to distort a part of the background image, the amount of data tends to be large.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a part of the background image can be distorted without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, so that the amount of data can be suitably reduced.

The above-mentioned feature H group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set on the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, an effect of expressing the image displayed on the display unit more realistically may be performed. As the effect, for example, there is an effect of expressing the distortion of space based on the refraction of light. In this case, for example, if the degree of reflection of the refraction of light is derived by calculation, there is a concern that the processing load will increase. On the other hand, if the image data reflecting the refraction of light is stored in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (the function of creating the drawing list in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing process in the VDP 135), and the image is predetermined. Display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) that update the contents of the image when the update timing comes, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means generates predetermined first generation data (drawing data for a background) using a plurality of types of image data, and uses at least the first generation data to be different from the first generation data. 2 Generates data (drawing data for effect and design, or 1 drawing data).
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that an image is displayed on the display unit using at least the second generated data.

According to the feature I1, the first generated data is generated, and the second generated data is generated using the generated first generated data. As a result, by displaying the image using the second generated data, it is possible to display the image using the image related to the first generated data. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect and reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to store the first generated data in advance.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the data generation means processes at least a part of the first generated data and uses the processed data to generate the second generated data. ..

According to the feature I2, at least a part of the first generated data is processed to generate the second generated data. This makes it possible to diversify the variations of the displayed image as compared with the configuration in which the first generated data is used as it is.

Feature I3. The data generation means generates the first generation data related to the target image so that the display effect in which the predetermined target image changes over a plurality of update timings is performed, and at least the first generation data. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the second generation data corresponding to the transition of the target image can be generated by processing a part of the target image.

According to the feature I3, by using the first generated data and the second generated data, it is possible to execute a display effect in which the target image changes over a plurality of update timings. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display effect and reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to prepare the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned transition at each update timing.

Feature I4. The data generation means has a function of executing the processing of step S4617 in the VDP 135 for generating the generated data corresponding to the update timing of 1 by synthesizing the first generated data and the second generated data. ), The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or the feature I2.

According to the feature I4, since the generated data corresponding to the update timing of 1 is generated by synthesizing the first generated data and the second generated data, the first generated data used in the second generated data is generated. Can be diverted to the process for generating the above-mentioned generated data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the generated data is generated while the first generated data is generated at the update timing of 1.

Feature I5. The data generation means is
Arrangement means for arranging objects in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processes of step S4602, step S4609, and step S4610 in VDP135) and
A viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in VDP135) and
A pasting means for pasting a texture on the object (a function for executing color information setting processing in VDP135) and
A drawing setting means (a function of executing various drawing data generation processes in VDP135) that projects the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generates the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane. )When,
Equipped with
The object includes a specific object (refraction object OB10) used when generating the second generated data.
The second generated data is generated by arranging at least the specific object and projecting the specific object.
The pasting means is characterized in that when the second generated data is generated, at least a part of the first generated data is used as a texture to be pasted on the specific object (refraction object OB10). The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, at least a part of the first generated data is used as the texture to be attached to the specific object. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to store the texture to be pasted on the specific object in advance.

Feature I6. The data generation means is
A first placement means (a function of executing the process of step S4602 in VDP135) for arranging a predetermined object among a plurality of objects to be displayed in the virtual three-dimensional space, and
A viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in VDP135) and
At least a pasting means (a function for executing color information setting processing in VDP135) for pasting a texture on the predetermined object, and
The first generated data is generated based on the data projected on the projection plane by projecting the predetermined object arranged by the first arrangement means onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. 1 Drawing setting means (function to execute the process of step S4608 in VDP135) and
A texture generation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4801 and S4802 in VDP135) for generating a texture to be attached to a predetermined specific object (refraction object OB10) using the first generation data, and
A second arrangement means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4609 and S4610 in VDP135) for arranging at least the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and
For the second drawing, the object arranged by the second arrangement means is projected onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the second generation data is generated based on the data projected on the projection plane. Setting means (function to execute the process of step S4616 in VDP135) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the sticking means sticks a texture generated by the texture generating means to the specific object.

According to the feature I6, the first generation data is generated by performing the first projection on a predetermined object, and the texture to be pasted on the specific object is generated by using the first generation data. Then, the second generation data can be generated by performing the second projection on the specific object to which the texture is pasted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to store the texture pasted to the specific object in advance.

Further, since the texture pasted to the specific object is configured to be generated by projecting a predetermined object, the predetermined image related to the texture is actually displayed using the predetermined object. It can be resembled to the image of. As a result, the image based on the predetermined object and the image around it can be blended.

Further, since the texture to be pasted to the specific object can be generated by the same process as the process for generating the second generated data, the process can be diverted.

Feature I7. The specific object is a transformation target object set as a transformation target, and is a transformation target object.
The arranging means is a means for arranging the deformation target object so as to overlap the object for displaying the change target image set as the change target from the viewpoint side (a function of arranging the refraction object OB10 in the VDP 135). Equipped with
The data generating means is characterized by having a changing means (a function for displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135) for changing the changing target image by deforming the deforming target object. The gaming machine according to the feature I5 or the feature I6.

According to the feature I7, the change target image can be changed without storing the texture to be attached to the transformation target object.

Feature I8. The game according to feature I7, wherein the changing means deforms the deformation target object by individually updating at least a part of the coordinates of each vertex constituting the deformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature I8, the individual image based on the transformation target object can be changed by updating the coordinates of at least a part of the vertices in each vertex constituting the transformation target object.

It should be noted that "coordinate mapping data for designating the coordinates at each vertex constituting the transformation target object is provided, and a plurality of types of the coordinate mapping data are set so that the designated coordinates are different from each other. The changing means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the coordinate mapping data to be referred to every time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the object to be transformed changes. It is something that deforms so that it fluctuates. " According to such a configuration, the fluctuation of the image can be expressed, and the coordinates of each vertex of the object to be deformed are individually set in comparison with the configuration in which the calculation formula of each coordinate is given and calculated from the calculation formula. The processing load required for this can be reduced.

Feature I9. The game according to feature I8, wherein the changing means does not change the coordinates of the vertices constituting the deformation target object and which are related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature I9, since the coordinates of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformed object are not changed, the boundary between the individual image based on the deformed object and the surrounding image is not conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to change the image to be changed while blending the two.

Feature I10. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I9, wherein the deformation target object is a plate-shaped object having a plane set corresponding to the change target image.

According to the feature I10, the deformation target object can be easily deformed by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the deformation target object. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for changing the image to be changed.

Feature I11. The changing means executes distortion forming means for distorting the image to be changed by deforming the object to be deformed (a function of executing a distortion effect calculation process on the display CPU 131, and various processes for distortion effect on the VDP 135). The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I10, which is characterized in that it is a function).

According to the feature I11, the distortion of the image can be expressed by deforming the object to be deformed.

Feature I12. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the object to the object.
In the various parameter information, the individual reflection value information (individual α) that determines the degree of reflecting the color information of the texture attached to the object on the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel). Value) is included,
By adjusting the individual reflection value information applied to the transformation target object, the change means becomes less likely to reflect the color information related to the individual image based on the transformation target object toward the outer edge of the individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I11, which is characterized in that it is to be used.

According to the feature I12, the color information related to the individual image is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image based on the object to be deformed. As a result, an image that is more familiar with other areas is displayed on the outer edge side of the individual image based on the object to be deformed. Therefore, the boundary between the area where the changed image is displayed and the other area can be made inconspicuous.

Feature I13. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the object to the object.
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree to which the color information of the texture attached to the object is reflected on the display unit.
The changing means gradually adjusts the reflected value information applied to the deformed object so as not to gradually reflect the color information related to the individual image based on the deformed object (display). The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I12, characterized in that the CPU 131 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S4519.

According to the feature I13, since the image based on the object to be deformed gradually disappears, the process of disappearing the image is not conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player when the image based on the object to be deformed disappears.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein the first generated data is image data related to a background image displayed on the entire display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display unit, the amount of image data tends to be larger than that of the individual image displayed on a part of the display unit. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to process a part of the background image, the amount of data tends to be large.

On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to perform an effect using a part of the background image without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, so that the amount of data can be suitably reduced.

The above-mentioned feature I group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set on the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the degree of attention to the display effect, it is conceivable to diversify the display effect. However, if a plurality of image data are provided in order to diversify the display effect, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G) and
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (the function of creating the drawing list in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing process in the VDP 135), and the image is predetermined. Display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) that update the contents of the image when the update timing comes, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means uses the specific image data to generate a change target portion (distortion region PE1, overlay region PE2) that is a part of the specific individual image (background image, character image CP22) displayed on the display unit. It is characterized by having a changing means (a function of displaying each distorted image CP15, CP16 in the display CPU 131 and VDP135, and a function of displaying each partial image CP23 to CP25) by changing the specific individual image. A game machine to play.

According to the feature J1, the specific individual image can be changed by changing the change target image by using the specific image data. This makes it possible to diversify the display effect. In this case, since the specific image data is for changing the change target portion, the amount of data related to the specific image data can be reduced as compared with the image data corresponding to the entire specific individual image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in the amount of data due to the diversification while aiming at the diversification of the display effect.

Feature J2. The data generation means includes means for generating predetermined generated data corresponding to the specific individual image (a function of executing the process of step S4608 in the VDP 135).
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the changing means is such that an image based on the specific image data is displayed in place of the image related to the predetermined generated data at the changing target portion.

According to the feature J2, the specific individual image is changed by displaying the image based on the specific image data in place of the image related to the predetermined generated data at the change target portion. As a result, it is possible to easily change the change target portion as compared with the configuration in which the image related to the predetermined generated data and the image related to the specific image data are combined.

Feature J3. The data generation means is
Arrangement means for arranging objects in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processes of step S4602, step S4609, and step S4610 in VDP135) and
A viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in VDP135) and
A pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (a function of executing the processes of steps S4607 and S4615 in VDP135) and
A drawing setting means (step S4608, step S4616 and step S4617 in VDP135) that projects the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generates the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
The object includes a specific object used for displaying the specific individual image and in which the change target portion is set.
The specific image data is a specific texture set corresponding to the change target portion, and is
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the changing means changes an image displayed on the change target portion by using the specific texture.

According to the feature J3, the image displayed on the change target portion can be changed by using the specific texture. In this case, since the specific texture is set corresponding to the change target portion, the amount of data of the specific texture tends to be smaller than the configuration in which the texture related to the entire specific object is prepared. As a result, the amount of data can be reduced.

Features J4. The object includes a plate-shaped object formed corresponding to the change target site.
The changing means arranges the specific object and the plate-shaped object so that the plate-shaped object overlaps the change target portion from the viewpoint side, and attaches the specific texture to the plate-shaped object. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the image of the change target portion is changed into an image corresponding to the specific texture.

According to the feature J4, since the plate-shaped object is a polygon having relatively few vertices, the number of vertices of the plate-shaped object is likely to be not less than the number of vertices corresponding to the change target portion in the specific object. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of pasting the specific texture as compared with the configuration of pasting the specific texture to the change target portion of the specific object.

Further, since it is possible to correspond between the case of changing and the case of not changing depending on whether or not the plate-shaped object is arranged, it is possible to switch between the case of changing and the case of not changing relatively easily.

Feature J5. Multiple types of the specific texture are prepared,
The change means uses the plurality of types of specific textures in a predetermined order each time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that a series of operations can be performed at the change target portion. The gaming machine according to the feature J4.

According to the feature J5, a series of operations are performed at the change target portion by using the specific textures to be used in a predetermined order. In this case, since the amount of data of one specific texture is smaller than the amount of data of the texture of the entire specific object, the amount of data related to a series of operations can be significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to display an image related to the above series of operations with a small amount of data.

Features J6. The data generation means is
Arrangement means for arranging objects in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processes of step S4602, step S4609, and step S4610 in VDP135) and
A viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in VDP135) and
A pasting means for pasting a texture to the object (a function of executing the processes of steps S4607 and S4615 in VDP135) and
A drawing setting means (step S4608, step S4616, step S4617 in VDP135) that projects the object onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generates the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
The object includes a specific object used for displaying the specific individual image and in which the change target portion is set.
The specific image data is a transformation target object set as a transformation target, and is a transformation target object.
The changing means arranges the specific object and the deformation target object so that the deformation target object overlaps the change target portion from the viewpoint side, and deforms the transformation target object to cause the change target portion. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or the feature J2, which is characterized in that the image displayed in is changed.

According to the feature J6, by arranging the deformation target object so as to overlap with the change target part and deforming the deformation target object, the individual image based on the transformation target object is changed, and the image displayed on the change target part is displayed. It will change. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of textures as image data for changing the image.

Feature J7. The game according to feature J6, wherein the changing means deforms the deformation target object by individually updating at least a part of the coordinates of each vertex constituting the deformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature J7, the individual image based on the transformation target object can be changed by updating the coordinates of at least a part of the vertices in each vertex constituting the transformation target object.

It should be noted that "coordinate mapping data for designating the coordinates at each vertex constituting the transformation target object is provided, and a plurality of types of the coordinate mapping data are set so that the designated coordinates are different from each other. The changing means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the coordinate mapping data to be referred to every time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the object to be transformed changes. It is something that deforms so that it fluctuates. " According to such a configuration, the fluctuation of the image can be expressed, and the coordinates of each vertex of the object to be deformed are individually set in comparison with the configuration in which the calculation formula of each coordinate is given and calculated from the calculation formula. The processing load required for this can be reduced.

Features J8. The game according to feature J7, wherein the changing means does not change the coordinates of the vertices constituting the deformation target object and which are related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the deformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature J8, since the coordinates of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the object to be deformed are not changed, the boundary between the image related to the change target portion and the image around it is not conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to change the image of the change target portion while blending the two.

Features J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, wherein the deformation target object is a plate-shaped object having a plane set corresponding to the change target portion.

According to the feature J9, by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the object to be deformed, the object to be deformed can be easily deformed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for changing the change target portion.

Features J10. The changing means is a distortion forming means (a function of executing a distortion effect calculation process in the display CPU 131) for distorting an image related to the change target portion by deforming the object to be transformed, and various processes for distortion effect in the VDP135. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J6 to J9, which is characterized in that it is a function of executing the above.

According to the feature J10, the distortion of the image can be expressed by deforming the object to be deformed.

Features J11. The changing means arranges the deformation target object on the viewpoint side of the specific object, and attaches image data corresponding to the image displayed on the change target portion to the deformation target object as the texture. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J6 to J10.

According to the feature J11, the image of the change target portion is changed by deforming the transformation target object. As a result, it is possible to standardize the processing in that it is not necessary to make the processing for a predetermined object different between the case where the object is changed and the case where the object is not changed.

Further, since it is possible to correspond between the case where the object is changed and the case where the object is not changed depending on whether or not the object to be transformed is arranged, it is relatively easy to switch between the case where the object is changed and the case where the object is not changed.

Features J12. The placement means includes means for arranging the specific object among a plurality of objects set as display targets (a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the VDP 135).
The drawing setting means projects the specific object and generates predetermined generated data corresponding to the image including the specific individual image based on the data projected on the projection plane (process of step S4608 in VDP135). Has a function to execute)
The data generation means is a texture generation means (in VDP135) that generates a texture to be attached to the deformation target object by extracting image data corresponding to the change target portion of the specific individual image included in the predetermined generation data. A function for executing the processes of steps S4801 and S4802) is provided.
The changing means arranges at least the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, attaches the texture generated by the texture generation means to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object. The gaming machine according to feature J11, characterized in that the image of the change target portion is changed accordingly.

According to the feature J12, predetermined generation data is generated by performing the first projection on a specific object, and a texture to be pasted on the deformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data. Then, by performing the second projection on the deformation target object to which the texture is pasted, the image related to the change target portion can be changed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to store the texture pasted on the object to be deformed in advance.

Further, since the texture pasted to the object to be transformed has a configuration generated by projecting a specific object, a predetermined image related to the above texture is actually displayed using the specific object. It can resemble an image. This makes it possible to blend the image based on the object to be transformed with the image around it.

Furthermore, since the process of generating a texture to be pasted on a specific object and the process of changing the image of the change target part are common in that they are projected, it is possible to standardize the processing configurations of both. ..

Feature J13. The specific individual image is configured to be updatable at each update timing.
The predetermined generated data is generated every time the update timing is reached.
The texture generation means is characterized in that it generates a texture to be attached to the deformation target object by using the predetermined generation data generated at the update timing each time the update timing is reached. The gaming machine described in J12.

According to the feature J13, predetermined generation data is generated every time the update timing is reached, and a texture to be attached to the object to be deformed is generated. As a result, even when the specific individual image is updated, the updated specific individual image can be changed.

As a specific configuration of "the specific individual image is configured to be updatable every time the update timing is reached", for example, "the arrangement means is such that the specific object is configured every time the update timing is reached". A configuration in which the specific individual image is scrolled in a predetermined direction by updating the arranged coordinates, a configuration in which the viewpoint is moved in a predetermined direction each time the update timing is reached, and the like are considered. Be done.

Feature J14. The changing means arranges the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, attaches a corresponding texture to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object to obtain the change target portion. It creates change generation data in which the image has changed.
The data generation means is characterized by comprising a synthesis means (a function of executing the process of step S4617 in VDP135) for generating the generation data of 1 by synthesizing the predetermined generation data and the change generation data. The gaming machine according to the feature J12 or the feature J13.

According to the feature J14, the process of generating the predetermined generated data corresponding to the image including the specific individual image and the process of generating the change generation data are separated, and the generated data of 1 is generated by synthesizing the two. Therefore, the process of generating the texture to be pasted on the object to be deformed can be used as the process of generating the generated data of 1. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the above-mentioned features, it is possible to reduce the number of objects that are overlapped in two projections. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load caused by overlapping arrangements, overlapping projections, and the like.

Feature J15. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the image data to the image data.
The various parameter information includes individual reflection value information (individual α value) that determines the degree to which the color information of the image data is reflected in the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel).
By adjusting the individual reflection value information applied to the specific image data, the changing means makes it difficult for the color information related to the image based on the specific image data to be reflected toward the outer edge of the image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J14, which is characterized in that it is to be used.

According to the feature J15, the color information related to the image becomes less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the image based on the specific image data. As a result, an image that is more familiar with other areas is displayed on the outer edge side of the image based on the specific image data. Therefore, the boundary between the image of the change target portion and the image of the other region can be made inconspicuous.

Features J16. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the image data to the image data.
The various parameter information includes reflected value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree to which the color information of the image data is reflected in the display unit.
The changing means gradually adjusts the reflected value information applied to the specific image data so as not to gradually reflect the color information of the specific image data (in the display CPU 131, step S4519). The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J15, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing).

According to the feature J16, since the image based on the specific image data displayed on the change target portion gradually disappears, the process of the change image disappearing is not conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the changing image disappears.

Feature J17. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J16, wherein the specific individual image is a part of a background image displayed on the display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display unit, the amount of image data tends to be larger than that of the individual image displayed on a part of the display unit. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to change a part of the background image, the amount of data tends to be large.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since a part of the background image can be changed without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, the amount of data can be suitably reduced.

The above-mentioned feature J group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set on the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, it is considered that it is possible to diversify the display effect by performing a display effect that changes a part of the image displayed on the display unit. However, if, for example, the image data of the entire display unit is provided in order to perform the display effect, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Arrangement means for arranging objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (functions that execute the processes of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (in VDP135). A function for executing the processes of steps S1005 and S1006), a pasting means for pasting a texture on the object (a function for executing a color information setting process in VDP135), and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Projection means for projecting the object (a function of executing the processes of steps S1010 and S1011 in VDP135) and drawing setting means for generating generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane (drawing data). A storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, VDP135) having the function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in the VDP135, and the storage means (frame buffer 142).
A display control means (VDP135) that displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display unit (display surface G) and updates the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a predetermined object (each object OB1 to OB4) used when displaying a predetermined first predetermined image (sandy beach background image BP10) on the display unit, and the texture further includes the said object. It is a texture pasted to a predetermined object, and includes a predetermined texture (each texture TD1 to TD4) corresponding to an image when the predetermined object is viewed from a predetermined specific viewpoint.
The projection means comprises perspective projection and parallel projection as projection patterns for projecting the object onto the projection plane.
The data generation means is
A first generation means for generating generation data corresponding to the first predetermined image using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture by setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the perspective projection. (A function to execute arithmetic processing for sandy beach background in the display CPU 131, and a function to execute drawing processing in VDP135),
By changing the viewpoint from the specific viewpoint to a predetermined modified viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the parallel projection, a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture. A second generation means (a function of executing the background arithmetic processing of the sandy beach sprinting effect in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing the drawing processing in the VDP 135) to generate the generation data corresponding to the above.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, the first predetermined image is set without complicating the predetermined object by setting the viewpoint to a specific viewpoint, setting the perspective projection as the projection pattern, and further pasting the predetermined texture to the predetermined object. Can be made into an image with a sense of perspective.

In such a configuration, since the predetermined texture corresponds to the image when the predetermined object is viewed from the specific viewpoint, the image displayed by the predetermined object and the predetermined texture when the viewpoint is changed from the specific viewpoint to the changed viewpoint, and others. Perspective does not match with the image of. Therefore, the second predetermined image becomes an image with a sense of discomfort, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the second predetermined image is generated by performing perspective projection without considering the depth, between the image displayed by the predetermined object and the predetermined texture and the other image. It is possible to match the perspective of the image. This makes it possible to display two different predetermined images while using the same texture. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the increase in the amount of data.

Feature K2. Arrangement means for arranging objects that are three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (functions that execute the processes of steps S1002 to S1004 in VDP135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (in VDP135). A function for executing the processes of steps S1005 and S1006), a pasting means for pasting a texture on the object (a function for executing a color information setting process in VDP135), and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Projection means for projecting the object (a function of executing the processes of steps S1010 and S1011 in VDP135) and drawing setting means for generating generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane (drawing data). A storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, VDP135) having the function of executing the process of steps S101 to S1012 in the VDP135, and the storage means (frame buffer 142).
A display control means (VDP135) that displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display unit (display surface G) and updates the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a plurality of predetermined objects (each object OB1 to OB4) used when displaying a predetermined first predetermined image (sandy beach background image BP10) on the display unit, and the texture further includes. , A plurality of predetermined textures (each texture TD1 to TD4) corresponding to an image when the predetermined object is viewed from a predetermined specific viewpoint, which is a texture attached to each predetermined object. And
The projection means comprises perspective projection and parallel projection as projection patterns for projecting the object onto the projection plane.
The data generation means is
By setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the perspective projection, the first generation data corresponding to the first predetermined image is generated using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture. Generation means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a sandy beach background in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing drawing processing in VDP135) and
By changing the viewpoint from the specific viewpoint to a predetermined modified viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the parallel projection, a second image different from the first predetermined image using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture. A second generation means (a function of executing the background arithmetic processing of the sandy beach sprinting effect in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing the drawing process in the VDP 135) for generating the generated data corresponding to the predetermined image (the background image BP20 for the effect).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K2, each predetermined object is complicated by setting perspective projection as a projection pattern, arranging each predetermined object at a different position in the depth direction, and pasting each predetermined texture to each predetermined object. The first predetermined image can be made into an image with a sense of perspective.

In such a configuration, each predetermined texture corresponds to an image when each predetermined object is viewed from a specific viewpoint. Therefore, when the viewpoint is changed from the specific viewpoint to the changed viewpoint, the predetermined object and the corresponding predetermined texture are used. The perspective becomes inconsistent between the displayed image and the image displayed by the other predetermined object and the corresponding predetermined texture. Therefore, the second predetermined image becomes an image with a sense of discomfort, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the second predetermined image is generated by performing perspective projection without considering the depth, it is possible to match the perspective between the two. This makes it possible to display two different predetermined images while using the same texture. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the increase in the amount of data.

Feature K3. The second generation means is characterized in that the generated data is generated so that the second predetermined image moves by moving each image displayed by using each predetermined object in the same direction. The gaming machine described in the feature K2.

According to the feature K3, by moving each image displayed by using each predetermined object in the same direction, the second predetermined image can be moved, and the display effect can be diversified. On the other hand, when each image is moved in the same direction, the inconsistency in perspective between the images becomes conspicuous, and the display effect of moving the second predetermined image tends to be uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the feature K2, the above-mentioned inconsistency can be made inconspicuous by the configuration in which the generated data corresponding to the second predetermined image is generated by performing the parallel projection. Can be preferably performed.

Features K4. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying the parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the object to the object.
The parameter information includes magnification information of the object.
The feature K2 or the second generation means is characterized in that the magnification information applied to each predetermined object is set smaller as the distance between the change viewpoint and each predetermined object becomes larger. Feature The gaming machine described in K3.

According to the feature K4, the image related to the predetermined object arranged at a distant position with respect to the change viewpoint is displayed smaller. As a result, a pseudo perspective is generated, so that an image with a perspective can be expressed in parallel projection.

Feature K5. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying the parameter information that determines the display mode of the image by the object to the object.
The parameter information includes magnification information of the object.
The magnification information and coordinates of each predetermined object are set so that the area on which each predetermined object is projected when the predetermined objects are projected in parallel is the same as the area when the predetermined objects are perspectively projected. The gaming machine according to the feature K2 or the feature K3, which is characterized by being

According to the feature K5, the image obtained by parallel-projecting each predetermined object can be made to resemble the image obtained by perspective-projecting each predetermined object. As a result, the image obtained by parallel projection can be made to look as if it were an image with a sense of perspective obtained by perspective projection.

Features K6. The second generation means includes at least a moving means for moving each predetermined object at a predetermined speed (a function of executing the process of step S4313 in the display CPU 131).
The moving speed of each predetermined object is set so that the relative speed of each predetermined object with respect to the change viewpoint decreases as the distance between the change viewpoint and each predetermined object increases. The gaming machine according to any one of K2 to K5.

According to the feature K6, the predetermined object having a longer distance from the changing viewpoint seems to move slowly, and the predetermined object having a smaller distance from the changing viewpoint seems to move faster. This makes it possible to generate a pseudo perspective in a configuration in which parallel projection is performed.

Feature K7. Each predetermined object is a plate-shaped object, and is a plate-shaped object.
The plate-shaped objects are arranged side by side in the depth direction of the specific viewpoint in a state of being inclined with respect to the projection plane.
One of the features K2 to K6, wherein the texture attached to each predetermined object is set corresponding to the inclination so as to correspond to the image when viewed from the specific viewpoint. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature K7, since a perspective image can be generated by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object by performing perspective projection, the processing load related to the display of the image can be reduced. On the other hand, the difference in perspective between each individual image due to the change of the viewpoint is easily noticeable.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned feature K2, by performing parallel projection, it is possible to suppress a shift in perspective due to a change in viewpoint.

The above-mentioned feature K group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set on the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the interest of the player in the display effect, it is preferable to diversify the display effect. On the other hand, in order to diversify the display effect, it is not preferable to extremely increase the amount of data.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied are shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Design display device, 48 ... Production operation device, 131 ... Display CPU, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142 ... Frame buffer, 151 ... Geometry calculation unit, 152 ... Rendering unit, 155 ... Display circuit, AP1 to AP4 ... Attached parts, BP ... Main body parts, CH15 ... Individual image for teaching, CH16 ... Individual image for teaching, KD1 ... 1st key data, KD2 ... 2nd key data, ND1 ... 1 normal map data, ND2 ... 2nd normal map data, PC17 ... particle dispersion object, PC19 ... sea surface object, PC20 ... special object, PC21-PC23 ... 1st partial texture, PC24-PC27 ... 2nd partial texture , PT1 ... Particle single image, PT2 ... Particle single image, SD ... Surface data, SD1 ... Applicable surface data, SD2 ... Buffer surface data, RMD0 ... Round moving image data, IPD0 ... Insert image data, IP1 ... First 1 Inserted character image, IP2 ... 2nd inserted character image, RMD0a ... 1st round moving image data, RMD0b ... 2nd round moving image data, OB1 ... sandy beach object, OB2 ... wave object, OB3 ... sea object, OB4 ... empty object , TD1 ... sandy beach texture, TD2 ... wave texture, TD3 ... sea texture, TD4 ... sky texture, PV1 ... specific viewpoint, PV2 ... different viewpoint, BP10 ... sandy beach background image, BP20 ... production background image, OB10 ... refraction object, SKD1 ... Refraction α data, MD1 ... First coordinate mapping data, MD2 ... Second coordinate mapping data, CP13 ... Expansion coral image, CP14 ... Shrinking coral image, CP15 ... First distortion image, CP16 ... Second distortion image, PE1 ... Distortion area, OB21 ... Base object, OB22 ... Partial object, OB31 ... Head object, TD11 ... Base texture, TD12 ... Partial texture, TD21 to TD23 ... First to third partial texture, CP21 ... Base image, CP23 to CP25 ... 1st to 3rd partial images, PE2 ... Overlapping area.

Claims (1)

A display means having a display unit and
A display control means for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data generated by the data generation means and updating the contents of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means includes a changing means for changing the specific individual image by changing the change target portion which is a part of the specific individual image displayed on the display unit by using the specific image data. A gaming machine featuring.

Images